gmv5 Series

GMV5 DC INVERTER VRF UNITS
SERVICE MANUAL
T1/R410A /50-60Hz
(GC201508 - І )
Contents
PREFACE ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO BASIC FEATURES OF UNITS..................................................................... 1
I. BASIC OPERATING PRINCIPLE .................................................................................................................................... 1
II. INTERNAL PIPING DESIGN OF THE UNITS .................................................................................................................. 2
III. BASIC PARAMETERS OF UNIT................................................................................................................................... 6
IV. ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS....................................................................................................................................... 9
V. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................................................ 14
VI. BASIC REQUIREMENT FOR PIPE CONNECTION ...................................................................................................... 15
VII. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE ........................................................................................................ 18
VIII. UNIT OPERATING TEMPERATURE ........................................................................................................................ 19
IX. CONFIGURATION OF FULL FRESH AIR CONDITIONING IDU ................................................................................... 19
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................21
PART 1 ENGINEERING INSTALLATION PREPARATION ..................................................................................................21
I. INSTALLATION SAFETY .............................................................................................................................................. 21
II. IMPORTANCE OF INSTALLATION ENGINEERING ....................................................................................................... 21
III. COOPERATION BETWEEN DIFFERENT PROFESSIONS ............................................................................................ 23
IV. ONSITE REVIEW OF DESIGN DRAWING .................................................................................................................. 25
V. CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION PROCESS ............................................................................................................. 26
PART 2 MATERIAL SELECTION ....................................................................................................................................27
I. REQUIREMENT FOR SELECTING CONSTRUCTION M ATERIALS ................................................................................. 27
II. REQUIREMENT FOR SELECTING M AJOR M ATERIALS .............................................................................................. 27
PART 3 INSTALLATION SPACE REQUIREMENT .............................................................................................................29
I. PLACE SELECTION FOR INSTALLING ODU ............................................................................................................... 29
II. ODU DIMENSIONS AND INSTALLATION HOLE SIZE ................................................................................................. 29
III. INSTALLATION SPACE REQUIREMENT FOR ODU ................................................................................................... 32
PART 4 REQUIREMENTS ON FOUNDATION INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................40
I. ODU FOUNDATION .................................................................................................................................................... 40
II. ODU FIXING ............................................................................................................................................................. 41
III. VIBRATION REDUCTION FOR ODU ......................................................................................................................... 41
PART 5 PIPING CONNECTION .....................................................................................................................................42
Ⅰ. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF PIPING CONNECTION .................................................................................................... 42
Ⅱ. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF PIPING SEQUENCE ....................................................................................................... 43
Ⅲ. ALLOWABLE PIPE LENGTH AND DROP HEIGHT AMONG INDOOR AND OUTDOOR UNITS ......................................... 45
Ⅳ. CONNECTION PIPE AMONG OUTDOOR MODULES ................................................................................................. 47
Ⅴ. FITTING PIPE BETWEEN OUTDOOR UNIT AND THE FIRST M ANIFOLD .................................................................... 49
PART 6 PIPE INSTALLATION AND INSULATION ............................................................................................................55
I. PIPE INSTALLATION FOR THE COOLING SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 55
II. PIPE INSTALLATION FOR THE CONDENSATE WATER SYSTEM ................................................................................ 62
III. INSULATION SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................... 64
PART 7 ELECTRIC AND CONTROLLER INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................66
I. PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................... 66
II. INSTALLATION OF THE POWER CABLE .................................................................................................................... 66
III. INSTALLATION OF THE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 70
PART 8: VACUUMIZATION AND DESICCATION FOR THE REFRIGERANT SYSTEM ..........................................................73
I. AIR-TIGHTNESS TEST ................................................................................................................................................ 73
II. VACUUMIZATION AND DESICCATION FOR THE SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 74
PART 9: REFRIGERANT PERFUSION.............................................................................................................................75
I. CALCULATION METHOD FOR PERFUSING REFRIGERANT ........................................................................................ 75
II. METHOD FOR PERFUSING REFRIGERANT ............................................................................................................... 76
CHAPTER 3 COMMISSIONING OPERATION .....................................................................................................78
PART 1 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................................78
I. PRECAUTIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION......................................................................................................................... 78
II. PRECAUTIONS FOR THE USE OF REFRIGERANTS ................................................................................................... 78
PART 2 INTRODUCTION TO UNIT FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................78
I. FUNCTION SETTINGS OF ODUS ............................................................................................................................... 78
(I) System Function DIP Switch Settings ....................................................................................................... 78
(II) System Function Button Operations ........................................................................................................ 83
PART 3 COMMISSIONING PROCESS ..........................................................................................................................100
I. NECESSITY OF VRF ENGINEERING COMMISSIONING............................................................................................. 100
II. REQUIRED FILES AND TOOLS FOR ENGINEERING COMMISSIONING ..................................................................... 100
III. ENGINEERING COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES .................................................................................................... 100
IV. REFERENCES FOR PROPER UNIT OPERATION PARAMETERS ............................................................................. 122
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE..............................................................................................................................125
PART 1 FAILURE CODE TABLE ....................................................................................................................................125
PART 2 EXCEPTION AND TROUBLESHOOTING ..........................................................................................................129
PART 3 KEY PARTS MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................... 172
I. CAUTIONS ON CONTROLLER AP1 REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................ 172
II. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT AND CAUTIONS ..................................................................................................... 177
III. CAUTIONS ON COMPRESSOR DRIVE REPLACEMENT........................................................................................... 203
IV. ASSEMBLING AND DISASSEMBLING KEY PARTS OF ODUS ................................................................................ 206
V. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PART LIST .............................................................................................................. 218
Ⅵ. COMMON PARAMETER LISTS ............................................................................................................................... 230
CHAPTER 5 REMOTE CONTROL...................................................................................................................... 237
PART 1 ENGINEERING DEBUGGER ............................................................................................................................ 237
PART 2 REMOTE CONTROL ....................................................................................................................................... 270
GMV5 DC INVERTER VRF UNITS SERVICE MANUAL
Preface
This manual specifies safe operation requirements for GMV5 series VRF units from perspectives of
engineering and installation, commissioning and maintenance, as well as basic principles and
implementation methods. Professional operators must abide by relevant national (local) safety
requirements and technical specifications set forth in this manual during operations; otherwise, the air
conditioning system may fail or be damaged, and personnel safety accident may also occur.
Chapter 1 Introduction to Basic Features

of Units
I. Basic Operating Principle
Outdoor units of GMV5 VRF air conditioner can be implemented by combining multiple modules in
parallel. Similarly, indoor units (IDUs) consist of multiple units connecting in parallel. The operating
principle is as follows: When an IDU is operating in cooling mode, the outdoor unit (ODU) can
correspondingly enable the outdoor module based on the operating load requirement of the IDU. The
outdoor heat exchanger serves as a system condenser, and the heat exchangers of cooling IDUs are
connected in parallel to serve as a system evaporator. The circulation of air supply and air return of the
IDU is performed to adjust the indoor temperature and humidity. When an IDU is operating in heating
mode, all four-way valves in the ODU module are switched into energized status. The outdoor heat
exchange serves as the system evaporator, and the heat exchanger of the IDU serves as the system
condenser. The circulation of air supply and air return of the IDU is performed to adjust the indoor
temperature and humidity.
Model list:
Model Nominal Capacity Power Supply
Appearance
Model name Product Code Refrigerant W Ph, V, Hz
GMV-224WM/B-X CN851W1280 R410A 22400 3，380~415，50/60
GMV-280WM/B-X CN851W1290 R410A 28000 3，380~415，50/60
GMV-335WM/B-X CN851W1300 R410A 33500 3，380~415，50/60
GMV-400WM/B-X CN851W1310 R410A 40000 3，380~415，50/60
GMV-450WM/B-X CN851W1320 R410A 45000 3，380~415，50/60
GMV-504WM/B-X CN851W1610 R410A 50400 3，380~415，50/60
GMV-560WM/B-X CN851W1620 R410A 56000 3，380~415，50/60
GMV-615WM/B-X CN851W1630 R410A 61500 3，380~415，50/60
1
II. Internal Piping Design of the Units

1. Piping Diagram of GMV-224WM/B-X, GMV-280WM/B-X, and GMV-335WM/B-X
2
2. Piping Diagram of GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X
3
3. Piping Diagram of GMV-504WM/B-X, GMV-560WM/B-X and GMV-615WM/B-X
4. Names and Main Functions of Components

No. Name Main Function
Adjusts its own rotational speed based on the actual requirement
1 Compressor
of the system to implement capacity control.
Maintains a proper oil temperature in the compressor when the
2 Compressor heat tape compressor is in standby status, ensuring the reliability during
compressor startup.
Compressor casing-top Detects a compressor's exhaust gas temperature for compressor
3
temperature sensor control and protection.
Exhaust pipe temperature Detects a compressor's exhaust gas temperature for compressor
4
sensor of compressor control and protection.
Protects a compressor by sending feedback signal to stop the
High-pressure circuit
5 system when the compressor's discharge temperature exceeds the
breaker
operating value of high-pressure circuit breaker.
Separates the gas and oil in the system to ensure compressor
6 Oil extractor
reliability.
4
Equalizes the oil for all modules in the case of excess oil in the
7 Oil equalizing device current module when multiple modules are arranged in parallel,
thus ensuring the system reliability.
Maintains a proper oil temperature in the compressor when the
Heat tape of oil equalizing
8 compressor is in standby status, ensuring the reliability of
device
compressor startup.
Prevents high-pressure gas from entering the compressor and fast
9 One-way valve balances the suction pressure and discharge pressure in a
compressor.
Detects the high pressure value in the system in real time mode for
10 High-pressure sensor
compressor protection and other control functions.
Used for the switching between the cooling and heating functions
11 Four-way valve
of system IDU.
12 Heat exchanger Used for outdoor heat exchange.
13 Fan Strengthens heat exchanging.
Defrosting temperature
14 Used for defrosting detection.
sensor
Electronic expansion
15 Controls refrigerant adjustment in heating mode.
valve for heating
16 One-way valve Controls refrigerant flow direction.
Controls the degree of subcooling of tube refrigerant when the
Subcooler electronic
17 system is running in cooling mode, and reduces the capacity loss
expansion valve
on pipes.
18 Subcooler Controls the degree of subcooling of tube.
Liquid outlet temperature
19 Detects tube temperature.
sensor of subcooler
Detects the inlet temperature of gas-liquid separator to prevent the
Inlet temperature sensor
20 system from running when the refrigerant flows back to the
of gas-liquid separator
compressor.
Gas outlet temperature
21 Detects gas temperature of subcooler.
sensor of subcooler
Detects system low pressure to avoid extra-low operating
22 Low-pressure sensor
pressure.
Separate gas and liquid to prevent the system from running when
23 Gas-liquid separator
the refrigerant flows back to the compressor.
Outlet temperature sensor Detects internal status of gas-liquid separator to further control the
24
of gas-liquid separator compressor suction performance.
25 Oil equalizing valve 1 Used for oil equalizing control among modules.
Used for oil equalizing control among modules and avoid reverse
26 One-way valve
flow of oil.
27 Unloading valve Avoids over-high pressure caused by pipeline blind spot.
28 Oil equalizing valve 2 Used for oil equalizing control among modules.
29 Filter Prevents impurities from entering components and parts.
30 Capillary tube Supports flow regulating and pressure reduction.
Stop valve, closed when the unit is delivered from the factory and
31 Liquid valve
will be opened after installation.
32 Air valve
Low-pressure Detects the low pressure value or charges refrigerant during
33
measurement valve system running.
34 Oil balance valve
Checks the quality of refrigerating machine oil of compressor
35 Oil check valve
during maintenance.
36 Unloading valve Avoid over-high pressure caused by pipeline blind spot.
37 Air by-pass valve Avoids extra-high or low operating pressure.
38 Pressure-balanced valve Ensures success startup of compressor.
5
III. Basic Parameters of Unit

1. Basic Parameters of ODU
GMV-22 GMV-28 GMV-33 GMV-40 GMV-45 GMV-50 GMV-56 GMV-61
Model 4WM/B- 0WM/B- 5WM/B- 0WM/B- 0WM/B- 4WM/B- 0WM/B- 5WM/B-
X X X X X X X X
CN851 CN851 CN851 CN851 CN851 CN851 CN851 CN851
Product Code
W1280 W1290 W1300 W1310 W1320 W1610 W1620 W1630
Refrigeration
HP 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Capacity
Combination Mode — —— —— —— —— —— —— —— ——
Power Supply 380-415V 3N~ 50Hz/60Hz

Rated Cooling kW 22.4 28 33.5 40 45 50.4 56 61.5
Capacity Heating kW 25 31.5 37.5 45 50 56.5 63 69
930 x 930 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x
Dimensions
mm 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x
(W x D x H)
1605 1605 1605 1605 1605 1740 1740 1740
Liquid
mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9
Pipe
Tubing
Gas
Dimensio mm Φ19.05 Φ22.2 Φ25.4 Φ25.4 Φ28.6 Φ28.6 Φ28.6 Φ28.6
Pipe
ns
Balanc
mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
e pipe
Weight kg 225 225 285 360 360 360 385 385
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A
Refrigera Built-in
nt Filling kg 5.9 6.7 8.2 9.8 10.3 11.3 14.3 14.3
Volume

Model 0WM/B- 0WM/B- 5WM/B- 0WM/B- 0WM/B- 0WM/B- 10WM/B 65WM/B
X X X X X X -X -X
Refrigeration
HP 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38
Capacity
0WM/B- 0WM/B- 0WM/B- 0WM/B- 0WM/B- 5WM/B- 0WM/B- 0WM/B-
X+ X+ X+ X+ X+ X+ X+ X+
Combination Mode —
0WM/B- 0WM/B- 4WM/B- 0WM/B- 5WM/B- 5WM/B- 5WM/B- 5WM/B-
X X X X X X X X
Rated Cooling kW 68 73 78.4 84 89.5 95 101.5 106.5
Capacit
y Heating kW 76.5 81.5 88 94.5 100.5 106.5 114 119
930 x 930 x 930x 930x 1930 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x
765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x
Dimensions (W x D x 1605 + 1605 + 1605 + 1605 + 1605 + 1605+ 1605 + 1605 +
mm
H) 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x 1340 x
765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x 765 x
1605 1605 1740 1740 1740 1740 1740 1740
Liquid
mm Φ15.9 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05
Tubing Pipe
Dimensio Air Pipe mm Φ28.6 Φ31.8 Φ31.8 Φ31.8 Φ31.8 Φ31.8 Φ38.1 Φ38.1
ns Balance
mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
pipe
225+36 225+36 225+38 225+38 360+38
Weight kg 225+360 285+385 360+385
0 0 5 5 5
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A
Refrigera Built-in
nt 6.7+10. 6.7+14. 6.7+14. 9.8+14. 10.3+14.
Filling kg 6.7+9.8 6.7+11.3 8.2+14.3
3 3 3 3 3
Volume
6
GMV-1130 GMV-1180 GMV-1235 GMV-1300 GMV-1350 GMV-1410 GMV-1460

Model
WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X
Refrigeration Capacity HP 40 42 4644 48 50 52
GMV-280W GMV-280W GMV-335W GMV-280W
GMV-504W GMV-560W GMV-615W M/B-X + M/B-X + M/B-X + M/B-X +
M/B-X + M/B-X + M/B-X + GMV-450W GMV-450W GMV-450W GMV-560W
GMV-615W GMV-615W GMV-615W M/B-X + M/B-X + M/B-X + M/B-X +
M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X GMV-560W GMV-615W GMV-615W GMV-615W
M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X
Rated Cooling kW 111.9 117.5 123 129 134.5 140 145.5
Capacity Heating kW 125.5 132 138 144.5 150.5 156.5 163.5
1340×765
930×765× 930×765 x 930×765×
×
1340 x 765 1340 x 765 1340 x 765 1605+1340 1605+1340 1605+1340
1605+1340
Dimensions (W x D x x 1740 + x 1740 + x 1740 + x 765 x x 765 x ×765×
mm ×765×
H) 1340 x 765 1340 x 765 1340 x 765 1605+1340 1740 +1340 1740+1340
x 1740 x 1740 x 1740 ×765× ×765× 1605+1340
×765×
×765×
1740 1740 1740
1740
Liquid Pipe mm Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05
Tubing
Dimension Air Pipe mm Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ41.3 Φ41.3
s Balance
mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
pipe
225+360+ 225+360+ 285+360+ 225+385+
Weight kg 360+385 385+385 385+385
385 385 385 385
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A
Refrigeran Built-in
t 5.9+10.3+14 6.7+10.3+14 8.2+10.3+14 6.7+14.3+14
Filling kg 11.3+14.3 14.3+14.3 14.3+14.3
.3 .3 .3 .3
Volume
GMV-1515 GMV-1580 GMV-1630 GMV-1685 GMV-1750 GMV-1800

Model
WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X WM/B-X
Refrigeration
HP 54 56 58 60 62 64
Capacity
GMV-280WM GMV-335WM GMV-400WM GMV-450WM GMV-504WM GMV-560WM
/B-X + /B-X + /B-X + /B-X + /B-X + /B-X +
/B-X + /B-X + /B-X + /B-X + /B-X + /B-X +
/B-X /B-X /B-X /B-X /B-X /B-X
Rated Cooling kW 151 156.5 163 168 173.4 179
Capacity Heating kW 169．5 175.5 183 188 194.5 201
930×765× 1340×765× 1340×765× 1340×765× 1340×765× 1340×765×
1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340×
Dimensions (W x D x
mm 765× 765× 765× 765× 765× 765×
H)
1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340×
765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740
Liquid
mm Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05
Tubing Pipe
Dimension Air Pipe mm Φ41.3 Φ41.3 Φ41.3 Φ41.3 Φ41.3 Φ41.3
s Balance
mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
pipe
225+385+38 285+385+38 360+385+38 360+385+38 360+385+38 385+385+38
Weight kg
5 5 5 5 5 5
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A
Refrigeran Built-in
t 10.3+14.3+14. 11.3+14.3+14. 14.3+14.3+14.
Filling kg 6.7+14.3+14.3 8.2+14.3+14.3 9.8+14.3+14.3
3 3 3
Volume
7
GMV-1845W GMV-1908W GMV-1962W GMV-2016W GMV-2072W GMV-2128W

Model
M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X
GMV-280WM/ GMV-280WM/ GMV-280WM/ GMV-280WM/ GMV-280WM/
GMV-615WM/ B-X+ B-X+ B-X+ B-X+ B-X+
B-X GMV-450WM/ GMV-504WM/ GMV-560WM/ GMV-560WM/ GMV-615WM/
+GMV-615WM B-X B-X B-X B-X B-X
/B-X +GMV-560WM +GMV-560WM +GMV-560WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM
+GMV-615WM /B-X /B-X /B-X /B-X /B-X
/B-X +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM
/B-X /B-X /B-X /B-X /B-X
Rated Cooling kW 184.5 190.5 195.9 201.5 207 212.5
Capacity Heating kW 207 213.5 220 226.5 232.5 238.5
930×765× 930×765× 930×765× 930×765× 930×765×
1340×765×
1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1605+1340×
1740+1340×
765×1605 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740
Dimensions (W x D x H) mm 765×
+1340×765× +1340×765× +1340×765× +1340×765× +1340×765×
1740+1340×
1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340×
765×1740
765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740
Liquid Pipe mm Φ19.05 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5
Tubing Air Pipe mm Φ41.3 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2
Dimensions Balance
mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
pipe
385+385+38 225+360+38 225+360+38 225+385+38 225+385+38 225+385+38
Weight kg
5 5+385 5+385 5+385 5+385 5+385
Refrigerant Built-in
6.7+10.3+14.3+ 6.7+11.3+14.3+ 6.7+14.3+14.3+ 6.7+14.3+14.3+ 6.7+14.3+14.3+
Filling kg 14.3+14.3+14.3
14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3
Volume
GMV-2184W GMV-2240W GMV-2295W GMV-2350W GMV-2405W GMV-2460W

Model
M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X M/B-X
GMV-335WM/ GMV-400WM/ GMV-450WM/ GMV-504WM/ GMV-560WM/ GMV-615WM/
B-X+ B-X+ B-X+ B-X+ B-X+ B-X+
GMV-615WM/ GMV-615WM/ GMV-615WM/ GMV-615WM/ GMV-615WM/ GMV-615WM/
B-X B-X B-X B-X B-X B-X
+GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM
+GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM +GMV-615WM
Rated Cooling kW 218 224.5 229.5 234.9 240.5 246
Capacity Heating kW 244.5 252 257 263.5 270 276
1340×765× 1340×765× 1340×765× 1340×765× 1340×765× 1340×765×
1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1605+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340×
765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740
Dimensions (W x D x H) mm
+1340×765× +1340×765× +1340×765× +1340×765× +1340×765× +1340×765×
1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340× 1740+1340×
765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740 765×1740
Liquid Pipe mm Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5
Tubing Air Pipe mm Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2
Dimensions Balance
mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
pipe
285+385+38 360+385+38 360+385+38 360+385+38 385+385+38 385+385+38
Weight kg
5+385 5+385 5+385 5+385 5+385 5+385
Refrigerant Built-in
8.2+14.3+14.3+ 9.8+14.3+14.3+ 10.3+14.3+14.3 11.3+14.3+14.3 14.3+14.3+14.3 14.3+14.3+14.3
Filling kg
14.3 14.3 +14.3 +14.3 +14.3 +14.3
Volume
8
IV. Electrical Parameters

1. Power Cable Wire Gauge and Circuit Breaker Selection
Circuit Circuit breaker
Wire size of
breaker capacity for Wire size of combined
Model Basic models power supply
capacity combined units uni (mm2)
(mm2)
(A) (A)
GMV-224WM/B-X GMV-224WM/B-X 20 20 2.5 2.5×5
GMV-280WM/B-X GMV-280WM/B-X 25 25 2.5 2.5×5
GMV-335WM/B-X GMV-335WM/B-X 32 32 4.0 4.0×5
GMV-400WM/B-X GMV-400WM/B-X 40 40 6.0 6.0×5
GMV-450WM/B-X GMV-450WM/B-X 40 40 6.0 6.0×5

GMV-504WM/B-X GMV-504WM/B-X 50 50 10 10×5
GMV-560WM/B-X GMV-560WM/B-X 63 63 10 10×5
GMV-615WM/B-X GMV-615WM/B-X 63 63 10 10×5
GMV-680WM/B-X 280+400 63 25 + 40 2.5 + 6.0 2.5×5 + 6.0×5
GMV-730WM/B-X 280+450 63 25 + 40 2.5 + 6.0 2.5×5 + 6.0×5
GMV-785WM/B-X 280+504 80 25 + 50 2.5 + 10 2.5×5 + 10×5

GMV-850WM/B-X 280+560 80 25 + 63 2.5 + 10 2.5×5 + 10×5
GMV-900WM/B-X 280+615 80 25 + 63 2.5 + 10 2.5×5 + 10×5
GMV-950WM/B-X 335+615 80 32 + 63 4.0 + 10 4.0×5 + 10×5
GMV-1010WM/B-X 400+615 100 40 + 63 6.0 + 10 6.0×5 + 10×5
GMV-1065WM/B-X 450+615 100 40 + 63 6.0 + 10 6.0×5 + 10×5
GMV-1130WM/B-X 504+615 125 50 + 63 10 + 10 10×5 + 10×5

GMV-1180WM/B-X 560+615 125 63 + 63 10 + 10 10×5 + 10×5
GMV-1235WM/B-X 615+615 125 63 + 63 10 + 10 10×5 + 10×5
GMV-1300WM/B-X 280+450+560 125 25 + 40 + 63 2.5 + 6.0 + 10 2.5×5 + 6.0×5 +10×5

2.5×5 + 6.0×5 + 10×
GMV-1350WM/B-X 280+450+615 125 25 + 40 + 63 2.5 + 6.0 + 10
5
4.0×5 + 6.0×5 + 10×
GMV-1405WM/B-X 335+450+615 125 32 + 40 + 63 4.0 + 6.0 + 10
5
GMV-1456WM/B-X 280+560+615 160 25 + 63 + 63 2.5 + 10 + 10 2.5×5 + 10×5 + 10×5
GMV-1512WM/B-X 280+615+615 160 25 + 63 + 63 2.5 + 10 + 10 2.5×5 + 10×5 + 10×5
GMV-1570WM/B-X 335+615+615 160 32 + 63 + 63 4.0 + 10 + 10 4.0×5 + 10×5 + 10×5
GMV-1650WM/B-X 400+615+615 160 40 + 63 + 63 6.0 + 10 + 10 6.0×5 + 10×5+ 10×5
GMV-1700WM/B-X 450+615+615 160 40 + 63 + 63 6.0 + 10 + 10 6.0×5 + 10×5 + 10×5
GMV-1750WM/B-X 504+615+615 160 50 + 63 + 63 10 + 10 +10 10×5 + 10×5 + 10×5
GMV-1800WM/B-X 560+615+615 180 63 + 63 + 63 10 + 10 +10 10×5 + 10×5 + 10×5

GMV-1845WM/B-X 615+615+615 180 63+63+63 10+10+10 10×5+10×5+10×5
2.5×5+6.0×5+10×
GMV-1908WM/B-X 280+450+560+615 180 25+40+63+63 2.5+6.0+10+10
5+10×5
2.5×5+10×5+10×
GMV-1962WM/B-X 280+504+560+615 180 25+50+63+63 2.5+10+10+10
5+10×5
2.5×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2016WM/B-X 280+560+560+615 200 25+63+63+63 2.5+10+10+10
5+10×5
9
Circuit Circuit breaker

Wire size of
breaker capacity for Wire size of combined
Model Basic models power supply
capacity combined units uni (mm2)
(mm2)
(A) (A)
2.5×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2072WM/B-X 280+ 560+615+615 200 25+63+63+63 2.5+10+10+10
5+10×5
2.5×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2128WM/B-X 280+615+615+615 200 25+63+63+63 2.5+10+10+10
5+10×5
4.0×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2184WM/B-X 335+615+615+ 615 200 32+63+63+63 4.0+10+10+10
5+10×5
6.0×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2240WM/B-X 400+615+615+615 200 40+63+63+63 6.0+10+10+10
5+10×5
6.0×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2295WM/B-X 450+615+615+615 225 40+63+63+63 6.0+10+10+10
5+10×5
10×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2350WM/B-X 504+615+615+615 225 50+63+63+63 10+10+10+10
5+10×5
10×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2405WM/B-X 560+615+615+615 225 63+63+63+63 10+10+10+10
5+10×5
10×5+10×5+10×
GMV-2460WM/B-X 615+615+615+615 225 63+63+63+63 10+10+10+10
5+10×5
For information about the leakage circuit breaker for an indoor unit, refer to the following table. The
circuit breaker capacities listed in the following table indicate the circuit breaker capacities when all
indoor units in the same syatem are connecting connected to the main power.
Total Current Capacity of Circuit Breaker Minimum Sectional Area (mm²) Minimum Sectional Area (mm²) of
Indoor Units Capacity (A) of Power Cable Grounding Wire
Less than 10A 10 1.0 1.0

16~10A 16 1.5 1.5
20~16A 20 2.5 2.5
32~20A 32 4.0 4.0
40~32A 40 6.0 6.0
50~40A 50 10.0 10.0
63~50A 63 16.0 16.0
80~63A 80 25.0 16.0
100~80A 100 35.0 16.0
125~100A 125 50.0 25.0
Table B: The breaker capacity and power cable specifications when a circuit breaker is installed on
each indoor unit independently. Note that the circuit breaker of the indoor unit is used only for
short-circuit protection and abnormal overload of the corresponding indoor unit. Usually, the circuit
breaker is off. All circuit breaker terminals must be connected to one main power switch, which is used to
cut off the power of all indoor units.
Breaker Minimum Sectional Area of Minimum Sectional Area of
IDU 2 2
Capacity (A) Power Cable (mm ) Grounding Cable (mm )
Low-static-pressure Air-duct-type Air
6 1.0 1.0
Conditioner
All-dimensional Ceiling Cassette Type
6 1.0 1.0
Air Conditioner
Single-side Air Outlet Ceiling Cassette
6 1.0 1.0
Type Air Conditioner
Floor Ceiling Split Unit 6 1.0 1.0
Wall mounted type Air Conditioner 6 1.0 1.0
Static-pressure Air-duct-type Air
6 1.0 1.0
Conditioner
10
Electrical Parameters of High-static-pressure Air-duct-type Air Conditioner
Circuit Breaker Capacity Minimum Sectional Area

Model Power Supply
(A) (mm²) of Grounding Wire
GMV-ND56PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0
GMV-ND224PH/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 10 1.0
GMV-ND280PH/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 10 1.0
Note:
(1) The circuit breaker and power cable specifications are selected based on the maximum power
(maximum current) of the units.
(2) The power cable specifications are obtained under the conditions that the ambient temperature is
40℃, the working temperature of multi-core copper cable (for example, YJV cable) is 90℃, and the
cable is exposed in cable troughs. In different applications, adjust the specifications based on national
standards.
(3) Only copper conductor cable can be used.
(4) The sectional area of a wire is applicable for a distance range of up to 15 m. If the distance is greater
than 15 m, increase the sectional area of the wire correspondingly to prevent the wire from being burned
due to overload current and to avoid fire.
(5) The circuit breaker specifications are obtained under the conditions that the ambient temperature is
40℃ when the circuit breaker is working. In different applications, adjust the specifications based on the
circuit breaker manual.
(6) The circuit breaker must support magnetic release and thermal release at the same time to protect
the system from short circuit and overload.
Electrical Parameters of Fresh Air Conditioning IDU
Minimum Sectional Minimum Sectional
Power Supply Circuit Breaker
Mode Area of Grounding Area of Power
Specification Capacity/A 2 2
Wire/mm Cable/mm
GMV-NX140P/A(X1.2)-K 220-240V～50Hz 6 1.0 1.0
GMV-NX224P/A(X2.0)-M 380-415V～50Hz 6 1.0 1.0
GMV-NX280P/A(X2.5)-M 380-415V～50Hz 6 1.0 1.0
GMV-NX280P/A(X3.0)-M 380-415V～50Hz 6 1.0 1.0
GMV-NX450P/A(X4.0)-M 380-415V～50Hz 10 1.0 1.0

Notes:
（1）. The circuit breaker and power cable specifications in the above table are selected according to the
11
maximum unit power (maximum current).

（2）. The power cable specifications in the table are obtained under the condition that the multi-copper
core cable (such as YJV copper-core XLPE insulated power cable ) is laid in the wire trough in an
exposed manner (the ambient temperature is 40℃ and the cable operating temperature is 90℃). If the
use condition is different, calculate and adjust the specification according to the corresponding national
standard.
（3）. The circuit breaker specifications in the above table is obtained under the condition that the
ambient temperature is 40℃ when the circuit breaker is operating. If the use condition is different,
calculate and adjust the specification according to the instructions on circuit breaker specifications.
（4）When breaker devices are installed near the unit, the minimum distance between levels of the
cut-off device is 3 mm (it is required for both the indoor unit and outdoor unit).
2. Circuit Diagram
2.1 Circuit Diagram of ODU
2.1.1 Circuit diagram of GMV-224WM/B-X and GMV-280WM/B-X
12
2.1.2 Circuit diagram of GMV-335WM/B-X
2.1.3 Circuit diagram of GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X
13
2.1.4 Circuit diagram of GMV-504WM/B-X、GMV-560WM/B-X and GMV-615WM/B-X
V. Optional Accessories
GMV5 series VRF units support the following optional accessories:
Export Model Remark
ODU ML01/A
Manifold FQ01A/A, FQ01B/A, FQ02/A, For model selection, refer to Pipe Selection.
IDU
FQ03/A, and FQ04/A
Remote-control Receiver Board JS03 Applicable for air-duct-type IDUs.
Provides the commissioning functions for
Commissioning Remote Controller YV1L1
function settings of IDUs.
Applicable for units that support CAN bus
Commissioning Software DE40-33/A(C)
communication technology.
Software FE31-00/AD(BM)
Remote Optoelectronic Isolation
GD02 Applicable for units that support CAN bus
Monitoring Converter
communication technology.
System MODbus Gateway ME30-24/E4(M)
BACnet Gateway MG30-24/D2(B)
Note: Contact local sales company for optional accessories.
14
VI. Basic Requirement for Pipe Connection

1. Outdoor units adopt the modular combination design of individual cooling system, that is, units
are connected by using pipes in parallel during installation. The tubing system used among modules
includes air pipes, liquid pipes and oil equalizing pipes.
15
Note:
(1) Functions of oil check valve: During after-sale maintenance, the oil check valve can be used to
extract lubricating oil samples, which are further detected to analyze the oil quality in the system.
The oil check valve can also serve as the inlet for lubricating oil charging. Stop the system for at least
12 hours before the extracting of lubricating oil from the system; otherwise, overheat oil may burn the
operator.
(2) Functions of low-pressure check valve: It is mainly used for low pressure detection of the system and
refrigerant charging during after-sale maintenance.
Pipe connection diagram of outdoor modules
2. Each ODU system can be connected to multiple IDUs. Detailed information about the number of units to
be connected and capacity ranges is shown in the following table:
Max number of connectable Capacity Range of Connected IDU (kW)
ODU model
IDU (unit) Minimum Capacity Maximum Capacity
GMV-224WM/B-X 13 11.2 30.2
GMV-280WM/B-X 16 14.0 37.8
GMV-335WM/B-X 19 16.8 45.2
16
GMV-400WM/B-X 23 20.0 54.0
GMV-450WM/B-X 26 22.5 60.8
GMV-504WM/B-X 29 25.2 68.0
GMV-560WM/B-X 33 28.0 75.6
GMV-615WM/B-X 36 30.8 83.0
GMV-680WM/B-X 39 34.0 91.8
GMV-730WM/B-X 43 36.5 98.6
GMV-785WM/B-X 46 39.3 106.0
GMV-850WM/B-X 50 42.5 114.8
GMV-900WM/B-X 53 45.0 121.5
GMV-960WM/B-X 56 48.0 129.6
GMV-1010WM/B-X 59 50.5 136.4
GMV-1065WM/B-X 63 53.5 144.5
GMV-1130WM/B-X 64 56.5 152.6
GMV-1180WM/B-X 64 59.0 159.3
GMV-1235WM/B-X 64 62.5 168.8
GMV-1300WM/B-X 64 65.0 175.5
GMV-1350WM/B-X 64 67.5 182.3
GMV-1410WM/B-X 66 70.5 190.4
GMV-1460WM/B-X 69 73.0 197.1
GMV-1515WM/B-X 71 75.8 204.5
GMV-1580WM/B-X 74 79.0 213.3
GMV-1630WM/B-X 77 81.5 220.0
GMV-1685WM/B-X 80 85.0 229.5
GMV-1750WM/B-X 80 87.5 236.3
GMV-1800WM/B-X 80 90.0 243.0
GMV-1845WM/B-X 80 92.2 249
GMV-1908WM/B-X 80 95.4 257.5
GMV-1962WM/B-X 80 98.1 264.8
GMV-2016WM/B-X 80 100.8 272.1
GMV-2072WM/B-X 80 103.6 279.7
GMV-2128WM/B-X 80 106.4 287.2
GMV-2184WM/B-X 80 109.2 294.8
GMV-2240WM/B-X 80 112.0 302.4
GMV-2295WM/B-X 80 114.7 309.8
GMV-2350WM/B-X 80 117.5 317.9
GMV-2405WM/B-X 80 120.2 324.6
GMV-2460WM/B-X 80 123.0 332.1
17
VII. Precautions on Refrigerant Leakage

Personnel related to air conditioning engineering design and installation operators must abide by
the safety requirement for preventing refrigerant leakage specified in local laws and regulations. If such
safety requirement is unavailable in local documents, the design and operation must be implemented
based on the following principles: GMV5 series VRF units adopt the R410A refrigerant, which is
nonflammable and nontoxic. However, the space for refrigerant leakage must be sufficient to ensure that
the refrigerant concentration does not exceed that specified in the safety requirement; otherwise, people
involved can be stifled by the refrigerant.
The maximum refrigerant charge and maximum refrigerant concentration in the system are
calculated directly based on the size of the air conditioning space. The unit of refrigerant concentration is
1 kg/m³.
1) Flow direction of refrigerant leakage.

2) Room for refrigerant leakage. Since the concentration of refrigerant is greater than that of air, pay
attention to the spaces where the refrigerant may residue, for example, the basement.
Method for calculating the maximum concentration of refrigerant:
(1) Calculate the refrigerant charge quantity of each system.
Charge quantity of an ODU upon delivery (for the system consisting of multiple modules in parallel,
the accumulative charge quantity of modules upon delivery is used) + Onsite charge quantity = Total
refrigerant charge quantity in the system (kg)
(2) Calculate the volume of maximum air conditioning space (m³).
Volume of air conditioning space (m³) = Len gth x Width x Height
Note: The length, width and height here refer to the effective length, width and height of the indoor
space.
(3) Calculate the maximum refrigerant concentration of the refrigeration system.
Total refrigerant quantity of the system
------------------≤ Maximum supported concentration (kg/m³)
Minimum volume of air conditioning space
Note: If the maximum supported refrigerant concentration is not available in relevant local standard,
use 0.3kg /m³as the maximum supported refrigerant con centration.
(4) If the maximum refrigerant concentration exceeds the allowed threshold, the refrigeration system
must be redesigned. In this case, separate the refrigeration system into multiple small-capacity
refrigeration systems, or contact local Gree sales company.
18
VIII. Unit Operating Temperature

Cooling -5°C~5 2°C
Heating -20°C~24°C
In the case of a full fresh air conditioning IDU, the unit operating temperature is as follows:
Cooling 16°C~45°C
Heating -7°C~16°C
IX. Configuration of Full Fresh Air

Conditioning IDU
Multi-connected fresh-air air-conditioning unit brings in air from outdoor and provides processed air
for indoor users. Based on the model of indoor unit, multi-connected fresh-air air-conditioning unit
supports two connection methods:
(1) The indoor units in the following table can be connected to one set of outdoor unit system
together with ordinary multi-connected air-conditioning indoor units.
Indoor unit model Outdoor unit model

Can be connected to GMV-***WM/B-X series modular outdoor
GMV-NX140P/A(X1.2)-K units.
Connection requirements：
1. The total capacity of all connected fresh-air indoor units and
GMV-NX224P/A(X2.0)-M ordinary indoor units must be 50% to 100% of the capacity of the
outdoor unit.Among which,the capacity of the outdoor unit.
2. The fresh-air indoor unit can be used independently.The
GMV-NX280P/A(X2.5)-M total capacity of connected fresh-air indoor units must be 50% to
100% of the capacity of the outdoor unit.
Note: When a multi-connected fresh-air indoor unit is connected with a common multi-connected
indoor unit, the capacity requirement must be strictly followed. The capacity of the fresh-air indoor unit
cannot exceed 30% of that of the outdoor unit. The sum of capacities of indoor units should be 50% to
100% of the capacity of the outdoor unit. Otherwise, the refrigeration performance will be affected and
the unit may be damaged.
Diagram of connecting a fresh-air indoor unit to a common multi-connected indoor unit

(2) The indoor units listed in the following table can be connected only in fixed mode.
19
Indoor unit model Outdoor unit model

GMV-NX280P/A(X3.0)-M GMV-280WM/B-X
GMV-NX450P/A(X4.0)-M GMV-450WM/B-X
Conenction diagram
20
Chapter 2 Installation
Part 1 Engineering Installation
Preparation
I. Installation Safety
Personnel and property safety are highly concerned during the entire installation process.
Installation implementation must abide by relevant national safety regulations to ensure personnel and
property safety.
All personnel involved in the installation must attend safety education courses and pass
corresponding safety examinations before installation. Only qualified personnel can attend the
installation. Relevant personnel must be held responsible for any violation of the regulation.
II. Importance of Installation Engineering

VRF air conditioning systems use refrigerant, instead of other agent, to directly evaporate to carry
out the system heat. High level of pipe cleanness and dryness is required in the system. Since various
pipes need to be prepared and laid out onsite, carelessness or maloperation during installation may
leave impurities, water, or dust inside refrigerant pipes. If the design fails to meet the requirement,
various problems may occur in the system or even lead to system breakdown.
Problems that usually occur during installation are as follows:
No. Installation Problem Possible Consequence
Pipes are more likely to be blocked; air conditioning performance is
reduced; compressor wear is increased
Dust or impurities enter into the or even hinder the normal operation of the system and burn the
1 refrigeration system. compressor.
Pipes are more likely to be blocked; air conditioning performance is
Nitrogen is not filled into the reduced; compressor wear is increased
refrigerant pipe or insufficient or even hinder the normal operation of the system and burn the
2 Nitrogen is filled before welding. compressor.
The refrigeration performance is reduced. The system fails to keep
normal operation due to frequent protection measures. When the
The vacuum degree in the refrigerant problem getting serious, compressor and other major components
3 pipe is insufficient. can be damaged.
Copper plating may appear on the compressor and reduce the
Water enters into the refrigeration compressor efficiency with abnormal noise generated; failures may
4 system. occur in the system due to ice plug.
Smaller configuration specifications can increase the system pipe
The refrigerant pipe specifications do resistance and affect the cooling performance; larger configuration
not meet the configuration specifications are waste of materials and can also reduce the cooling
5 requirements. performance.
The cooling performance is reduced; in certain cases,
it may cause long-term compressor operating under overheat
conditions; the lubricating effect can be affected and the
compressor may be burnt if impurities were mixed with the
6 Refrigerant pipe is blocked. lubricating oil.
The loss in pipe is considerable and the unit energy efficiency
7 Refrigerant pipe exceeds the limit. decreases, which are harmful for long-term running of the system.
21
The system cannot correctly control the flow allocation; the

Incorrect amount of refrigerant is compressor may be operating under over-heating environment or
8 filled. running when the refrigerant flows back to the compressor..
Insufficient refrigerant circulating in the system decreases the
cooling performance of the air conditioner. Long-term operation
under such circumstance may cause an overheating compressor or
9 The refrigerant pipe leaks. even damage the compressor.
Residual water in IDUs can affect the normal operation of the
Water drainage from the condensate system. The possible water leakage can damage the IDU's
10 water pipe is not smooth. decoration.
The ratio of slop for condensate
water pipe is insufficient or the
condensate water pipe is incorrectly Reverse slop or inconsistent connection of condensate water pipe
11 connected. can hinder the smooth drainage and cause leakage of the IDU.
The air channel will deform; vibration and noise occur during unit
12 The air channel is improperly fixed. operating.
The guide vane of air channel is not Uneven air quantity allocation reduces the overall performance of
13 reasonably manufactured. the air conditioner.
The refrigerant pipe or condensate Water can easily condensate and drip to damage the indoor
water pipe does not meet the decoration, or even trigger the protection mode of system due to
14 insulation requirement. overheating operation.
Since there is a lack of space for maintenance and checking,
The installation space for IDU is indoor decoration might need to be damaged during such
15 insufficient. operation.
The IDU or the location of the air
outlet or return air inlet is not The air outlet or return air inlet may be short-circuited, thus
16 designed reasonably. affecting the air conditioning performance.
The ODU is difficult to be maintained; unit exhaust is not smooth,
which reduces the heat exchanging performance or even prevent
the system from normal operation; in addition, the cold and hot air
for heat exchange and the noise may annoy people in surrounding
17 The ODU is improperly installed. areas.
Power cables are incorrectly Unit components may be damaged and potential safety hazard
18 provided. may occur.
Control communication cables are
incorrectly provided or improperly The normal communication in the system fails or the control over
19 connected. IDUs and ODUs turn in a mess.
Control communication cables are The communication cables are short-circuited or disconnected,
20 not properly protected. and the unit cannot be started up due to communication failure.
Understand the special requirement (if any) for unit installation before implementation to ensure
installation quality. Relevant installers must have corresponding engineering construction qualifications.
Special type operators involved in the engineering implementation, such as welders, electricians,
and refrigeration mechanics must have relevant operating licenses and are accredited with vocational
qualification certification.
22
III. Cooperation Between Different

Professions
A quality installation of air conditioning engineering depends on careful organization and close
cooperation between different professions such as architecture, structure, electric, water supply and
drainage, fire-fighting, and decoration. Pipes must be laid in places away from any automatic spray head
for fire-fighting, and must be reasonably arranged to ensure that the pipes fit the electric, luminaries, and
decoration.
1. Requirements for cooperation with civil engineering:
The riser should be installed in the air conditioning tube well, and the horizontal pipe should be
placed in the ceiling, if possible.
A place should be reserved for the ODU base to prevent the waterproof layer or insulating layer on
the roof from being damaged in later phase of installation.
At places on walls or floors where pipes need to go through, holes or casing should be preserved. If
the pipe needs to go through a bearing beam, a steel casing must be prepared.
2. Requirements for cooperation with decoration engineering:
The air conditioning installation should not damage the bearing structure or the decorative style. Air
conditioning pipes should be laid out along the bottom of the beam as possible. If pipes meet one
another at the same elevation, process based on the following principles:
Drain pipes enjoy the highest priority. Air ducts and pressure pipes should leave places for gravity
pipes.
Air ducts and small pipes should leave places for major pipes.
3. Requirements for cooperation with electric:
After the capacity of air conditioning unit is determined, check the following aspects with relevant
electric design personnel:
Whether the electrical load is designed based on the requirement of the air conditioning unit;
Whether the power cable and circuit breaker meet the unit requirement and abide by relevant
national safety regulations;
Whether the regional power supply quality (including voltage fluctuation and interference noise)
meet the international requirement.
Any nonconformity must be resolved through coordination.
23
24
IV. Onsite Review of Design Drawing

Installation personnel must carefully read and understand the design scheme and drawings
provided by engineering designers, and prepare detailed and feasible construction organization design
after reviewing the onsite status.
The following aspects of working drawing must be reviewed:
1. The loads of indoor and ODUs must match. The gross rated capacity of the IDU should be set to
a value that is 50% to 135% of the rated capacity of the ODU. In actual conditions, if the capacity of
concurrently operating IDUs exceeds 100% of the rated capacity of the ODU, the air conditioning system
fails to meet the requirement. Note: Configuration in excess of the capacity of the IDUs can affect the
comfort for users. The more the excess is, the lower the adjustment capacity of an air conditioning unit
will be. When the capacity exceeds 135% of the configured value, the system reliability can be affected.
Therefore, relevant regulations on capacity limit must be strictly followed.
2. The difference of level between an ODU and an IDU, and that between IDUs must be set within
the designed range.
3. Pipe bend for trapped oil is required for air pipe riser in the unit to ensure normal circulation in the
unit lubricating system.
4. The pipe diameter and manifold type in the cooling system must meet relevant technical
specifications.
5. The drainage method of unit condensate water must be reasonable; the pipeline slope must
follow the design requirement of unit.
6. The air duct direction and air flow are reasonably organized.
7. The configuration specifications, type, and control method of power cables should meet the
design requirement of unit.
8. The arrangement, total length, and control method of control line should meet the design
requirement of unit.
Note: Engineering construction personnel must strictly abide by the design drawings. If any design
cannot be implemented during construction and needs to be modified, contact the designer first for
approval and prepare a written document, that is, the design modification record.
25
V. Construction Organization Process
26
Part 2 Material Selection

I. Requirement for Selecting Construction
Materials
The materials, equipment and instruments used during air conditioning engineering construction
must have certifications and test reports.
Products with fireproof requirements must be provided with fireproof inspection certificates and must
meet national and relevant compulsory standards.
If environmentally-friendly materials are to be used as required by customers, all such materials
must meet national environmental protection requirement and be provided with relevant certificates.
II. Requirement for Selecting Major Materials

1. Copper pipe
a. Material requirement: Dephosphorization drawing copper pipe for air conditioners
b. Appearance requirement: The inner and outer surface of pipe should be smooth without pinhole,
crack, peeling, blister, inclusion, copper powder, carbon deposition, rust, dirt or severe oxide film, and
without obvious scratch, pit, spot and other defects.
c. Test report: Certifications and quality test reports must be provided.
d. The tensile strength must be at least 240 kgf/mm².
e. Specifications requirement
R410A Refrigerant System
OD (mm/inch) Wall Thickness (mm) Model
Φ6.35(1/4) ≥0.8 0
Φ9.52(3/8) ≥0.8 0
Φ12.70(1/2) ≥0.8 0
Φ15.9(5/8) ≥1.0 0
Φ19.05(3/4) ≥1.0 0
Φ22.2(7/8) ≥1.2 1/2H
Φ25.40(1/1) ≥1.2 1/2H
Φ28.60(9/8) ≥1.2 1/2H
Φ31.80(5/4) ≥1.3 1/2H
Φ34.90(11/8) ≥1.3 1/2H
Φ38.10(12/8) ≥1.5 1/2H
Φ41.30(13/8) ≥1.5 1/2H
Φ44.5(7/4) ≥1.5 1/2H
Φ51.4(7/4) ≥1.5 1/2H
Φ54.1(17/8) ≥1.5 1/2H
f. After the inner part of the copper pipe is cleaned and dried, the inlet and outlet must be sealed
tightly by using pipe caps, plugs or adhesive tapes.
2. Condensate water pipe
a. Pipes that can be used for air conditioner drainage include: water supplying UPVC pipe, PP-R
27
pipe, PP-C pipe, and HDG steel pipe.

b. All relevant certificates and quality test reports are provided.
c. Requirements for specifications and wall thickness
Water supplying UPVC pipe: Φ32mm×2mm, Φ40mm×2mm, Φ50mm×2.5mm;
HDG steel pipe: Φ25mm×3.25mm, Φ32mm×3.25mm, Φ40mm×3.5mm, Φ50mm×3.5mm.
3. Insulation material
a. Rubber foam insulation material;
b. Flame retardancy level: B1 or higher;
c. Refractoriness: at least 120℃;
d. The insulation thickness of condensate water pipe: at least 10 mm;
e. When the diameter of copper pipe is equal to or greater than Φ15.9 mm, the thickness of
insulation material should be at least 20 mm; when the diameter of copper pipe is less than 15.9 mm, the
thickness of insulation material should be at least 15 mm.
4. Communication cable and control cable
Note: For air conditioning units installed in places with strong electromagnetic interference, shielded
wire must be used as the communication cables of the IDU and wired controller, and shielded twisted
pairs must be used as the communication cables between IDUs and between the IDU and ODU.
Communication cable selection for outdoor and IDUs
Total Length of
Number of Wire
Communication Cables
Wire Type Pieces x Wire Wire Standard Remark
Between IDU and Indoor
Diameter (mm2)
(Outdoor) Unit L(m)
Common sheath If the wire diameter is

IEC 60227- enlarged to 2×1mm 2, the
twisted pair copper
L≤1000 ≥2×0.75 5:2007
core (60227 IEC 52 overall communication
/60227 IEC 53) length can reach 1500 m.
Communication cable selection for IDU and wired controller

Total Length of
Number of Wire
Communication Cables of
Wire Type Pieces x Wire Wire Standard Remark
the IDU and Wired
Diameter (mm2)
Controller L(m)
Common sheath twisted
pair copper core (
60227 IEC 52 IEC 60227- The overall communication
/60227 IEC 53) L≤250 ≥2×0.75 5:2007 length cannot exceed 250
m.
)
5. Power cable
Only copper conductors can be used as power cables. The copper conductors must meet relevant
national standard and satisfy the carrying capacity of unit.
28
Part 3 Installation Space Requirement

I. Place Selection for Installing ODU
The widely-used VRF units are applicable for various scenarios. In residential areas, especially in
rooms where elderly and infants live, a higher refrigerating performance and noise control is required.
Therefore, the ODU with excellent capacity and low noise is preferred; in addition, ODU should be
installed in outdoor spaces instead of in bedrooms, studies or meeting rooms. In commercial areas, ODU
should be installed far away from offices.
II. ODU Dimensions and Installation Hole Size

Outline and Physical Dimention of GMV-224WM/B-X and GMV-280WM/B-X unit.
29
Outline and Physical Dimention of GMV-335WM/B-X、GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X unit.
30
Outline and Physical Dimention of GMV-504WM/B-X、GMV-560WM/B-X and GMV-615WM/B-X unit.
31
III. Installation Space Requirement for ODU

1. If all sides of the ODU (including the top) are surrounded by walls, process according to the following
requirements for installation space:
Installation space requirement for single-module unit
Electric box
pipes go out of the
electric box from this side
Figure 3
Installation space requirement for dual-module unit
Electric box
pipes go out of the
electric bos from this side
Figure 4
32
Installation space requirements for triple-module unit
Electric box
pipes go out of the
Figure 5
Installation space requirement for quad-module unit
33
Electric box
pipes go out of the
Figure 6
2. In principle, if a crown wall (obstacles for keeping out the wind) exists over the machine, a
distance of at least 3000 mm should be left between the top of the machine and the crown wall. If the
front, rear, left and right sides of the machine are open spaces, the distance between the top of the
machine and the crown wall should be at least 1500 mm, as shown in Figure 7. If the requirement for the
minimum 1500 mm cannot be met, or the spaces around the machine are not open, an air return pipe
needs to be connected to maintain smooth ventilation, as shown in Figure 8.
Crown wall
An exhaust duct needs to be connected

when the distance is
Figure 7 Figure 8
Installation space requirement for multiple ODUs

To ensure smooth ventilation, the top of the unit must be open spaces without obstacles.
If the front and left (or right) sides of the ODU are open spaces, the units should be installed along
the same or reverse direction.
34
35
3. Monsoons must be considered during ODU installation.

Correct Incorrect
Monsoon direction Monsoon direction
Protective cover One side (rear side) of

Fresh-air suction inlet
Return air(rear side)

The defrosting time is prolonged in this case
4. Snow must be considered during ODU installation.
Correct
Incorrect
Protective shield of air supply
inlet (provided on site)
Monsoon
Monsoon
Protective shield of air

supply inlet (provided on site)
The possible height of snow must be

considered when determining the height of base
36
5. During the installation of the ODU, induced and exhaust pipes must be connected. In addition, the
aperture opening rate of shutters must be at least 80%, and the angle between the shutters and the
horizontal plane should be less than 20°. Requirements for installing exhaust air duct are as follows:
i. Basic requirement for connecting an ODU to static pressure ventilating duct
When an ODU needs to be connected to the static pressure ventilating duct, the ventilating duct must be
reasonably designed. The pressure loss caused by the ventilating duct must be calculated. In addition, a
proper type of ventilating duct is necessary. To connect he static pressure ventilating duct to the ODU,
three basic parts are required: (1) ODU; (2) canvas; and (3) steel-plate ventilating duct. The ODU must
be interconnected with the ventilating duct through canvas to prevent abnormal vibration and noise
generated by the steel-plate ventilating duct. The joint part must be tightly sealed with tin foil to avoid air
leakage.
ii. Preparations for connecting an ODU to static pressure ventilating duct
(1) The ODU is installed properly based on the unit installation requirement.
(2) The steel-plate ventilating duct is designed based on the unit and engineering requirement, and is
installed properly according to the engineering standards.
(3) Based on the unit dimensions and the size of steel-plate ventilating duct, prepare materials such as
canvas casing, tin foil, steel bar and tapping screw, as well as tools such as hand-operated electric drill,
air screw driver and screwdriver.
iii. Basic operation of connecting an ODU to static pressure ventilating duct
Two methods are available to connect an ODU to static pressure ventilating duct.
Method 1: Reserve the unit top case. Detailed operations are as follows:
a) Install the ODU (2) and steel-plate ventilating duct (1). Use an air screw driver or screwdriver to
unfasten the tapping screws that fixing the top case component (3), and then remove the top case
component. Take out the grille from the top of the top case component and leave the top case.
b) Put the canvas casing inside out (4). Cover one end of the canvas casing over the unit
downward until the canvas end face is aligned with the unit or a bit higher than the top of the unit. Then,
put the top case back (3) and tightly press the canvas casing (4). Use tapping screws to fix the top case
onto the unit (3).
c) Pull up the canvas casing reversely (4) and use the steel bar (5) to press the canvas casing
tightly onto the counter flange of the steel-plate ventilating duct (1). Use a hand-operated electric drill to
drill holes and fasten the parts by using tapping screws.
d) Use the tin foil to seal the joints and check the joints' reliability.
37
Step 1 Step 2
Step 3 Step 4
Step 5 Step 6
Method 2: Remove the unit top case. Detailed operations are as follows:
(1) Install the ODU (2) and steel-plate ventilating duct (1). Take out the grille from the top of the top
case component. Use the prepared canvas casing inside out (4) to cover the surroundings over
the top of the unit. Keep the top of canvas casing (4) 30 to 50 mm higher over the top of the
38
unit.
(2) Use a steel bar to press tightly the canvas casing (4) around the top case of the unit. Use a
hand-operated electric drill to drill holes and fasten the canvas casing onto the unit through
steel bar by using tapping screws.
(3) Pull up the canvas casing reversely and use the steel bar to press the canvas casing tightly
onto the counter flange of the steel-plate ventilating duct. Use a hand-operated electric drill to
drill holes and fasten the parts by using tapping screws.
(4) Use the tin foil to seal the joints and check the joints' reliability.
Note: Remove the grille on the top case when connecting an ODU to static pressure ventilating duct;
otherwise, the air volume, especially the unit operating performance will be affected. For method 2,
since drills are required on the top case, the powder coated protective layer on the top case will be
damaged. As a result, the anti-corrosion performance of the unit top case will be reduced.
Step 1Step 2
Step 3 Step 4
6. When the effective area of air intake is less than 70% of the total air intake area of all ODUs, an
induced draft fan is also required. The total air input of induced draft fan should be no less than 80% of
the total supply air rate.
39
Part 4 Requirements on Foundation

Installation
I. ODU Foundation
The concrete foundation of the ODU must be strong enough. Ensure that the drainage is smooth
and that the ground drainage or floor drainage is not affected.
Requirements on the concrete foundation are as follows:
A. The concrete foundation must be flat and have enough rigidity and strength to undertake the unit‘s
weight during running. The height of the foundation is 200 mm to 300 mm, which is determined
based on the size of the unit.
B. The proportion of the cement, sand, and stone for the concrete is 1:2:4. Place 10 reinforced steel
bars (φ10 mm) with a space between of 30 mm.
C. Use the mortar to flatten the surface of the foundation. Sharp edges must be chamfered.
D. When the foundation is built on a concrete floor, crushed stones are not required. But the foundation
surface must be roughened.
E. Clear the oil stains, crushed stones, dirt, and water in the reserved bolt hole of the foundation and
install a temporary cover before installing bolts.
F. Build a drainage ditch around the foundation to discharge the condensate water.
G. If the air conditioner is installed on the roof, check the intensity of the building and take waterproof
measures.
H. If a u-steel foundation is adopted, the structure must be designed with sufficient rigidity and strength.
Anchor bolt with a nominal
diameter of 12 mm
Minimum width: 100 mm Proportion of the cement, sand, and

stone for the concrete is 1:2:4. Drain tank: 100 mm×20 mm
30 mm
200 mm~300 mm
This distance is determined based on the actual size of the unit.
Cement foundation diagram
40
II. ODU Fixing

Fix the ODU to the foundation with four M12 bolts securely to reduce vibration and noise.
III. Vibration Reduction for ODU

The ODU must be fixed securely. Apply a thick rubber sheet or corrugated damping rubber pad with
thickness of 200 mm or more and width of 100 mm or more between the ODU and the foundation, as
shown in the following figures.
41
Part 5 Piping Connection

Ⅰ. Schematic Diagram of Piping Connection
42
Ⅱ. Schematic Diagram of Piping Sequence

GMV-224WM/B-X and GMV-280WM/B-X
GMV-335WM/B-X , GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X
43
GMV-504WM/B-X , GMV-560WM/B-X and GMV-615WM/B-X
44
Ⅲ. Allowable pipe length and drop height

among indoor and outdoor units
Y type branch joint is adopted to connected indoor and outdoor units. Connecting method is shown
in the figure below
Remark Equivalent length of one Y-type manifold is about 0.5m.
L10: Length from the first branch to the farthest IDU;

L11: Length from the first branch to the nearest IDU;
Equivalent length of branch of IDU is 0.5m.
Allowable
R410A Refrigerant System Fitting Pipe
Value
Total length (actual length) of fitting pipe ≤1000 L1+L2+L3+L4+…+L9+a+b+…+i+j
Actual length ≤165 L1+L6+L7+L8+L9+j

Length of farthest
fitting pipe(m)
Equivalent length ≤190
Difference between the pipe length from the first branch of IDU
to the farthest IDU and the pipe length from the first branch of ≤40 L10-L11
IDU to the nearest IDU
45
Equivalent length from the first branch to the furthest piping (1) ≤40 L6+L7+L8+L9+j
Height difference Outdoor unit at upper(4) ≤90 ——

between outdoor
unit and indoor unit Outdoor unit at lower(4) ≤90 ——
Height difference between indoor units (m) ≤30 ——
Maximum length of Main pipe(2) ≤90 L1
From IDU to its nearest branch (3) ≤10 a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j
Notices:
（1）. Normally, the pipe length from the first branch of IDU to the farthest IDU is 40m. When those
three conditions as below are satisfied, the length can reached 90m.
① Actual length of pipe in total: L1+L2x2+L3x2+L4x2+…+L9x2+a+b+…+i+j≤1000m;
②Length between each IDU and its nearest branch a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j≤40m;
③ Difference between the pipe length from the first branch of IDU to the farthest IDU and the
pipe length from the first branch of IDU to the nearest IDU: L10-L11≤40m.
（2）. When the maximum length of the main pipe from ODU to the first branch of IDU is≥90m, then
adjust the pipe size of the gas pipe and liquid pipe of main pipe according to the following table.
Outdoor Model Gas pipe size(mm) Liquid pipe size(mm)
GMV-224WM/B-X No need to enlarge pipe size No need to enlarge pipe size
GMV-280WM/B-X No need to enlarge pipe size Φ12.7
GMV-335WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-400WM/B-X Φ31.8 Φ15.9
GMV-450WM/B-X Φ31.8 Φ15.9
GMV-504WM/B-X Φ34.9 Φ19.05
GMV-560WM/B-X Φ34.9 Φ19.05
GMV-615WM/B-X Φ34.9 Φ19.05
GMV-680WM/B-X No need to enlarge pipe size Φ19.05
GMV-730WM/B-X Φ38.1 Φ22.2
GMV-785WM/B-X Φ38.1 Φ22.2
GMV-850WM/B-X Φ38.1 Φ22.2
GMV-900WM/B-X Φ38.1 Φ22.2
GMV-960WM/B-X Φ41.3 Φ22.2
GMV-1010WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
GMV-1065WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
GMV-1130WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
GMV-1180WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
GMV-1235WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
GMV-1300WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
GMV-1350WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
GMV-1410WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
46
GMV-1460WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1515WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1580WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1630WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1685WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1750WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1800WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1845WM/B-X Φ44.5 Φ25.4
GMV-1908WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-1962WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2016WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2072WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2128WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2184WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2240WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2295WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2350WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2405WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4
GMV-2460WM/B-X Φ51.4 Φ25.4

（3）.If the length between an IDU and its nearest branch is above 10m, then increase the size of the
liquid pipe of IDU (only for the pipe size that is≤6.35mm).
(4). If the height difference between indoor and outdoor units exceeds 90m, please consult the
manufacturer for specific technical requirements.
Ⅳ. Connection Pipe among Outdoor Modules
47
Notes: When the distance between outdoor units exceeds 2m, U-type oil trap should be added
at low-pressure gas pipe. A+B≤10m.
Pipe connection among ODUs must meet the following requirements:
Module pipe
interface
Inter-module pipeline 0~25°

Piping between modules is at the same level Piping between modules is under the module pipe
with the module pipe connector. connector and increases upwards with an angle
of 0℃ to 25℃.
Piping between modules is under the module pipe connector

and does not incline.
Pipeing between modules is above the module pipe connector
Pipeing between modules is above the module pipe connector
48
Ⅴ. Fitting pipe between Outdoor Unit and the

First Manifold
(1). For single module system, pipe size (between outdoor unit and the first manifold)is
determined by that of outdoor unit.
Pipe size of basic outdoor module is shown as follows:

Pipe between ODU and the first branch of IDU
Basic Module
Gas Pipe(mm) Liquid Pipe(mm)
GMV-224WM/B-X Φ19.05 Φ9.52
GMV-280WM/B-X Φ22.2 Φ9.52
GMV-335WM/B-X Φ25.4 Φ12.7
GMV-400WM/B-X Φ25.4 Φ12.7
GMV-450WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ12.7
GMV-504WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-560WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-615WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9

（2）. For multi-module unit, select appropriate manifold connected to outdoor module as
per the pipe size of basic module. Pipe size of basic outdoor module is shown as follows:
49
Pipe between module and branch of ODU

Basic Module
GMV-224WM/B-X Φ19.05 Φ9.52
GMV-280WM/B-X Φ22.2 Φ9.52
GMV-335WM/B-X Φ25.4 Φ12.7
GMV-400WM/B-X Φ25.4 Φ12.7
GMV-450WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ12.7
GMV-504WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-560WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-615WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
Select the branch of outdoor module

Module‘s capacity (C) Model
Select the branch of outdoor module 504≤C ML01/A
（3）. Fitting pipe between two manifolds from basic modules

Pipe size (between two manifolds from basic modules) is based on the total capacity of upstream
modules.
Pipe size between manifolds

Total capacity of upstream modules Q(kW)
22.4≥Q Φ19.05 Φ9.52
28.0≥Q＞22.4 Φ22.2 Φ9.52
40.0≥Q＞28.0 Φ25.4 Φ12.7
45.0≥Q ＞40.0 Φ28.6 Φ12.7
68.0≥Q＞45.0 Φ28.6 Φ15.9
96.0≥Q＞68.0 Φ31.8 Φ19.05
135.0≥Q＞96.0 Φ38.1 Φ19.05
Q＞135.0 Φ44.5 Φ22.2
(4). Fitting pipe between the first manifold from indoor unit and the end manifold from outdoor unit
Single module unit
50
Pipe between ODU and the first branch of IDU

Basic Module(single module)
GMV-224WM/B-X Φ19.05 Φ9.52
GMV-280WM/B-X Φ22.2 Φ9.52
GMV-335WM/B-X Φ25.4 Φ12.7
GMV-400WM/B-X Φ25.4 Φ12.7
GMV-450WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ12.7
GMV-504WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-560WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-615WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
For multiple modules, the piping from ODU to the first branch of IDU is based on the total rated
capacity of outdoor modules.
Total rated capacity of outdoor modules Pipe between ODU and the first branch of IDU
(multi-modular system) Gas Pipe(mm) Liquid Pipe(mm)
GMV-504WM/B-X Φ28.6 Φ15.9
GMV-560WM/B-X Ф28.6 Ф15.9
GMV-615WM/B-X Ф28.6 Ф15.9
GMV-680WM/B-X Ф28.6 Ф15.9
GMV-730WM/B-X Ф31.8 Ф19.05
GMV-785WM/B-X Ф31.8 Ф19.05
51
GMV-850WM/B-X Ф31.8 Ф19.05
GMV-900WM/B-X Ф31.8 Ф19.05
GMV-960WM/B-X Ф31.8 Ф19.05
GMV-1010WM/B-X Ф38.1 Ф19.05
GMV-1065WM/B-X Ф38.1 Ф19.05
GMV-1130WM/B-X Ф38.1 Ф19.05
GMV-1180WM/B-X Ф38.1 Ф19.05
GMV-1235WM/B-X Ф38.1 Ф19.05
GMV-1300WM/B-X Ф38.1 Ф19.05
GMV-1350WM/B-X Ф38.1 Ф19.05
GMV-1410WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1460WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1515WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1580WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1630WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1685WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1750WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1800WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1845WM/B-X Ф41.3 Ф19.05
GMV-1908WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-1962WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2016WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2072WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2128WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2184WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2240WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2295WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2350WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2405WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
GMV-2460WM/B-X Ф44.5 Ф22.2
(5). Manifold at indoor unit side

Manifold at indoor unit side can be selected as per total capacity of downstream indoor unit(s).
Refer to the following table.
52
Total capacity of downstream indoor unit(s) C

R410A Refrigerant System Model
(kW)
C≤20.0 FQ01A/A
20.0 ＜C≤30.0 FQ01B/A
Y-type Manifold 30.0＜C≤70.0 FQ02/A
70.0＜C≤135.0 FQ03/A
135.0＜C FQ04/A
(6). Fitting pipe between manifolds
Pipe size (between two manifolds at indoor unit side) is based on the total capacity of upstream
indoor unit(s).
Total Rated Capacity X(kW) of Fitting Pipe Size between Indoor Manifolds
Downstream Indoor Units Gas Pipe (mm) Liquid Pipe (mm)
X≤5.6 Φ12.7 Φ6.35
5.6<X≤14.2 Φ15.9 Φ9.52
14.2<X≤22.4 Φ19.05 Φ9.52
22.4<X≤28.0 Φ22.2 Φ9.52
28.0<X≤40.0 Φ25.4 Φ12.7
40.0<X≤45.0 Φ28.6 Φ12.7
45.0<X≤68.0 Φ28.6 Φ15.9
68.0<X≤96.0 Φ31.8 Φ19.05
96.0<X≤135.0 Φ38.1 Φ19.05
135.0<X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
(7). Fitting pipe between indoor unit and manifold

Manifold should be matched with fitting pipe of indoor unit.
53
Pipe between indoor branch and IDU

Rated capacity of indoor unit C(kW)
C≤2.8 Φ9.52 Φ6.35
2.8＜C≤5.0 Φ12.7 Φ6.35
5.0＜C≤14.0 Φ15.9 Φ9.52
14.0＜C≤16.0 Φ19.05 Φ9.52
16.0＜C≤28.0 Φ22.2 Φ9.52
54
Part 6 Pipe Installation and Insulation

I. Pipe Installation for the Cooling System
1. Precautions on Pipe Direction Design
Refrigerant pipe layout must be designed in accordance with the following principles:
1) The air conditioning installation should not damage the bearing structure or the decorative style.
Air conditioning pipes should be laid out along the bottom of beam as possible. If pipes meet one
another at the same elevation, process based on the following principles:
Drain pipes enjoy the highest priority. Air ducts and pressure pipes should leave places for gravity
pipes.
Air ducts and small pipes should leave places for major pipes.
2) The refrigerant pipe layout must be optimal in actual engineering with minimum pipe length and
bends. In this way, the performance of the unit can be maximized.
3) The refrigerant pipe cannot affect air discharge and return of internal units. The minimum
distance between the refrigerant pipe with an insulation layer and the air return box is 300 mm. If the air
return or manhole is at the right lower part of the unit, the minimum distance is 150 mm. When the
refrigerant pipe needs to be laid at the air outlet side, avoid laying the pipe at the front of the air outlet.
The refrigerant pipe cannot connect to any part of the unit except the joint points. If the preceding
principles are not followed, performance of the unit will be affected and running noises will be increased.
The distance cannot
be less than 300 mm.
Return air inlet

Refrigerant pipe or other pipes
Air outlet
Indoor unit
4) The refrigerant pipe must be laid away from the manhole of the unit so that sufficient space can
be reserved for maintenance.
5) The riser should be installed in the air conditioning tube well, and the horizontal pipe should be
placed in the ceiling, if possible.
2. Processing to Refrigerant Pipes
2.1 Cut-off and Burring
Use a special-purpose pipe cutter to cut copper pipes instead of using a hacksaw.
Cut the pipes gently to ensure that the copper pipe does not deform.
55
After cutting the pipes, use a slicker to grater bur the pipes with the pipe opening inclining downward
so that the copper scales do not fall into the pipe.
Allowable deviation: Skewness of the cross section cannot exceed 1% of the copper pipe caliber.
If the copper pipe is not used immediately after cut-off, cover it with a sealing cap or adhesive tape.
2.2 Pipe Cleaning
Cleaning with a piece of silk cloth: Wrap a thin steel wire with a piece of clean silk cloth. Crumple the
cloth into a lump with diameter larger than the pipe calibre. Apply several drops of chlorylene to the cloth.
Push the cloth in from one end of the pipe and pull out from the other end. Every time the cloth is pulled
out, remove the dust and sundries with chlorylene. Wash repeatedly until the pipe is clean. This method
applies to straight pipes.
Cleaning with nitrogen: Blow off all dust and sundries in the pipe with nitrogen. This method applies
to coils.
After cleaning, cover the both ends of the pipe with a sealing cap or adhesive tape.
2.3 Pipe Bending
Processing methods:
Manual bending: applies to thin copper pipes (Φ6.35 mm to Φ12.7 mm)
Mechanical bending: applicable range (Φ6.35mm to Φ54.1mm)
Requirements:
The radius of the bending pipe must exceed 3.5D. The ratio of the short diameter after bending to
the original diameter must exceed 2/3.
Precautions:
During bending, there must be no corrugation or deformation inside the pipe.
The welding point of the pipe should not be at the bending part. The distance between the nozzle
welding joint and the bending part should be less than 100 mm.
2.4 Pipe Expanding
Pipe expanding is used to provide a welding point for pipe connection. Requirements on pipe
expanding are as follows:
2.4.1 All burrs and sundries inside the pipe must be cleared after cut-off.
2.4.2 Before pipe expanding, apply appropriate amount of lubricant on the surface of the pipe. (The
lubricant must meet the refrigerant system‘s requirements.)
2.4.3 Pipe expanding length must be in accordance with the insertion depth of the caliber.
2.4.4 To avoid leakage due to straight lines at the expanding point, turn round the copper pipe and
then make corrections.
2.4.5 Apply appropriate force during pipe expanding to avoid crack.
2.5 Flaring
Another mode of pipe connection is flare opening connection, which requires pipe flaring before
connection. Before pipe flaring, apply appropriate amount of lubricant on the surface of the opening to
ensure smooth pass of flaring nuts and avoid pipe distortion. (The lubricant must meet the refrigerant
system‘s requirements.) The concentricity must be ensured after pipe flaring. The sealing face must be
intact without any burr, crack, or wrinkle.
Requirements on pipe flaring are as follows:
a) End faces of the copper pipe are smooth.
b) Burrs and turnups inside the pipe opening must be cleared.
c) Install flaring nuts in the pipe before pipe flaring.
56
d) The flared opening must be concentric with the main pipe. No eccentricity is allowed.
e) Put the pipe into the root of the pipe expander.
f) Longitudinal cracks cannot be generated.
3. Installation of Refrigerant Pipes
3.1 Operation Sequence
The sequence for installing the refrigerant pipe is as follows:
Preparing and installing the support, hanger, and bracket – Piping according to the drawing –
Cleaning the pipe – Processing the pipe – Adding an insulation sleeve – Connecting the pipe – Fixing the
pipe – Blowing contaminants in the pipe system – Performing a air-tightness test – Performing insulation
3.2 Construction of Built-in Metal Fittings
3.2.1 Construction of supports, hangers, and brackets for pipes: These parts must be fixed securely
in reasonable type and style without any tilt. The surface is clean without any dirt. The parts embedded
into the wall or floor cannot be painted or coated and must be free from grease stains.
3.2.2 Construction of fixing bolts for devices: Ensure sufficient rigidity for the devices. Take
anticorrosive measures for exposed part of built-in fittings. If the foundation must be waterproof, takes
waterproof measures.
3.2.3 Construction of steel casings: Equip a steel casing for all pipes which are led through the wall
or floor. Pipe welding joints cannot be placed inside the sleeve. The steel casing must be parallel with the
bottom of the wall or floor but be 20 mm or more above the bottom. The diameter of the steel casing
must be determined based on the thickness of the insulation layer and the inclination degree of the
condensate water pipe. Fill the gap between the pipe and the sleeve with flexible and non-flammable
materials. The sleeve cannot be used as a support point of the pipe.
3.2.4 Operation Sequence
Drawing of built- Making Installing built-in
in metal fittings ink lines metal fittings
If possible, make ink lines on the ground and project them to the top of the building.
3.2.5 Installing Built-in Metal Fittings
Select built-in metal fittings in accordance with local regulations.
3.2.6 Installing Expansion Bolts
Use expansion bolts when built-in metal fittings are unavailable due to design change.
3.2.7 Installing Expansion Bolts
If the foot pedal is 2 m or more from the ground, there must be three points of support.
The foot pedal must be tightened securely with the ladder.
Do not perform operations on the top of the ladder.
3.3 Shaping and Fixing of Pipes
When installing refrigerant pipes, ensure that the directions and branches are correct with minimum
length. Use minimum number of braze welding junctions and elbows. Alignment and insulation after
installation cannot affect the pipe location and elevation. There shall not be flat bending or corrugation on
the pipe after piping.
Use angle steel support, bracket, round steel hanger, U-type pipe clip, or flat steel to fix pipes
outside the insulation layer. It is better that the insulation materials be not compressed to ensure good
insulation.
The style and workmanship of supports, hangers, and brackets must follow the standard T616
HVAC Systems Design Handbook.
57
The minimum distance between supports, hangers, and brackets is listed in the table below:
External Diameter of the
Pipe (mm) ф≤16 40>ф≥19.05 ф≥40
Distance between
Horizontal Pipes (mm) 1000 1500 2000
Distance between Vertical
Pipes (mm) 1500 2000 2500
The pipe led through a wall or beam must be fixed by a support, hanger, or bracket on both ends at
the position 300 mm away from the hole.
3.4 Pipe Connection
3.4.1 Flaring Connection
The refrigerant pipes and IDUs are connected by using the flare opening. Therefore, the quality of
flaring connection must be ensured. The flaring depth of the bell mouth cannot be smaller than the
caliber. The flaring direction must face towards the direction of medium flow. Use two torque wrenches to
fasten the connection.
3.4.2 Socket Welding
The gap between socket components should be proper to ensure that the connection will not loose
from the friction surface. The flaring direction of the socket component must face towards the direction of
medium flow .During pipe connect, protect the braze welding part according the length specified below:
A: External Diameter of B: Minimum Insertion D-A: Gap between Pipes

the Pipe (mm) Depth (mm) (mm)
ф6.35 6
ф9.52 0.05-0.21
ф12.7 7
ф15.8 8
ф19.05 0.05-0.27
ф22.2
ф25.4 10
ф28.6,
0.05-0.30
ф31.8 12
ф38.1
0.15-0.35
ф44.5 19
ф54.1 24 0.15-0.35
3.4.2 Bell Socket Welding
The bell socket welding is another form of socket welding. It uses the sleeve or pipe in a larger size
for welding. The insertion depth cannot be smaller than that required by socket welding.
3.4.5 Flange Connection
The pipes with large caliber and the devices are always connected by using a flange, which must be
clean and intact. Before installation, apply lubricant on the surface of the flange. Two flanges must be
symmetrical. Fasten with screws at the diagonal direction to avoid inclination.
3.5 Welding Protection
Aerate with nitrogen before and during welding and keep aerating for 30 s after the welding is
finished.
58
Equip a pressure regulator valve to the nitrogen cylinder.

The nitrogen flow is above 4-6 L/min (pressure of 0.02 to 0.05 MPa) and must be regulated based
on the pipe caliber.
3.6 Requirements on Manifold Installation
Manifolds are used to divert refrigerant. Requirements on manifold installation are as follows:
A. Ensure that the manifold is close to the IDU to reduce impact on refrigerant assignment by IDU
branches.
B. The manifold must be that specified by the manufacture and match with the devices.
C. Ensure that the manifold model is correct.
D. Manifolds can be laid in the following ways:
D1. Horizontal installation: The three ports must be on the same level. The shaping size and
assembly angle cannot be changed.
D2. Vertical installation: The direction can be upwards or downwards. Three ports must be on the
same elevation without inclination.
B
A
Within ±15°
Within ±15°
Diagram for direction A Diagram for direction B
D3. The length of a straight pipe between two manifolds cannot be less than 500 mm.
D4. The length of a straight pipe before the main pipe port of the manifold cannot be less than 500
mm.
D5. The length of a straight pipe between the branch of the manifold and the IDU cannot be less
than 500 mm.
E. Fixing of manifolds.
There must be three fixing point for both horizontal and vertical installation of the Y-type manifold.
Fixing point 1: 100 mm on the main inlet manifold from the welding point
Fixing point 2: 200 mm on the main branched pipe from the welding point
Fixing point 3: 250 mm on the branched pipe from the welding point
59
Fixing point 3
hanger rod
Fixing point 2 Fixing point 1

hanger rod hanger rod
Welding point 3
Welding
point 2
Welding
point 1
Branches of a manifold must be laid parallel and cannot be wrapped in superimposed mode.
F. The liquid pipe and gas pipe must have the same length and be laid in the same route.
G. The Y-type manifold has an attached pipe used to adjust the diameter of different pipes. If the
pipe size on site does not match the size of the manifold junction, use the pipe cutter to cut at the middle
of the pipe and remove burrs. Then insert the copper pipe to proper depth. A concave bag for positioning
is available to the manifold purchased from Gree.
H. Because the manifold structure is complex, perform with care to ensure tight insulation.
3.7 Pipe Cleaning by Nitrogen
Before connecting the flare opening of the pipe to the IDU, connect the pressure regulator valve on
the nitrogen cylinder to the liquid pipe in the outdoor pipe system. Regulate the nitrogen pressure to
about 5 kgf/cm²and blow nitrogen into the pipe for 1 minute . Repeat this operation for three times till the
dirt and water are discharged. After cleaning the liquid pipe, perform the same operation to clean the gas
pipe.
Leave the pipe disconnected
from the indoor unit temporarily.
Leave the pipe disconnected
from the indoor unit temporarily.
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Gas pipe Nitrogen
Liquid pipe
Perform an air-tightness test and a vacuum test to the entire refrigerant pipe system after the
construction is finished.
60
There must be a secure distance between pipes. Pipes in different types must be fixed separately.
3.8 During refrigerant pipe installation, ensure a distance above 500 mm between the pipe and the
electric box of the unit for maintenance. In a case when the space is not enough, the final piping way
must be determined by the technical personnel.
The distance cannot
Ceiling
be less than 500 mm.
Manhole Air pipe indoor unit
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
3.9 Filter and Drier Installation for the ODU

As the piping for the VRF system is complex, it is recommended that a filter is installed for the gas
pipe and a drier is installed for the liquid pipe during construction. This ensures aridity and cleanness of
the piping system and further improves the operation stability of the system.
The procedure is as follows:
First, weld a stop valve with the corresponding caliber to the gas pipe and liquid pipe at the position
relatively close to the ODU and easy for operation.
Second, install a filter (100 mesh/ft2) between the added stop valve outside the gas pipe and the
stop valve of the ODU. Then install a drier filter between the added stop valve outside the liquid pipe and
the stop valve of the ODU.
Lastly, after the test run is complete,
To remove the filter from the gas pipe after starting all IDUs and keeping them running cooling mode
for 24 hours: (1) Power off all units. (2) Turn off the two stop valves of the gas pipe. (3) Remove the filter.
(4) Short connect with a copper pipe with the same caliber and vacuumize the pipe. (5) Open the two
stop valves and keep normal running.
To remove the drier filter from the liquid pipe after starting all IDUs and keeping them running in
heating mode for 24 hours: (1) Power off all units. (2) Turn off the two stop valves of the liquid pipe. (3)
Remove the drier filter. (4) Short connect with a copper pipe with the same caliber and vacuumize the
pipe. (5) Turn on the two stop valves and keep normal running.
61
Stop valve equipped

to the outdoor unit
for the gas pipe
Stop valve equipped
to the outdoor unit for
the liquid pipe
Gas pipe filter
Added stop valve

for the gas pipe
Drier filter for the liquid pipe

Added stop valve
for the liquid pipe
II. Pipe Installation for the Condensate Water

System
1. Pipes
Generally, U-PVC water supply pipes bonded with special glue are adopted as condensate water
pipes. PP-R, PP-C, and hot galvanized steel pipes can also be adopted. Aluminium plastic compound
pipes cannot be used.
2. Requirements on Installation
2.1 Determine the direction and elevation of a condensate water pipe before installing it. Avoid
overlapping it with other pipes to ensure straight inclination. The clamp of the pipe hanger is fixed
outside the insulation layer. The height of the clamp can be adjusted.
2.2 Distance between Hangers
External Diameter of
the Pipe (mm) Φ≤25 32>Φ≥25 Φ≥32
Distance between
Horizontal Pipes (mm) 800 1000 1500
Distance between
Vertical Pipes (mm) 1500 2000
There are at least two hangers for each vertical pipe.
2.3 The inclination degree of the condensate water pipe must be above 1% and that of the main pipe
cannot be lower than 0.3%. Adverse slopes are not allowed.
2.4 When connecting three-way pipes, the two-way straight pipes must be laid on the same slope, as
shown in the following figures.
2.5 The condensate water pipe cannot be tied with the refrigerant pipe.
2.6 A ventilation hole must be provided on the top of the drain pipe to ensure smoother discharge of
condensate water.
62
2.7 After pipes are connected, perform a test with some water and another test with full water in the pipe to
check whether drainage is smooth and whether water leakage exists in the pipe system.
2.8 Equip a steel casing for all pipes which are led through the wall or floor. Pipe bonding joints cannot
be placed inside the sleeve. The steel casing must be parallel with the bottom of the floor or wall. There
must be a height drop of 20 mm from the ground when the pipe is lead through the floor. The sleeve
cannot affect the inclination degree of the pipe. Fill the gap between the pipe and the sleeve with flexible
and non-flammable materials. The sleeve cannot be used as a support point of the pipe.
2.9 Bond the insulation material joints with special glue and then wrap them with plastic adhesive tape.
The width of the adhesive tape must be 5 cm or more to prevent dewing.
3. Other Requirements
3.1 Ensure an inclination degree of more than 1% when connecting the drain pipe to the IDU.
(mm)
1000~1500
Inclination degree
of more than 1/100
Correct connection Incorrect connection
3.2 When connecting the drain pipe to that of the IDU, fix the pipes with the bands provided upon
delivery instead of using the glue to facilitate further maintenance.
3.3 When connecting the drain pipe branches to the main pipe, lead through from the above part of the
main pipe.
3.4 If the air volume of the IDUs is high and outdoor air resorption may be caused by negative suction
pressure, provide a u-type drain trap at the water outlet side of each IDU, as shown in the following
figure.
Indoor unit
 Install drain trap connectors as shown in the following figure.

 Install a drain trap connector for each unit.
 The drain trap connector shall be installed in a way that facilitates trap cleaning.
63
Connector
Indoor unit Indoor unit
Connector
3.5 During condensate water pipe installation, ensure a distance above 500 mm between the pipe and
the electric box of the unit for maintenance. In a case when the space is not enough, the final piping way
must be determined by the technical personnel.
III. Insulation System

1. Insulation for the Refrigerant Pipe System
1.1 Insulation Materials
Use closed-cell foam insulation materials with flame retardant grade of B1.
The heat conductivity is not greater than 0.035 w/(m·k) when the average temperature is 0°C.
1.2 Thickness of the Insulation Layer
External Diameter of the Pipe (mm) ≤ 12.7 ≥ 15.88
Thickness of the Insulation Layer (mm) ≥ 15 ≥ 20
Use sunblock, anti-weathering, and non-cracking insulation materials for outdoor pipes.
64
1.3 Procedure of Insulation

a. Select insulation materials based on design requirements.
b. Wear the insulation sleeve before connecting refrigerant pipes. Users cannot cut the insulation
material apart and then wrap up with ties after connecting the pipes by welding.
c. Specifications of the insulation sleeve must match with that of the refrigerant pipes.
d. Reserve a distance of about 200 mm near the welding point to protect the insulation sleeve during
welding. After performing the air-tightness test, perform insulation to the welding point separately to
ensure continuity of the insulation sleeve.
e. The insulation layer cannot crack during construction. Bond the insulation material joints with special
glue and then wrap them with electrical adhesive tape. The width of the adhesive tape must be 50 mm or
more to ensure secure connection.
f. Use glue to bond the insulation material at the water outlet to the unit to prevent dewing.
g. Wrap joints of indoor/outdoor units with insulation materials. There must be no gap between the joint
and the wall of the indoor/outdoor unit, as shown in the following figure.
No gap
2. Insulation for the Condensate Water Pipe System
2.1 Insulation Materials
Use closed-cell foam insulation materials with retardant grade of B1.
The heat conductivity is not greater than 0.035 w/(m·k) when the average temperature is 0 °C .
Thickness of the insulation layer for the condensate water pipe must be greater than 10 mm.
2.3 Bond the insulation material joints with special glue and then wrap them with plastic adhesive. The
width of the adhesive must be greater than 5 cm to prevent dewing.
2.4 Insulation is not required for the outdoor part of condensate water pipes.
3. Insulation for Air Ducts
3.1 Insulation for air duct components and devices must be performed after the air leakage test is
performed or after quality check.
3.2 Use centrifugal glass wool or rubber and plastic materials for insulation or use novel insulation air
ducts.
3.4 The insulation layer should be flat and tight without any crack or gap.
For the air supply and return air pipe laid in a room without an air conditioner, thickness of the rubber and
plastic insulation layer is 35 mm.
For the air supply and return air pipe laid in an air conditioning room, thickness of the rubber and plastic
insulation layer is 20 mm.
3.6 Supports, hangers, and brackets of the air duct must be installed outside the insulation layer. A chock
must be provided between the support, hanger, or brackets and the air duct.
65
Part 7 Electric and Controller Installation

I. Precautions
Both the power cable and communication cable must be connected properly. If the power cable is
connected to the communication port, the main board will be burnt.
The power cable and communication cable can be identified in the following ways:
Method 1: Use sheaths in different colours.
Single-phase unit Three-phase unit
L N
D1 D2 H1 H2
D1 D2 H1 H2
L N
Grounding 1. Reliable grounding is required. Grounding

screw 2. The screw for fixing the conducting
wire must be tightened. It must be
screw 1. Reliable grounding is required.
Warning
replaced if slipped screw head exists. 2. The screw for fixing the conducting
3. The external conducting wire must Indoor/outdoor unit Wired controller
communication D1 D2
wire must be tightened. It must be Indoor/outdoor unit Wired controller
Warning
be fixed by a clip. Otherwise, personal H1 H2 replaced if slipped screw head exists.
injury or fire may occur. 3. The external conducting wire must communication D1 D2 H1 H2
be fixed by a clip. Otherwise, personal
injury or fire may occur.
Color label for the Color label for the

communication cable communication cable
Color label for

the power cable Color label for
the power cable
Power cable Indoor/outdoor Communication cable Indoor/outdoor Communication cable
Power cable
communication cable of the wired controller communication cable of the wired controller
Method 2: Use different types of cables.

The diameter of the power cable is larger than that of the communication cable. Alternatively, adopt three
cores or more for the power cable and two cores for the communication cable.
Single-phase unit Three-phase unit
L N
D1 D2 H1 H2
D1 D2 H1 H2
L N
Grounding Grounding
screw 1. Reliable grounding is required.
2. The screw for fixing the conducting wire
must be tightened. It must be replaced if screw 1. Reliable grounding is required.
Warning
slipped screw head exists. 2. The screw for fixing the conducting wire
3. The external conducting wire must be Indoor/outdoor unit Wired controller must be tightened. It must be replaced if
communication D1 D2 Indoor/outdoor unit Wired controller
Warning
fixed by a clip. Otherwise, personal injury H1 H2 slipped screw head exists.

or fire may occur. 3. The external conducting wire must be communication D1 D2 H1 H2
fixed by a clip. Otherwise, personal injury
or fire may occur.
Power cable (three-core) Indoor/outdoor Communication Power cable (five-core) Indoor/outdoor Communication
(The yellow green cable communication cable of the wired (The yellow green cable communication cable of the wired
is the ground cable.) cable (two-core) controller (two-core) is the ground cable.) cable (two-core) controller (two-core)
Elaborate the method with the installation personnel on site no matter which method is adopted.
II. Installation of the Power Cable

1. Precautions
1) The air conditioning unit is category 1 electrical appliance which requires reliable grounding.
2) The grounding resistance must meet the requirement of local law.
3) The yellow green cable inside the air conditioning unit is a grounding cable. It cannot be used for
other purposes or be cut off. Do not fix it with tapping screws. Otherwise, an electric shock may be
caused.
4) A reliable ground terminal must be provided for the power. Do not connect the grounding cable to
any of the following:
a. Water pipes b. Gas pipes c Drainage pipe d. Other places deemed as unreliable
5) The power cable and the communication cable must be laid separately with a distance of greater
than 20 cm. Otherwise, the communication of the unit will be affection.
66
2. Requirements on Power Cable Configuration

Configure a circuit breaker to each unit for short circuit and overload protection. In addition, configure a
general circuit breaker to both the indoor and ODUs to switch on or switch off the general power of the
IDU or ODU.
1) External Connection for Individual Units
Power cable
Power
Power terminal block XT1
Communication
Communication cable terminal block XT2
Outdoor unit 1
(master module)
Power
Power cable Remote monitoring
Power terminal block XT1 Power terminal Power terminal block XT1
block XT1
Communication Communication Communication
terminal block XT2 terminal block XT2 terminal block XT2
The last Wiring (with

Indoor unit 1 Indoor unit 2 matching resistor)
indoor unit
Indoor unit n
Wired controller Wired controller Wire controller
Note:
The maximum number of connected IDUs (n) is determined based on the capacity of the ODU. For
details, see the description on unit capacity configuration.
2) External Connection for Modularly Connected Units
67
Power cable
Power
Power terminal block XT1 Power terminal block XT1 Power terminal block XT1

Communication cable terminal block XT2 terminal block XT2 terminal block XT2
Outdoor unit 1
Indoor unit n Indoor unit 2
(master module)
Power
Power cable Remote
monitoring
Power terminal block XT1 Power terminal Power terminal block XT1
block XT1
terminal block XT2 terminal block XT2 terminal block XT2
Wiring (with
Indoor unit 1 Indoor unit 2 Indoor unit n matching resistor)
Wired controller Wired controller Wired controller
Note:
The maximum number of connected ODUs (N) and that of connected IDUs (n) are determined based on
the combination form of ODUs. For details, see the description on unit capacity configuration.
3. Procedure for Installing the Power Cable
1) Knock off the knockouts used for threading the external power cable, fit the threading rubber ring to
the hole, and thread the power cable through the hole. Connect L1, L2, L3, and N of the power cable,
and the grounding cable to L1, L2, L3, and N on the power terminal block and the grounding screw
next to the terminal block respectively.
Inner-unit connection cable Inner-unit connection cable Inner-unit connection cable
Terminal block
Terminal block Terminal block
Connector of the Connector of the Connector of the

grounding cable grounding cable grounding cable
Fixing mode of Fixing mode of

reverse u-type straight insertion
Fixing mode
of tablet
compressing Exposed
conducting wire
Externally
connected Externally
power Externally
connected
cable connected
power
power
cable
cable
2) Fasten and fix the power cable with ties (support heads).
3) Lay the power cable and communication cable for the ODU according to the following figures.
68
Use ties (support

heads) to fix the
communication
cable.
Use ties (support
heads) to fix the Lead the
Lead the
external power cable. communication
power cable
through the cable through
hole. the hole.
Lead the power cable
through the hole.
Lead the power
cable through the
hole.
Routing 1 of Routing 2 of
the external the external Routing 1 of the
Routing 2 of the
power cable power cable communication
communication
cable
Power Power cable
Routing diagram of the external power cable Routing diagram of the communication cable
Note: Provide a threading rubber ring when threading a strong power cable or a communication
cable.
69
III. Installation of the Communication System

The CAN communication network is adopted for GMV5 VRF system. Manual DIP or identification on
polarities of the communication power is not required for the IDU. Only the function DIP needs to be set
for the ODU. For details, see the description on function setting of the ODU.
1. Connection of Communication Cable Terminals

All connections for communication of GMV5 are fastened by screws.
2. Connection of Communication Cables

The communication bus of indoor and ODUs must be connected in series instead of in star mode. The
last IDU of the bus shall be connected to a matching resistor (placed in the package of the ODU).
70
Figure 4 Communication cable connection for IDUs and ODUs
3. Communication Cable Connection Method and Procedure

A. Communication cable connection between the IDUs and ODUs
The communication cable between the IDUs and ODUs is connected via interface D1/D2 on the terminal
block XT2. Connection modes for the single-module system and multi-module system are shown in the
following figures.
71
Figure 5 Communication cable connection for the single-module system
Figure 6 Communication cable connection for the multi-module system

Note:
a) If there are multiple modules for the modular ODU, the master unit must be the first ODU
module on the communication cable and cannot be connected to the IDU. (The master unit is
set by SA8 on the main board of the ODU.)
b) If there are multiple modules for the modular ODU, the IDU must be connected to the slave
module of the last ODU. (The slave unit is set by SA8 on the main board of the ODU.)
c) The communication cable and power cable must be laid separately to avoid interference.
72
d) The communication cable must be long enough to avoid joints.

e) Indoor units must be connected in series. The last IDU shall be connected to a matching
resistor (placed in the package of the ODU).
Part 8: Vacuumization and Desiccation for

the Refrigerant System
Works for the refrigerant system include cleaning and desiccating the pipes, performing an air-tightness
test, and perfusing refrigerant.
I. Air-tightness Test
1. Importance of the Air-tightness Test
Air-tightness of the multi-module air conditioning system mainly refers to the tightness of the refrigerant
pipes, which ensures secure and reliable running of the air conditioner.
Refrigerant leakage may affect functions of the air conditions or even damage the compressor and make
the system to break down. Therefore, a air-tightness test must be performed. If refrigerant leakage is
detected after the system is installed, it is very difficult to locate the leaking point as the suspending
ceiling has been decorated. Therefore, the air-tightness test must be performed before ceiling sealing for
indoor decoration is finished.
2. Procedure for Performing the Air-tightness Test
Stop valves of the gas and liquid pipes of the ODU are turned off at delivery.
Before test, apply a small amount of required lubricant on the block nut and pipe terminals and use two
wrenches to fix the block nut.
The ODU pipes cannot be connected when the air-tightness test is being performed.
The test pressure for R410A system is 4.0 MPa. Use dry nitrogen as media for the air-tightness test.
Increase the pressure slowly by following the steps below:
Step 1: Increase the pressure to 0.5 MPa. Stop for 5 minutes and then perform air-tightness check. Major
leakage may be detected.
Step 2: Increase the pressure to 1.5 MPa. Stop for 5 minutes and then perform air-tightness check. Minor
leakage may be detected.
Step 3: Increase the pressure for R410A system to 4.15 MPa. Stop for 5 minutes and then perform
strength check. Slight leakage or blow holes may be detected.After increasing the pressure to the test
pressure, keep the pressure for 24 hours and check whether it decreases. If the pressure does not
decrease, it meets the requirement.
3. Precautions:
a. The measuring range of the test pressure gauge for R410A system must be above 4.5 MPa.
b. Record the value displayed on the pressure gauge, ambient temperature, and test time.
c. Pressure correction: The pressure changes by 0.01 MPa when the temperature changes by 1°C.
d. The pressure meets the requirement if it does not change.
e. If the pressure must be kept for a long time, decrease the pressure to 0.5 MPa or lower. High pressure
for a long time may cause leakage at the welding point or safety hazard.
f. Before performing the air-tightness test to the refrigerant pipes, do not conduct insulation or wrapping
at the welding or flaring opening joints of the IDU. The pressure must be increased simultaneously for
pipes on outdoor sides and cannot be increased for pipes on one side.
4. Note: Before performing the air-tightness test, do not conduct insulation or wrapping at the welding
joints.
73
II. Vacuumization and Desiccation for the

System
1. Requirements on the Vacuum Pump
The vacuum pump for different refrigerant systems cannot be the same.
The ultimate vacuum degree of the vacuum pump should reach -0.1 MPa.
The air discharge capacity of the vacuum pump must be greater than 4 L/S.
The precision of the vacuum pump must be greater than 0.02 mmHg.
The system vacuum pump must be equipped with a check valve.
2. Procedure and Precautions for Vacuumization and Desiccation
2.1 Procedure
a. Before vacuumization, ensure that the stop valves of the gas and liquid pipes are turned off.
b. Use the perfusing duct to connect the regulator valve and vacuum pump to detection connectors of
the gas pipe and liquid pipe.
c. Vacuumize for 4 hours and check whether the vacuum degree reaches -0.1 MPa or more. If not,
leakage may exist. Perform leakage check again. If no leakage exists, continue to vacuumize for 2
hours.
f. If the vacuum degree cannot be kept after vacuumization is performed for twice, there may be water
in the pipe when it is confirmed that no leakage exists. In this case, discharge water by means of
vacuum breaking. Perfuse nitrogen at 0.05 MPa to the pipe. Vacuumize for 2 hours and keep
vacuuming for 1 hour. If the vacuum degree of -0.1 MPa cannot be reached, repeat this operation till
water is discharged.
g. After vacuumization, turn off the regulator valve and keep for 1 hour. Ensure that the pressure of the
regulator valve does not increase.
2.2. Precautions:
a. The gas pipe and liquid pipe must be vacuumized at the same time.
b. Turn off the valve before powering off the vacuum pump.
c. Keep vacuuming for 2 hours. The vacuum meets the requirement if the pressure displayed by the
vacuum gauge does not increase.
d. The units parallel connected to the module and oil-equalizing pipe also need to be vacuumized.
74
Part 9: Refrigerant Perfusion

I. Calculation Method for Perfusing
Refrigerant
Quantity of refrigerant perfused for the pipe (R) = Quantity of refrigerant perfused for the pipe (A) + ∑
Quantity of refrigerant perfused for each module (B)
1. Method for calculating the quantity of refrigerant perfused for the pipe (A):
Quantity of perfused refrigerant for the pipe (A) = ∑ Length of the liquid pipe x Quantity of perfused
refrigerant for the liquid pipe per meter
Diameter of the Liquid

Φ28.6 Φ25.4 Φ22.2 Φ19.05 Φ15.9 Φ12.7 Φ9.52 Φ6.35
Pipe
kg/m 0.680 0.520 0.350 0.250 0.170 0.110 0.054 0.022
3. Method for calculating ∑ for the quantity of refrigerant perfused for each module (B)
Refrigerant charging amount B of every module(kg)（2） Module capacity(kW)
IDU/ODU rated capacity collocation Quantity of

22.4 28.0 33.5 40.0 45.0 50.4 56.0 61.5
ratio C （1） included IDUs
＜4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
50%≤C≤70%
≥4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5
＜4 0.5 0.5 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2
70%＜C≤90%
≥4 1 1 1.5 2 2 2.5 3.0 3.5
＜4 1 1 1.5 2 2 2.5 3.0 3.5
90%＜C≤105%
≥4 2 2 3 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.5 5
＜4 2 2 2.5 3 3 3.5 4 4
105%＜C≤135%
≥4 3.5 3.5 4 5 5 5.5 6 6
Note:
(1) Rated capacity configuration rate C for IDUs and ODUs = Sum of rated cooling capacity of IDUs/Sum
of rated cooling capacity of ODUs
(2) If all IDUs are fresh air IDUs in GMV-NX series, the quantity of refrigerant perfused for each module
(B) is 0 kg.
Examples
Example 1:
The ODU consists of modules GMV-280WM/B-X, GMV-400WM/B-X, and GMV-450WM/B-X. The IDU
consists of 8 pieces of GMV-ND140PLS/A-T.
Rated capacity configuration rate C for IDUs and ODUs = 140 x 8/(280+400+450) = 99%. The number of
IDUs is greater than 4, according to the above table,
The quantity of refrigerant perfused for module GMV-280WM/B-X (B) is 2.0kg.
Therefore,
∑ Quantity of refrigerant perfused for each module (B) = 2.0+3.5+3.5 = 9.0 kg
Assume that the quantity of refrigerant perfused for the pipe (A) = ∑ Length of the liquid pipe x Quantity
of refrigerant perfused for the liquid pipe per meter = 25 kg
Total quantity of refrigerant perfused for the system (R) = 25+9 = 34 kg
Example 2:
The ODU consists of one GMV-450WM/B-X and the IDU consists of one fresh air IDU GMV-NX450P/A
75
(X4.0)-M. The quantity of perfused refrigerant for this module is 0 kg.

Therefore,
∑ Quantity of refrigerant perfused for each module (B) = 0 kg
Assume that the quantity of refrigerant perfused for the pipe (A) = ∑ Length of the liquid pipe x Quantity
of refrigerant perfused for the liquid pipe per meter = 5kg
Total quantity of refrigerant perfused for the system (R) = 5+0= 5 kg
II. Method for Perfusing Refrigerant

Refrigerant perfusion for the VRF system is classified into pre-perfusion and perfusion during running.
1. Refrigerant Pre-perfusion
Step 1: Connect the high pressure gauge pipe to the detection opening of the liquid pipe, the low
pressure gauge pipe to the detection opening of the gas pipe, and the medium gauge pipe to the
vacuum pump. Power on the vacuum pump to perform vacuumization and desiccation.
Step 2: After vacuumization and desiccation are finished, turn off valves of the high pressure gauge and
low pressure gauge. Disconnect the medium gauge pipe from the vacuum pump and connect it
to the refrigerant tank.
Step 3: Properly loosen the joint between the medium gauge pipe and the pressure gauge and slightly
turn on the valve of the refrigerant tank. Vacuumize the medium gauge pipe. After that, fasten
the joint and turn on the valve of the refrigerant tank completely.
Step 4: If the refrigerant tank is not equipped with a siphon, reverse the refrigerant tank and place it on
the electronic scale. Then record the current weight (m1). If the refrigerant tank is equipped with
a siphon, record the current weight (m1) directly.
Step 5: Turn on the valve of the high pressure gauge (while keep the valve of the high pressure gauge
turned off) and then perfuse refrigerant to the system. Record the change of weight of the
refrigerant tank.
Step 6: When all refrigerant in the refrigerant tank is perfused, record the current weight m2.
Step 7: Turn off the valve of the high pressure gauge and replace the refrigerant tank.
Step 8: Perform step 3 again.
Step 9: Perform step 5 and step 6 again. Record the weight before perfusion m3 and weight after
perfusion m4.
Step 10:If there is no sufficient refrigerant and the calculated quantity of refrigerant is not fulfilled for the
system, record the current total perfusion quantity.
76
m=(m1-m2)+(m3-m4)+…+(mn-1-mn)
Quantity of refrigerant to be perfused during running m`=M-m
M is the required total quantity
If the pre-perfusion quantity (m) reaches the required total quantity for the system, turn off the valve of
the refrigerant tank immediately to finish perfusing and proceed with step 11.
Step 11: Remove the pressure gauge.
2. Refrigerant Perfusion During Running

Step 1: Turn off the valve of the refrigerant tank and reconnect the pressure gauge pipe. Disconnect the
low pressure gauge pipe from the detection valve opening of the gas liquid and connect it to the
low pressure detection valve, as shown in the following figure.
Step 2: Turn on the valves for the liquid and gas pipes of each module completely. For the modular unit,
the oil-equalizing valve of each module also needs to be turned on.
Step 3: Make the system to run in commissioning mode via the commissioning software or the main
board of the ODU. (For details, see the description on commissioning.)
Step 4: When the commissioning step goes to refrigerant perfusion, turn on the valve of the refrigerant
tank and perfuse the remaining quantity (m`).
Step 5: After all refrigerant is perfused, turn off valve of the refrigerant tank and wait till commissioning is
automatically is completed for the system.
Step 6: Remove the pressure gauge to finish refrigerant perfusion.
77
Chapter 3 Commissioning Operation

Part 1 Security Requirements
I. Precautions for Construction
1. All commissioning and maintenance personnel must learn and strictly comply with construction
security specifications. Security measures must be taken especially for outdoor operations.
2. Workers of special types of labor, such as refrigerating engineers, electricians, and welders, must
have professional certificates. No worker is allowed to do another type of labor.
3. The equipment must be powered off before relevant operations, and other security requirements
should be strictly complied with.
4. All installation and maintenance operations must comply with design requirements of this product and
national and local security operation requirements. Rule-breaking operations are prohibited.
II. Precautions for the Use of Refrigerants

The GMV5 serial unit is a refrigerating system of R410A working substances. Pay attention to the
following points:
1. The refrigerating system of R410A working substances has a higher working pressure than that of
R22 working substances. The working pressure of the former is 1.6 times than that of the latter.
2. The refrigerating system of R410A working substances uses thicker-walled copper tubes than that of
R22 working substances. Adopt copper tubes with appropriate wall thickness.
3. R410A working substances are azeotropic mixture working substances. Refrigerants must be
appended in the form of liquid.
Part 2 Introduction to Unit Functions

I. Function Settings of ODUs
Function application of ODUs consists of function DIP switch settings and function button settings,
including special engineering requirements.
(I) System Function DIP Switch Settings
Factory
DIP Switch Name Meaning Settings Remark
Defined
Capacity DIP Defines the rated capacity of based on The factory settings cannot be
SA1_capacity switch the unit. the model. changed.
The address DIP switch is
used only when centralized
Centralized Defines and differentiates control is required. Otherwise,
control addresses of different systems the factory settings are used
address DIP in the case of centralized without being changed. The
SA2_Addr-CC switch control by multiple systems. 00000 address DIP switch is valid
78
only when it is set on the

master unit.
2#-6#
compressor It is better not to use the
emergency Provides aftersales emergency emergency function. Replace
operation settings for 2#-6# the compressor at the first time
SA3_COMP-E DIP switch compressors. 00000 when an exception occurs.
1#
compressor/
module It is better not to use the
emergency Provides aftersales emergency emergency function. Replace
operation settings for 1# the compressor at the first time
SA4_I/M-E DIP switch compressor/module. 00 when an exception occurs.
It is better not to use the
Fan emergency function. Replace
emergency relevant parts of the fan at the
operation Provides aftersales emergency first time when an exception
SA5_FAN-E DIP switch settings for fans. 00 occurs.
This DIP switch should be set
Sets the static pressure of the based on actual engineering
Outdoor fan according to the static conditions, neither over-large
fan static pressure of the exhaust pipeline nor over-small. It is
pressure connected with the engineering unnecessary to change the
setting DIP unit, to guarantee normal factory settings in outdoor
SA6_ESP_S switch operation of the unit. 00 scenarios.
Reserved
SA7 DIP switch —— 00 ——
A master unit must be set, and
only one master unit can be set
in each refrigerating system.
Master unit This DIP switch is mandatory.
SA8_MASTE setting DIP The default factory setting is
R-S switch Defines the master unit. 00 the master unit status.
Note: On the master module, the SA8 DIP switch must be set again, the SA1 DIP switch cannot be
further set, and other DIP switches retain the factory settings without special requirements.
Function DIP switches must be set when the ODU is powered off, and then the settings are valid
after the ODU is powered on.
Meanings and setting methods of function DIP switches are as follows:

1. Unit Capacity DIP Switch (SA1_capacity)
The unit capacity DIP switch (SA1_capacity) has been set upon factory departure. It is unnecessary to
further set the DIP switch. In addition, users are not allowed to change the DIP switch settings.
Otherwise, the system may work abnormally or even the compressor may be damaged.
2. Centralized Control Address DIP Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)
The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) indicates the centralized control address
required when different refrigerating systems are controlled in a centralized manner. The default factory
setting is "00000".
If it is not required to use centralized control between multiple refrigerating systems, this DIP switch can
retain the factory settings without being changed.
If it is required to use centralized control between multiple refrigerating systems, set the DIP switch
according to the following methods:
1) The DIP switch must be set on the master unit. Otherwise, the setting is invalid.
2) On the same refrigerating system, the centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) on a
79
non-master unit is invalid, and it is unnecessary to change the settings.

3) The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) on the master unit of a refrigerating
system must be set to ―00000‖, and this system is the master system.
4) The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) on the master unit of other refrigerating
systems must be set as follows:
SA2 Address
DIP1 DIP2 DIP3 DIP4 DIP5 No.
1 0 0 0 0 2
0 1 0 0 0 3
0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 0 1 0 5
0 0 0 0 1 6
1 0 0 0 1 7
0 1 0 0 1 8
0 0 1 0 1 9
0 0 0 1 1 10
1 0 0 1 1 11
0 1 0 1 1 12
0 0 1 1 1 13
1 0 1 1 1 14
0 1 1 1 1 15
1 1 1 1 1 16
5) The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) cannot be the same between different
refrigerating systems. Otherwise, address conflicts may occur and the unit cannot run properly.
3. Compressor Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA3_COMP-E)
Corresponding to 2#-6# compressors, the compressor emergency operation DIP switch (SA3_COMP-E)
is used for aftersales emergency settings when an exception occurs on a compressor. It can shield the
operation of the abnormal compressor in a short time and guarantee the emergency operation of other
compressors.
When it is required to shield the operation of 2#-6# compressors upon failure, set the DIP switch
according to the following methods:
Compressor Emergency Operation
DIP Switch (SA3_COMP-E)
DIP1 DIP2 DIP3 DIP4 DIP5 Remark
Not shielding the operation of
0 0 0 0 0 2#-6# compressors
Shielding the operation of 2#
1 0 0 0 0 compressor
80
Precautions:
A. When the DIP switch setting is not covered in the above scope, a DIP switch setting exception fault
may occur.
B. Only one compressor can be set to emergency mode on a module.
C. The compressor emergency operation mode is valid only in a single-module multi-compressor
system.
D. The default factory setting is ―00000‖.
E. The system cannot continually run for more than 24 hours in compressor emergency operation status.
Once 24 hours are exceeded, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped and the limited operation code ―Ad‖
is displayed on the IDU.
F. 1#-6# compressors are defined from right to left facing the front of the unit.
4. 1# Compressor/Module Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA4_I/M-E)
The 1# compressor/module emergency operation DIP switch (SA4_I/M-E) is used for aftersales
emergency settings when an exception occurs on the 1# compressor/module. It can shield the operation
of the abnormal compressor/module in a short time and guarantee the emergency operation of other
compressors.
When it is required to set the 1# compressor/module to emergency mode, set the DIP switch as follows:
1# Compressor/Module Emergency Operation
DIP Switch (SA4_I/M-E)
DIP1 DIP2 Remark
Not shielding the operation of 1#
0 0
compressor/module
1 0
compressor
Shielding the operation of the
0 1
module
Precautions:
may occur.
B. Only one compressor can be set to emergency mode on a module. Subsequent to emergency
operation, valves of shielded outdoor unit, including the gas pipe, liquid pipe and oil balance pipe, need
to be closed tight by hand.
C. The compressor emergency operation mode is valid only in a single-module multi-compressor
system.
D. The module emergency operation mode is valid only in a system with more than two modules
connected in parallel.
E. Only one module can be set to emergency operation mode in each system.
F. The default factory setting is ―00‖.
G. The system cannot continually run for more than 24 hours in compressor emergency operation status.
H. The system cannot continually run for more than 48 hours in module emergency operation status.
81
I. 1#-6# compressors are defined from right to left facing the front of the unit.
5. Fan Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA5_FAN-E)
The fan emergency operation DIP switch (SA5_FAN-E) is used for aftersales emergency settings when
an exception occurs on a dual-module fan. It can shield the operation of a fan in a short time and
guarantee the emergency operation of the system.
1) Fan positions
2) When it is required to set the fan to emergency mode, set the DIP switch as follows:
Fan Emergency Operation DIP Switch
(SA5_FAN-E)
DIP1 DIP2 Remark
No fan in emergency
0 0
operation mode
Shielding the operation of
1 0
1# fan
Shielding the operation of
0 1
2# fan
Precautions:
may occur.
B. Only one fan can be set to emergency mode on a module.
C. The default factory setting is ―00‖.
D. The system cannot continually run for more than 120 hours in fan emergency operation status. Once
120 hours are exceeded, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped and the limited operation code ―Ad‖ is
displayed on the IDU.
6. Outdoor Fan Static Pressure Setting DIP Switch (SA6_ESP_S)
The outdoor fan static pressure setting DIP switch (SA6_ESP_S) is used in special scenarios such as
the unit installation equipment room. In scenarios where air ducts are required to be connected, zero
static pressure (0 Pa), low static pressure (30 Pa), medium static pressure (50 Pa), and high static
pressure (82 Pa) can be set according to the design of air ducts. The setting methods are as follows:
Outdoor Fan Static Pressure Setting DIP
Switch (SA6_ESP_S)
DIP1 DIP2 Static Pressure Range
0 0 0 Pa
1 0 30 Pa
0 1 50 Pa
1 1 82 Pa
The default factory setting is ―00‖.
Note that the DIP switch should be independently set on each module.
7. Reserved Function DIP Switch (SA7)
SA7 is the reserved function DIP switch and meaningless currently.
82
8. Master Unit Setting DIP Switch (SA8_MASTER-S)

The master unit setting DIP switch (SA8_MASTER-S) defines module management of a system. A
master unit must be set, and only one master unit can be set in each refrigerating system (in
power-off status). The setting methods are as follows:
Master Unit Setting DIP Switch
(SA8_MASTER-S)
DIP1 DIP2 Remark
0 0 Master unit
1 0 Sub-module
Upon factory departure, all modules are in ―00‖ master unit status by default. When multiple modules are
connected in parallel, only one module retains the master unit status and other modules are set to
sub-module status. When a module is independently used, it uses the factory settings.
For the basic module set to master unit, the module address is displayed as ―01‖ on the main board.
Precautions:
may occur.
B. A module must be set to master unit status, and only one module can be set to master unit status in
each refrigerating system. Other modules are set to sub-module status.
C. Settings must be performed in power-off status.
D. The default factory setting is "00" master unit status.
9. DIP Switch Example
A. Explanation of DIP switch positions
On the DIP switch, ―ON‖ indicates ―0‖ status and the opposite direction indicates "1‖ status.
The position of white lever indicates the position to be set to.
B. Example
The following takes master unit settings as an example. Assume that a system consists of three modules:
module a, module b, and module c. Set module c to master unit and the other two modules to
sub-modules. The settings are as follows:
(II) System Function Button Operations
Module c (Master Module)
Module a/Module b (Sub-module)
Note:  System function settings and query must be performed after commissioning of the entire unit.
 System function settings and query can be used no matter whether the entire unit runs.
1. Introduction to Function Buttons
The main board AP1 of the ODU consists of eight function buttons:
83
Function Button Name and Meaning

Button Code Function Meaning
SW1 UP Indicates the upward selection button.
SW2 DOWN Indicates the downward selection button.
SW3 FUNCTION Indicates the function button, used for function settings.
SW4 CHECK Indicates the query button, used for function query.
SW5 SKIP Indicates the skip button.
SW6 BACK Indicates the return button, used to return to the upper-level menu.
SW7 CONFIRM Indicates the confirmation button.
SW8 RESET Indicates the reset button, used to restore factory settings.
84
2. Introduction to Functions
2.1 List of functions
Function Factory Settings Remark
Code Function Name Function Meaning Code Meaning
Fully or partially recovers
refrigerants in a faulty module
or IDU pipeline according to
the system pressure after
Refrigerant automatic startup during It can only
A2 recovery operation maintenance. —— —— be set.
Sets the unit to
cooling/heating,
single-cooling,
Unit single-heating, or air supply
cooling/heating mode for centralized Cooling/Heating It can be set
A6 function management. nA function and queried.
Sets different silent modes to
Outdoor silent meet users' noise No silent It can be set
A7 mode requirements. 00 settings and queried.
Automatically
enables all electronic
expansion valves and
electromagnetic valves
during maintenance to
Aftersales guarantee vacuum It can only
A8 vacuuming mode processing in all pipelines. —— —— be set.
Automatically decreases the
power consumption of the No automatic
Conservation unit according to system conservation It can be set
n0 control 1 operation parameters. 01 settings and queried.
Forcible defrosting Forcibly enables ODU It can only
n3 operation defrosting operation. —— —— be set.
Forcibly decreases No capacity
Conservation the maximum power output limitation It can be set
n4 control 2 consumption of the unit. 00 settings and queried.
Prevents IDU project number
conflicts when different
refrigerating systems are
Indoor unit project controlled in a centralized It can only
n5 number offset manner. —— —— be set.
Queries historical fault It can only be
n6 Fault query information of the ODU. —— —— queried.
Queries real-time operation It can only be
n7 Parameter query parameters of the ODU. —— —— queried.
Displays project numberes of
Indoor unit project all IDUs through ODU It can only be
n8 number query operations. —— —— queried.
Online IDU Displays the number of It can only be
n9 quantity query online IDUs. —— —— queried.
Outdoor unit bar Queries the entire-unit bar
code function code and controller bar code It can only be
nb query of ODU. —— —— queried.
2.2. Description of Functions

(1) A2 Refrigerant recovery operation
This function partially recovers refrigerants in a faulty module or IDU pipeline during unit maintenance.
The refrigerant recovery volume of each basic module is as follows:
85
Model of Basic Module Maximum Refrigerant Recovery Volume (kg)

GMV-224WM/B-X 7.5
GMV-280WM/B-X 7.5
GMV-335WM/B-X 8.7
GMV-400WM/B-X
13.5
GMV-450WM/B-X
This function falls into two modes: faulty module refrigerant recovery and IDU pipeline refrigerant
recovery.
Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant Recovery
Remark
Mode Code Mode Name
Basic module refrigerant This mode is selected when a basic module fails and it is required
01
recovery to recover refrigerants from this basic module.
Indoor unit pipeline This mode is selected when an IDU fails and it is required to
02
refrigerant recovery recover refrigerants from the IDU pipeline.
When this function is enabled, the ODU automatically starts and recovers refrigerants to the ODU or IDU
pipeline.
(2) A6 Unit cooling/heating function
This function sets operation modes of the entire unit, including:
Function Mode of ODU
Operation Mode of IDU
Code Name
Cooling mode, dehumidifying mode, heating mode, and air
supply mode.
nA Cooling/Heating
(Note: The heating mode cannot work with other modes at the
same time.) (factory settings)
nC Single-cooling Cooling mode, dehumidifying mode, and air supply mode.
Heating mode and air supply mode.
nH Single-heating (Note: The heating mode cannot work with the air supply
mode at the same time.)
nF Air supply Air supply mode.
The user or administrator can set operation modes of the ODU based on actual situations to prevent
conflicts.
When it is required to set different refrigerating systems to the same function mode, set the master
system according to the above requirements. For the master system settings, see the "Centralized
Control Address DIP Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)" section.
(3) A7 Outdoor silent mode
This function is used when users require lower environment noises, including nighttime automatic silent
mode and forcible silent mode.
For the nighttime automatic silent mode, the system automatically judges the highest daytime
environment temperature and then starts silent operations in a certain interval to guarantee nighttime
low-noise operations. The nighttime automatic silent mode falls into nine categories:
Starting the Silent Mode X Hours Stopping the Nighttime Silent
Silent Mode Code after the Daytime Temperature Mode after Continual
Reaches the Highest Operations for Y Hours Noise Degree
Mode 1 01 6 10
Mode 2 02 6 12
Mode 3 03 8 8
Mode 4 04 8 10 Low-noise mode
Mode 5 05 10 8
Mode 6 06 10 10
Mode 7 07 4 14
Low- and
Mode 8 08 6 8
medium-noise mode
superlow-noise
Mode 9 09 12 10
mode
86
Note: The highest daytime temperature is generally in 13:00-15:00.

For the forcible silent mode, the system runs in low-noise mode no matter in the daytime or nighttime.
The forcible silent mode falls in three categories:
Silent Mode Code Noise Degree
Mode 10 10 Low-noise mode
Low- and
Mode 11 11 medium-noise
mode
superlow-noise
Mode 12 12
mode
Note: The system capacity may fall off after the silent mode is set. Therefore, try to balance the noise
with the capacity in selecting a silent mode category.
The factory setting is ―00‖.
(4) A8 Aftersales vacuuming mode
This function ensures the vacuum degree of the entire system during maintenance to prevent operation
functions of dead zones. Expansion valves and electromagnetic valves of the unit will be enabled after
this function is set.
(5) n0 Conservation control 1
System conservation is set when conservation operations are required. T he default factory setting is
capacity priority control mode. The system capacity may fall off after the conservation mode is set.
Code Function Name
Conservation control – invalid (factory
01
settings)
02 Conservation control - valid
(6) n3 Forcible defrosting operation
This function is set when forcible defrosting is required for the unit during maintenance. After this
function is enabled, the system automatically quits based on quitting conditions and then automatically
runs based on system conditions.
(7) n4 Conservation control 2
The highest capacity output limitation is set when users require forcibly limiting the system power
consumption. The setting scope is as follows:
Code Highest Output Capacity
10 100% (factory settings)
09 90%
08 80%
Note: The cooling or heating effect may fall off after the capacity limitation is set.
(8) n5 Indoor unit project number offset
This function sets the IDU project number when multiple refrigerating systems are controlled in a
centralized manner (by using a remote monitor or centralized controller), avoiding the same project
number between different systems. If the project number is not set, project number conflicts may occur
between systems.
This function only needs to be set on the master system, which is the system with the centralized control
address SA2 DIP switch being ―00000‖. For details, see the "Centralized Control Address DIP Switch
(SA2_Addr-CC)" section.
(9) n6 Fault query
This function queries historical faults of the system. Up to five historical faults can be memorized in time
order.
(10) n7 Parameter query
This function queries operation parameters of each module of the ODU in real time.
(11) n8 Indoor unit address query
This function queries addresses of all IDUs through one operation of the ODU.
(12) n9 Online IDU quantity query
This function queries the number of online IDUs through the ODU.
3. Function Setting Operations
Step 1: Open the commissioning window of the master unit panel.
Step 2: Power on the entire unit.
Step 3: Press "SW3" on the master unit to enter the to-be-selected status of function settings. By default,
the master unit is displayed as follows:
87
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code Display Mode Current Progress Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
A7 Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
Users can select corresponding functions by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)" on the master unit,
including:
LED1 LED2 LED3
n0 Blinking 01 Blinking 00 Blinking
After selecting the functions to be set, press "SW7" to confirm entering function settings. The master unit
is displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
A7 On 00 Blinking OC Blinking
A6 On nC Blinking nC Blinking
A2 On 01 Blinking 00 Blinking
n0 On 01 Blinking OC Blinking
n3 On 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
Then go to step 4 to set corresponding functions.
Step 4: Set function parameters.
Setting methods of function parameters are as follows:
 A7 Outdoor silent mode settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the A7 outdoor silent mode settings. The master unit is displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Display Silent Mode Display Current Display
Code Mode Code Mode Status Mode
Step 2: Select a corresponding silent mode by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)".
LED1 LED2 LED3
Silent
Function Display Mode Display Current Display
88
Step 3: Press "SW7" to confirm selecting the mode. The master unit is displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Silent
Function Display Mode Display Current Display
A7 On 00 On OC On
A7 On 01 On OC On
A7 On 02 On OC On
A7 On 03 On OC On
A7 On 04 On OC On
A7 On 05 On OC On
A7 On 06 On OC On
A7 On 07 On OC On
A7 On 08 On OC On
A7 On 09 On OC On
A7 On 10 On OC On
A7 On 11 On OC On
A7 On 12 On OC On
On the master unit, press "SW6" to return to the upper level (press "SW6" in setting status to return to
the upper level; press "SW6" after settings are completed to restore the normal operating status of the
unit).
If no button operations are performed on the master unit for five minutes, the function setting
automatically quits and the unit restores the current status.
The default factory setting is ―00‖, that is, no silent mode.
 A6 Unit cooling/heating function settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the A6 unit cooling/heating function settings. The master unit is displayed as
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
ODU ODU
Function Function
Function Display Mode Display Mode Display
Code Mode Code Mode Code Mode
Step 2: Select a corresponding cooling/heating function by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)".
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Display ODU Function Mode Display ODU Function Mode Display
A6 On nH Blinking nH Blinking
A6 On nA Blinking nA Blinking
A6 On nF Blinking nF Blinking
89
LED1 LED2 LED3

A6 On nC On nC On
A6 On nH On nH On
A6 On nA On nA On
A6 On nF On nF On
On the master unit, press "SW6" to return to the upper level (press "SW6" in setting status to return to
the upper level; press "SW6" after settings are completed to restore the normal operating status of the
unit).
The default factory setting is ―nA‖ cooling/heating.
 A2 Refrigerant recovery operation settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the A2 refrigerant recovery operation settings. The master unit is displayed as
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Refrigerant
Function Display Recovery Display Current Display
A2 On 01 Blinking 00 Blinking
Step 2: The default setting is ―01‖. Select "01" or "02" by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)". Press
"SW7" to confirm selecting the mode.
On the master unit, press "SW6" to return to the upper level.
 Indoor unit refrigerant recovery
Step 3: Select "01‖ as in step 2 to enter IDU refrigerant recovery. Digital LEDs and status LEDs of all
basic modules are displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Display Refrigerant Display Display
Code Mode Recovery Code Mode Current Status Mode
A2 On 01 On [Module low-pressure Ps] On
LED3 shows the low-pressure value of a module. If the value is negative, LED3 circularly displays the
negative code "nE‖ and the numeric value every one second. For example, for -30C, LED3 alternately
displays ―nE‖ for one second and then ―30‖ for another second.
Step 4: Close liquid-tube stop valves of all basic modules of the ODU. When the low-pressure value
displayed on LED3 continually blinks, quickly close air-tube stop valves of all basic modules and then
press "SW7" on the master unit to confirm completing refrigerant recovery or power off the entire unit.
If no operations are performed after the low-pressure value displayed on LED3 continually blinks for
three minutes, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped.
On the master unit, press "SW6" to return to the upper level for restoring the standby status of the entire
unit (press "SW6" in setting status to return to the upper level; press "SW6" after settings are completed
to restore the normal operating status of the unit).
Note:
Another startup is not allowed within 10 minutes after refrigerant recovery.
 Basic module refrigerant recovery
Step 3: Set the basic module requiring refrigerant recovery to module emergency operation status and
close the liquid-tube stop valve of the emergency status module. Select "02‖ as in step 2 to enter basic
module refrigerant recovery. The display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Display Current Display Current Display
Code Mode Progress Mode Status Mode
Module
A2 On 02 On high-pressure On
LED3 shows the high-pressure value of the module.
90
Step 4: When the high-pressure value displayed on LED3 continually blinks (displayed as 0C if the high
pressure is less than 0C), quickly close the air-tube stop valve of the emergency module and then press
"SW7" on the master unit to confirm completing refrigerant recovery or power off the entire unit.
If no operations are performed after the high-pressure value displayed on LED3 continually blinks for
three minutes, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped.
On the master unit, press "SW6" to return to the upper level for restoring the standby status of the entire
unit (press "SW6" in setting status to return to the upper level; press "SW6" after settings are completed
to restore the normal operating status of the unit).
Note:
Before the basic module refrigerant recovery operation, users must close the liquid-tube stop
valve of the basic module requiring refrigerant recovery.
Another startup is not allowed within 10 minutes after refrigerant recovery.
 A8 Aftersales vacuuming mode settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the A8 aftersales vacuuming mode settings. The master unit is displayed as
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Enter the to-be-confirmed status of system vacuuming mode settings.
Step 2: Press "SW7" to confirm entering the to-be-confirmed status of system vacuuming mode settings.
All modules are displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
A8 On 00 On OC On
Expansion valves and electromagnetic valves of all outdoor and IDUs are opened, and the entire unit
cannot be enabled.
Press "SW6" on the master unit to quit the vacuuming status. Alternatively, the entire unit quits the
vacuuming status after 24 hours.
 n0 System conservation operation settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the n0 system conservation operation settings. The master unit is displayed as
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code Display Mode Code Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
Step 2: Select a corresponding mode by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)".
LED1 LED2 LED3
LED1 LED2 LED3
n0 On 01 On OC On
n0 On 02 On OC On
If no button operations are performed for five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the
unit restores the current status. (Press "SW6" in setting status to return to the upper level; press "SW6"
91
after settings are completed to restore the normal operating status of the unit.)
 n3 Forcible defrosting operation settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the n3 forcible defrosting operation settings. The master unit is displayed as
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3

Code Mode Progress/Mode Mode Status Mode
Step 2: Press "SW7" to confirm entering forcible defrosting. The master module is displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3

n3 On 00 On 00 On
When the unit reaches defrosting quit conditions, the system automatically quits and restores the normal
operation control.
 n4 Highest capacity output limitation settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the n4 highest capacity output limitation settings. The master unit is displayed
as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Display Highest Output Display Current Display

Code Mode Capacity Mode Status Mode
Step 2: Select a corresponding capacity limitation value by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)".
LED1 LED2 LED3

Step 3: Press "SW7" to confirm selecting the mode. The master module is displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3

n4 On 10 On OC On
n4 On 09 On OC On
n4 On 08 On OC On
automatically quits and the unit restores the current status. (Press "SW6" in setting status to return to the
upper level; press "SW6" after settings are completed to restore the normal operating status of the unit.)
 n5 Indoor unit project number offset settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the n5 IDU project number offset settings. The master unit is displayed as
92
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code Display Mode Current Progress/Mode Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
Step 2: Press "SW7" to send the project number offset command. The master module is displayed as
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
n5 On 00 On OC On
After 10 seconds, the system quits this mode and restores the normal operation mode.
Note: This function only needs to be set on the master system, which is the system with the centralized
control address SA2 DIP switch being "00000". For details, see the "Centralized Control Address DIP
Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)" section.
2. Function Query Operations
Step 1: Open the commissioning window of the master unit panel.
Step 2: Power on the entire unit.
Step 3: Press "SW4" on the master unit to enter the query status.
Step 4: Select a function to be queried by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)" on the master unit. By
default, the A7 outdoor silent mode is displayed for query.
For example, select the A6 unit cooling/heating function. The display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
A6 On nA On nA On
Step 5: If the n8 IDU address query is selected, the display is as follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed
status of IDU project number query.
LED1 LED2 LED3

Press "SW7" and select the IDU project number query on the master unit. The master unit is displayed
as follows. Other modules are displayed in normal status.
LED1 LED2 LED3

n8 On 00 On 00 On
Regardless of the current display status of wired controllers or display panels of all IDUs, the current
display status is all switched to the IDU project number. However, it does not influence the settings and
operation status of outdoor and IDUs.
On the master unit, press "SW6" to return to the upper level. The IDU retains the project number display
status.
On the master unit, press and hold "SW6" to quit the address display status for all IDUs and return to the
upper level.
93
If no quit button operations are performed on the master unit for 30 minutes, the function setting
Step 6: If the n9 IDU address query is selected, the display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Number of IDUs Number of IDUs
Function Display Display Display
(Thousands-place (Tens-place
Code Mode Mode Mode
Hundreds-place) Ones-place)
n9 On 00 On 00 Blinking
The digital LED2 displays the number of IDUs (thousands-place hundreds-place) and the digital LED3
displays the number of IDUs (tens-place ones place). For example, if the number of IDUs is 75, "0075" is
displayed.
Note: The online IDU quantity query function applies to a single refrigerating system only.
Step 7: If the n6 fault query is selected, the display is as follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed status of fault
query.
LED1 LED2 LED3

Press "SW7" on the master unit to confirm fault query.
Select a fault to be queried by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)". LED3 alternately displays the
historical fault code and module address in an interval of one second in the sequence of fault records.
LED2 displays the fault sequence number. If there not historical faults, LED2 and LED3 display ―00‖ by
default. Up to five historical faults can be queried. The faults that can be queried are as follows:
Code Code
High-pressure protection Inverter compressor out-of-step
E1 P9
protection
Low-pressure protection Communication failure between the
E3 C2 master unit and inverter compressor
driver
Lack of refrigerant protection Over-high temperature protection for
U4 P8
inverter compressor driver module
Discharge low-temperature protection Temperature sensor failure of inverter
E2 P7
compressor driver module
Over-low pressure ratio protection Charge circuit failure of inverter
J9 PF
compressor driver
Over-high pressure ratio protection DC bus line over-low voltage
J8 HL protection for inverter outdoor fan
driver
Four-way valve leakage protection DC bus line over-high voltage protection
J7 HH
for inverter outdoor fan driver
High-temperature protection of Inverter outdoor fan driver IPM module
E5 H6
compressor 1 protection
High-temperature protection of Inverter outdoor fan startup failure
E6 HJ
compressor 2
Over-current protection of compressor Inverter outdoor fan phase lack
J2 HE
2 protection
Top high-temperature protection of Inverter outdoor fan driver module
EU H3
compressor 1 reset
Top high-temperature protection of Inverter outdoor fan over-current
Eb H5
compressor 2 protection
DC bus line over-low voltage protection Current detection circuit failure of
PL HC
for inverter compressor driver inverter outdoor fan driver
PH DC bus line over-high voltage H9 Inverter outdoor fan out-of-step
94
protection for inverter compressor protection

driver
Inverter compressor driver IPM Communication failure between the
P6 module protection C3 master unit and inverter outdoor fan
driver
Inverter compressor startup failure Over-high temperature protection for
PJ H8
inverter outdoor fan driver module
Inverter compressor phase lack Temperature sensor failure of inverter
PE H7
protection outdoor fan driver module
Inverter compressor driver module
P3
reset
Inverter compressor over-current
P5
protection
Current detection circuit failure of
PC
inverter compressor driver
The display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Display Fault Display

Current Status Display Mode
Code Mode Sequence Mode
n6 On 01 On Displayed alternately
n6 On 02 On Historical Displayed alternately
n6 On 03 On fault/module Displayed alternately
n6 On 04 On address Displayed alternately
n6 On 05 On Displayed alternately
"01-05" indicates the fault sequence from the earliest to the latest.
If there are less than five historical faults, LED2 and LED3 display ―00‖ indicating there are no more
historical faults after the last fault is displayed.
In fault query status, press and hold "SW7" for five seconds to clear all historical faults of the ODU.
Step 8: If the n7 parameter query is selected, the display is as follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed status
of parameter query.
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Current Current Display

Display Mode Display Mode
Code Progress/Mode Status Mode
On the master unit, press "SW7" to confirm parameter query and enter the module confirmation status
for parameter query. The display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function
Display Mode Module Address Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
Code
Select a module for parameter query by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)" and then press "SW7".
The display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function
Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
Code
Parameter
n7 On XX On Blinking
value
95
LED2 displays the parameter code of the module and LED3 displays the parameter value. Parameters
are displayed in the following sequence. By default, the outdoor environment temperature value is
displayed. Select a corresponding parameter value by pressing "SW1 (UP)" or "SW2 (DOWN)".
Parameter
Parameter Name Unit Remark
Code
01 Outdoor environment temperature °C
02 Operation frequency of compressor 1 Hz
04 Operation frequency of outdoor fan Hz
05 Module high-pressure °C
06 Module low-pressure °C
Discharge temperature of compressor
07 °C
1
Discharge temperature of compressor
08 °C
2
Discharge temperature of compressor This parameter is invalid for the
09 °C
3 GMV5 series.
10 °C
4 GMV5 series.
11 °C
5 GMV5 series.
12 °C
6 GMV5 series.
This parameter is invalid for the
GMV5 series.
14 Current value of compressor 1 A

GMV5 series.
GMV series.
GMV5 series.
GMV5 series.
20 Reserved
21 Module temperature of compressor 1 °C
22 Module temperature of compressor 2 °C
23 Module temperature of outdoor fan 1 °C
24 Module temperature of outdoor fan 2 °C
25 Outdoor unit heating EXV1 PLS
26 Outdoor unit heating EXV2 PLS
27 Subcooler EXV PLS
28 Defrosting temperature °C
Liquid-extracting temperature of
29 °C
subcooler
30 Outlet temperature of accumulator °C
31 Oil return temperature °C
GMV5 series.
96

32 Inlet-tube temperature of condenser °C
GMV5 series.
Note:
If a parameter value is negative, LED3 circularly displays the negative code "nE‖ and the numeric value
every one second. For example, for -30C, LED3 alternately displays ―nE‖ for one second and then ―30‖
for another second.
The discharge temperature and environment temperature are displayed as four-digit values, circularly
displaying the higher two digits and the lower two digits. For example, if "01" and "15" are alternately
displayed, it indicates 115C. If "nE", "00", and "28" are alternately displayed, it indicates -28C.
If a parameter is invalid for the unit, ―00‖ is displayed.
Step 9: If the nb ODU bar code query is selected, the display is as follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed
status of ODU bar code query.
LED1 LED2 LED3
nb Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
Press "SW7" on the master unit to enter the next-level menu selection. The display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code Display Mode Module Address Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
nb On 01 Blinking 00 Blinking
Select a module for query by pressing "SW1 (▲)" or "SW2 (▼)" and then press "SW7". The display is as
follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
nb On Un/Pc Blinking -n Blinking
Note: Un indicates the entire-unit bar code and Pc indicates the controller bar code.
After confirming the module, select a bar code sequence by pressing "SW1 (▲)" or "SW2 (▼)". The
display sequence is as follows:
Entire-unit bar code (bits 1-13) and controller bar code (bits 1-13), that is, entire-unit bar code header →
entire-unit bar code (bits 1-6) → entire-unit bar code (bits 7-12) → entire-unit bar code (bit 13) →
controller bar code header → controller bar code (bits 1-6) → controller bar code (bits 7-12) → controller
bar code (bit 13). The display is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode
Code On Code On Code On

Example:
Entire-unit bar code: N1R0128150066
Controller bar code: N1M0128150067
The display sequence is as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
nb On Un Blinking -n Blinking
97
↓
LED1 LED2 LED3
N1 On R0 On 12 On
↓
LED1 LED2 LED3
81 On 50 On 06 On
↓
LED1 LED2 LED3
6X On/Off XX Off XX Off

↓
LED1 LED2 LED3
nb On Pc Blinking -n Blinking
↓
LED1 LED2 LED3
N1 On M0 On 12 On
↓
LED1 LED2 LED3
81 On 50 On 06 On
↓
LED1 LED2 LED3
7X On/Off XX Off XX Off
If a parameter is invalid for the unit, "00" is displayed.

On the master unit, press "SW6" to return to the upper level if there are two levels of menu. Press "SW4"
to quit the query status.
Step 4: In query status, press "SW4" to quit.

4. Basic Operations for Engineering Commissioning
98
4.1 Basic Operations

Basic Operations Operation Method Remark
Starting Press and hold "SW7" on the
engineering master unit for more than five
commissioning seconds. ——
In this mode, the system does not
Press "SW4" and "SW5" detect the communication status
Selecting simultaneously in any between the IDU and wired controller
no-wired-controller commissioning progress after the any more. Commissioning can be
commissioning unit enters the commissioning performed on the IDU without
mode status. configuring the wired controller.
In engineering commissioning
Quitting status, press and hold "SW7" for
engineering more than five seconds on the
commissioning master unit to quit commissioning. ——
This function is valid after step 9. For
example, if receiving a pausing
engineering commissioning signal
In engineering commissioning during the process of "10. Pre-startup
status, press "SW6" on the master ODU valve status judging phase" in
Pausing unit to retain the previous step 11, the system will restore the
engineering commissioning completion phase of completion phase of "9. Pre-startup
commissioning the current commissioning phase. refrigerant judging phase" in step 10.
In engineering commissioning
Continuing pause status, press "SW6" on the
engineering master unit to continue engineering
commissioning commissioning. ——
4.2 Restoring Factory Settings
Restoring Prompt for
Factory Setting Method Successful Remark
Settings Settings
Press and hold
"SW8" on the All factory settings of the ODU are
Restoring master unit for more All LEDs blink for restored and the unit waits for
setting 1 than 10 seconds. three seconds. re-commissioning.
Press and hold Re-commissioning is not required.
"SW3" and "SW8" The number of outdoor and IDUs is
on the master unit memorized. Addresses of outdoor
Restoring for more than 10 All LEDs blink for and IDUs are all cleared. All the
setting 2 seconds. five seconds. other function settings are cleared.
Re-commissioning is not required.
Press and hold The number of outdoor and IDUs is
"SW5" and "SW8" memorized. Addresses of outdoor
on the master unit and IDUs retain the preceding
Restoring for more than 10 All LEDs blink for settings. All the other function
setting 3 seconds. seven seconds. settings are cleared.
99
Part 3 Commissioning Process

Note:
! It is forbidden to directly connect the compressor with power supply and forcibly power it on
during commissioning and maintenance.
! Engineering commissioning operations must be performed on the GMV5 serial unit. Otherwise,
the unit cannot properly run.
! Before commissioning is completed, the main board of ODU displays "module address 0F A0"
and that of IDU displays “A0”.
! A module must be set to master module and only one can be set during commissioning.
! An IDU must be set to master IDU and only one can be set during commissioning.
! Other functions can use the factory settings if there are not special engineering requirements.
I. Necessity of VRF Engineering

Commissioning
Different form ordinary air conditioning units, the VRF system raises high design requirements and easily
incurs operation-affected factors such as impurities and water during engineering installation. Due to the
requirements on engineering design/installation complexity and high-precise system control,
commissioning is mandatory after engineering installation. Only a qualified unit can be delivered for use.
II. Required Files and Tools for Engineering

Commissioning
1. Required Tools for Engineering Commissioning of GREE VRF
Inner hexagon spanner Digital thermometer
Shifting spanner Noise meter
Cross screwdriver Clamp meter
Straight screwdriver Digital multimeter
Vacuum pump Electricity meter
Electronic balance Timer
System high and low pressure gauges
for corresponding refrigerants Step ladder
Wind-speed transmitter
The GMV5 VRF provides two commissioning methods. One is to perform commissioning by pressing
buttons on the main board of ODU. The other is to perform commissioning on a PC through professional
software. Parameters of the ODU and IDU can be simultaneously displayed with the second method.
(For details about these methods, refer to respective instructions.)
2. Commissioning Files
The following commissioning files are required to record installation and commissioning of units:
pre-commissioning scheme determination meeting minutes, commissioning personnel record tables,
commissioning system appearance check record tables, commissioning data record tables, and
commissioning reports. See attached tables for file formats.
III. Engineering Commissioning Procedures

Step 1: Pre-commissioning Preparations
1.1 Overall Commissioning Plan
Before commissioning, the person-in-charge should learn about the overall engineering progress plan,
overall workload of engineering commissioning, possible influence factors in achieving the
commissioning progress, and required labors and materials.
1.2 Composition of Commissioning Members
Commissioning members comprise aftersales commissioning personnel and installation personnel.
All commissioning participants must take part in professional training courses before unit commissioning.
All participants can be grouped as required and each group should include at least professional
100
commissioning personnel and assistants.

1.3 Preparations of Commissioning Tools and Instruments
a. Make sure that the following tools or instruments are prepared before commissioning.
b. Make sure that the commissioning software is correct before commissioning.
The professional aftersales commissioning software provided by GREE should be used for
commissioning of GREE VRF system.
c. Make sure that all required files and parameter records are prepared.
Step 2: Pre-commissioning Check
Installation environment check covers the heat exchange environment of unit and electromagnetic
radiant components. All requirements should comply with national and local electrical standards. For any
installation incompliance, records should be made for providing an analysis basis during refrigerating
system testing.
2.2 Installation Appearance Check
Installation appearance check covers whether pipeline installation complies with specifications, whether
refrigerant pipes and condensing drainage pipes are thermal insulated, and whether
Refrigerant pipes should be tidily installed, with outdoor and indoor disperse pipes leaning in the
required scope. For any installation incompliance, records should be made for providing an analysis
basis during refrigerating system testing.
Refrigerant pipes and condensing drainage pipes should not be exposed. If any pipe is exposed, an
immediate amendment is required to avoid serious loss.
2.3 Refrigerating System Check
1) Before commissioning, make sure that the stop valve of each module reaches the maximum opening
degree. Check whether there is any refrigerator oil leakage around the valve. If there is, immediately
check for leakage with soap bubbles or leak detectors. If confirming that leakage exists, immediately
stop commissioning and solve the problem before continuing commissioning.
2) Check system refrigerants before startup.

Before the system is started, connect the liquid-tube valve of ODU with a high pressure gauge and the
air-tube valve of ODU with a low pressure gauge, and then read their values. In this case, high pressure
and low pressure of the system should be in balance status, and the difference between the saturation
temperature corresponding to the balanced pressure value and the environment temperature (the higher
in outdoor and indoor temperatures is taken as environment temperature) should not be larger than 5°C.
If the difference is larger than 5°C, it is required to check the ODU for leakage.
Note: Guarantee that the system has never been started before this test. Otherwise, the high pressure
value will be over-higher than the environment temperature or the low pressure value will be over-lower
than the environment temperature.
Example:
The outdoor environment temperature is 30°C and the indoor environment temperature is 28°C. The
pressure gauges connected with the system show that the high pressure value is 28°C and the low
pressure value is 27°C. The difference between the o utdoor environment temperature and either
pressure value is less than 5°C. It indicates that the system standby pressure is normal.
101
2.4 Electrical System Check

1) Check for high electromagnetic interference, dusts, and acidic or alkaline gas in the unit
environment.
a. The air conditioning unit can neither share the same power supply system with the equipment
containing variable-frequency drives, nor reside near the equipment generating high electromagnetic
interference. Otherwise, the air conditioning unit may fail to properly work due to interference. If this case
exists, records should be made. In the case of serious influence, the air conditioning unit must be
relocated or relevant measures must be taken.
b. Prevent acidic or alkaline gas/liquid from rusting cables of the air conditioning unit.
2) Check the installation appearance of power cables.
Check whether power cables of indoor and ODUs are installed according to vendor requirements and
whether cable connectors are reliably connected. Except the connection part of patch panels, wire
exposure is not allowed on any connection part of power cables.
3) Check the power capacity required for the unit.
The air conditioning unit works at a current much larger than the rated current (the working current
changes in a large scope in different conditions). The power grid provides unstable voltages and the line
power factor decreases. Therefore, the power capacity should not be less than the maximum power of
the unit.
4) Check air switches and fuse links for their models and using methods.
a. Commercial air conditioning units must be installed with independent air switches, fuse links, and
similar protectors. Reasonable models and using methods should be selected for air switches and fuse
links.
Remarks:
a1. Air switches work for overload and short-circuit protection. Air switches provide a less breaking
current than fuse links and air switches react more slowly than fuse links. The advantage of air switches
is that they can be manually reset after a protection action.
a2. Fuse links only work for short-circuit protection. They provide a large breaking current and act slowly.
However, fuses must be replaced after a protection action.
b. Select air switch models according to the power cable diameter and air switch specifications. In
general, the rated current of air switches should be larger than or equal to the load current calculated
based on the line, and less than or equal to the persistent current rating allowed by the conductor.
5) Check components in the electric box.
In the case of unit power-off, visually check whether any component in the electric box drops during
transportation. Then, check whether any component or cable is loose or drops by hand. For a
large-scale unit, power cable terminals of the patch panel and cable terminals connected with
connectors must be tightened with a sleeve spanner or screwdriver, and tightened once more after two
months of normal operation. Auxiliary contacts of AC connectors cannot be removed because they have
been debugged upon factory departure.
6) Check the input power.
a. Power consistency check: Measure the power supply to be connected with the air conditioning unit for
its voltage, frequency, three-phase voltage unbalance factor, and frequency offset. Specifications of the
power supply should be consistent with power specifications displayed on the unit nameplate. The
fluctuation range of voltage should be within ±10%.
102
b. Phase sequence check:

b1. After powering on the unit, measure the grounded voltage value of N-bit on the power patch panel
and the voltage value between every two of L1, L2, and L3 bits. In general, the voltage between N-bit
and L1/L2/L3-bit should approach 220 V and the voltage between every two of L1, L2, and L3 bits should
approach 380 V. If the measurement result does not match the above-mentioned normal value, check
whether the external power cable is inversely connected between the N wire and one of L wires.
b2. Observe the code displayed on the digital LED of the main board AP1. If the fault code ―U3‖ is
displayed, it indicates that the phase sequence of the external power cable connected with the air
conditioning unit is incorrect. Power off the unit and exchange any two phases among L1, L2, and L3 bits
on one end of the external power cable. Power on the unit and observe the code again. The fault code
―U3‖ should disappear.
2.5 Communication System Check
1) The following communication contents must be checked again before commissioning:
2) Communication cables cannot be laid out in the same trough as power cables. Communication cables
should be independently laid out in hard fire-resistant PVC tubes. The parallel spacing between
communication cables and strong electric wires should be larger than 20 cm.
2.6 Installation and Master of Commissioning Software
2.7 Spot Check
Spot Check for GMV5 Commissioning
SN Spot Check Item Qualified
1 Is the engineering design diagram complete?
2 Does the construction comply with the design diagram?
Is the rated capacity of the IDU/ODU of a single refrigerating system within
3 50%-135%?
4 Is the number of connected IDUs in a single refrigerating system within 80?
5 Is the access capacity of a fresh-air unit within 30%?
Does the difference of level between IDUs and ODUs comply with unit design
6 requirements?
Does the difference of level between IDUs comply with unit design
7 requirements?
8 Is an oil loop installed on the riser every 10 m?
9 Are long pipes of IDUs and ODUs less than or equal to 165 m?
103
10 Is the total length of pipes less than 1000 m?

Is the spacing between the ODU and the first disperse pipe larger than 90 m? If
11 yes, is the corresponding pipe diameter increased?
Is the spacing between the IDU and the nearest disperse pipe larger than 10 m?
12 If yes, is the corresponding pipe diameter increased?
13 Does the wall thickness of copper tubes meet design requirements?
14 Are disperse pipes horizontal or vertical?
Does the diameter of cables connected with IDUs and ODUs comply with unit
15 design requirements?
16 Do the circuit breaker and leakage switch comply with unit design requirements?
17 Is the spacing between the power cable and the TV set larger than 1 m?
18 Do communication cable materials comply with unit design requirements?
19 Are all communication cables of IDUs and ODUs serially connected?
Is the last-communicating IDU installed with a communication-matched
20 resistance?
21 What is the load of the selected IDU model?
Is the foundation of ODU firm? Do shock absorption and water drainage comply
22 with requirements?
23 Are basic modules installed on the same horizontal line?
24 Does the drainage pipe of IDU retain a 1/100 ratio of slope?
25 Is the raised height of drainage pipe of IDU less than 85 cm?
26 Is the drainage of IDU smooth?
27 Does a U-shaped trap exist in the drainage pipe of IDU?
Are the air outlet and air return vent of IDU connected with soft connectors? Is a
28 plenum chamber installed for air return?
29 Is the water pipe of IDU installed with an air exhaust vent?
30 Is "MASTER" stuck to the wired controller or panel of the master IDU?
31 Does appending refrigerants to the system comply with requirements?
32 Does the ODU run with static pressure? Has a static pressure value been set?
33 Has the ODU been preheated for more than eight hours before commissioning?
Step 3: Commissioning Operation
3.1 Precautions
1) Before starting commissioning, make sure that the unit compressor has been preheated for more than
eight hours and check whether preheating is normal by touching. Commissioning can be started only
when preheating is normal. Otherwise, the compressor may be damaged. Commissioning must be
performed or guided by professional personnel.
104
Has the compressor

been preheated for
more than eight
hours?
2) When unit commissioning is started, the system automatically selects an operation mode according to
the environment temperature:
Cooling mode when the outdoor environment temperature is higher than 20°C.
Heating mode when the outdoor environment temperature is lower than 20°C.
3) Before starting commissioning, make sure again that stop valves of all basic modules of the ODU
have been completely opened.
4) During commissioning, the front panel of ODU must be completely covered. Otherwise,
commissioning accuracy may be affected (as shown in the following figure).
5) Before commissioning, make sure that appending refrigerants to pipes has finished completely or for
more than 70%.
105
6) The following table describes progress display of each phase during commissioning:
Progress Description for Commissioning Phases
Commissioning
——
Code Progress Code Status Code
LED1 LED2 LED3
Progress Display Display Display
Code Status Code Status Code Status Meaning
The system is in
non-commissioning
db On 01 On A0 On status.
The system does not set
any master unit, and a
master unit should be
01_Master db On 01 On CC On set.
unit setting The system sets more
detection than two master units,
and a master unit should
db On 01 On CF On be set again.
The system successfully
sets a master unit and
automatically enters the
db On 01 On OC On next step.
The system is assigning
db On 02 On Ad Blinking addresses.
There is not any master
IDU, and a master IDU
should be set through the
commissioning software.
02_Unit
If no master IDU is set
address
within one minute, the
assignment
system will automatically
db On 02 On L7 Blinking set one.
The system successfully
assigns addresses and
LED3 displays the
module quantity, which
03_Basic
should be manually
module
db On 03 On 01-04 Blinking confirmed.
quantity
The system confirms the
confirmation
module quantity and
for ODU
LED3 displays the IDU
quantity, which should
04_Indoor db On 04 On 01-80 Blinking be manually confirmed.
unit quantity The system confirms the
confirmation IDU quantity and
The system detects
communication failure
between master unit and
inverter compressor
db On 05 On C2 On driver.
05_Internal
The system detects
communicati
on detection
between master unit and
for basic
db On 05 On C3 On inverter fan driver.
modules
The rated capacity ratio
is over-high between
db On 05 On CH On IDUs and ODUs.
The rated capacity ratio
db On 05 On CL On is over-low between
106
IDUs and ODUs.

The system completes
detection and
The system detects
06_Internal Corresponding component failure of
component db On 06 On fault code On ODU.
detection for The system detects that
basic no ODU component fails
modules and automatically enters
db On 06 On OC On the next step.
The system detects
component failure of
IDU. "XXXX" indicates
the project number of the
faulty IDU. The
corresponding fault code
is displayed after three
07_Compon seconds. For example, if
ent detection a d5 fault occurs on IDU
for IDU 100, LED3 will circularly
XXXX/ display "01", "00" (two
Corresponding seconds later), and "d5"
db On 07 On fault code On (two seconds later).
The system detects that
no IDU component fails
and automatically enters
The system gives a
prompt if the compressor
preheating period is less
08_Compres db On 08 On U0 On than eight hours.
sor The system detects that
preheating the compressor
confirmation preheating period is
more than eight hours
The system detects
insufficient refrigerants
and stops to balance the
09_Pre-start pressure lower than 0.3
up refrigerant db On 09 On U4 On MPa.
detection The system detects that
refrigerants are normal
Outdoor unit valves are
db On 10 On ON On being opened.
10_Pre-start
Outdoor unit valves have
up ODU
not been completely
valve status
db On 10 On U6 On opened.
detection
Outdoor unit valves have
db On 10 On OC On been properly opened.
11_Manually The refrigerant perfusion
calculated status is manually
refrigerant calculated (appended
perfusion refrigerants must be
status db On 11 On AE On accurately calculated).
The system waits for a
12_Unit
unit commissioning
commissioni
db On 12 On AP Blinking startup command.
ng startup
The unit is set to
confirmation
db On 12 On AE On manually-calculated
107
refrigerant perfusion
commissioning operation
status.
13_ —— —— —— —— —— —— No meaning.
14_ —— —— —— —— —— —— No meaning.
The system is in
cooling-mode
(the system
automatically selects the
mode without needing
db On 15 On AC On manual settings).
A fault occurs on the
cooling-mode
Corresponding commissioning
db On 15 On fault code On operation.
A fault occurs on other
modules during the
15_Cooling
cooling-mode
operation by
commissioning
manual
db On 15 On J0 On operation.
perfusion
A fault occurs on ODU
db On 15 On U9 On pipes or valves.
The system detects pipe
failure of IDU. "XXXX"
indicates the project
number of the faulty IDU.
The fault code "U8" is
displayed after three
seconds. For example, if
a U8 fault occurs on IDU
100, LED3 will circularly
display "01", "00" (two
seconds later), and "U8"
db On 15 On XXXX/U8 On (two seconds later).
The system is in
heating-mode
(the system
db On 16 On AH On manual settings).
heating-mode
db On 16 On fault code On operation.
16_Heating
modules during the
operation by
heating-mode
manual
commissioning
perfusion
db On 16 On J0 On operation.
db On 16 On U9 On pipes or valves.
db On 16 On XXXX/U8 On display "01", "00" (two
108

(two seconds later).
The unit has completed

17_Commiss commissioning and in
ioning standby status. LED1
completion displays the module
status address; LED2 and
01-04 On OF On OF On LED3 display "OF".
Note: In commissioning status, press and hold "SW3" and "SW4" simultaneously for more than
five seconds to enter the no-wired-controller commissioning mode. In this mode, the system
does not detect the communication status between the wired controller and IDU.
3.2 Commissioning Operation Mode
The GMV5 VRF provides two commissioning methods. One is to perform commissioning through the
main board of ODU. The other is to perform commissioning on a PC through professional software.
Parameters of the ODU and IDU can be simultaneously displayed and historical data can be stored and
queried with the second method. (For details about these methods, refer to respective instructions.)
3.2.1 Commissioning Through the Main Board of ODU
When unit commissioning is performed through the main board of ODU, the main board provides
the following commissioning operation functions:
Step 1: Completely cover the front panel of ODU and open commissioning windows of all basic
modules.
Step 2: In power-off status of ODU, set the ODU to a corresponding static pressure mode according to
static pressure design requirements for outdoor engineering. For details about the setting method, see
the "Outdoor Fan Static Pressure Setting DIP Switch (SA6_ESP_S)" section. If there are not static
pressure requirements, retain the factory settings.
Step 3: In power-off status of ODU, set one module of ODU to master unit and other modules to
sub-modules. For details about the setting method, see the "Master Unit Setting DIP Switch
(SA8_MASTER-S)" section.
Step 4: If centralized control is required, set the centralized control address in power-off status of ODU.
For details about the setting method, see the "Centralized Control Address DIP Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)"
section. If centralized control is not required, retain the factory settings.
Step 5: Power on all outdoor and IDUs. If LED3 displays ―A0‖ on main boards of all modules of ODU and
the wired controller of each IDU displays ―A0‖, it indicates that the unit is in non-commissioning status.
109
Step 6: Find the module with its address being ―01‖, which is the master unit. On the master unit, press
and hold "SW7" for more than five seconds to enter unit commissioning.
Step 7: Wait for the unit to automatically operate commissioning steps 01 and 02.
Exception 1: If the master unit is incorrectly set in step 01, the following faults are displayed in step 01:
Commissioning
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system does not set any
master unit, and a master unit
db On 01 On CC On should be set.
The system sets more than
01_Master
two master units, and a master
unit
db On 01 On CF On unit should be set again.
settings
The system successfully sets
a master unit and
automatically enters the next
db On 01 On OC On step.
According to the above fault symptoms, set the master unit again by referring to the setting method in
the "Master Unit Setting DIP Switch (SA8_MASTER-S)" section. Then enter unit commissioning again.
Exception 2: If no master IDU is detected in step 02, the following faults are displayed in step 02:
LED1 LED2 LED3
db On 02 On L7 Blinking
In this case, all buttons are invalid. Users can set the master IDU through the commissioning software,
wired controller, or commissioning remote controller within one minute. If no master IDU is set within one
minute, the system will automatically set a master IDU. Then the system automatically enters the next
step.
Step 7: When the unit runs to step 03, users need to manually confirm the number of outdoor modules.
The main board of each module is displayed as follows:
Commissioning Code Progress Code Status Code
LED1 LED2 LED3
Progress Display Display
Code Status Code Status Code Display Status
03_Module quantity Module
confirmation db On 03 On quantity Blinking
If the displayed quantity is consistent with the number of actually connected modules, press "SW7" on
the master unit to confirm. The main board is displayed as follows and the unit automatically enters
commissioning step 04.
LED1 LED2 LED3
Progress Display Display
Code Status Code Status Code Display Status
03_Module quantity
confirmation db On 03 On OC On
110
If the displayed quantity is inconsistent with the number of actually connected modules, check whether
communication cables are correctly connected between modules in power-off status. Then perform
commissioning again.
Note: It is very important to correctly confirm the number of ODUs. If the confirmed quantity is
inconsistent with the actual quantity, the system may improperly run.
Step 8: When the unit runs to step 04, users need to manually confirm the number of indoor modules.
The main board of each module is displayed as follows:
Commissioning
LED1 LED2 LED3
Code Status Code Status Code Status
04_Indoor unit Number of
quantity connected
confirmation db On 04 On IDUs Blinking
If the displayed quantity is consistent with the number of actually connected modules, press "SW7" on
the master unit to confirm. The main board is displayed as follows and the unit automatically enters the
next commissioning step.
Commissioning
LED1 LED2 LED3
Code Status Code Status Code Status
04_Indoor unit
quantity
confirmation db On 04 On OC On
Note: It is very important to correctly confirm the number of IDUs. If the confirmed quantity is
inconsistent with the actual quantity, the system may improperly run.
Step 9: Unit commissioning step 05 is internal communication detection.
If no exception is detected, the main board is displayed as follows and the unit automatically enters the
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system
05_Internal
completes detection
communication
and automatically
detection
db On 05 On OC On enters the next step.
If an exception is detected, the unit retains the current status and waits for manual troubleshooting.
Corresponding faults include:
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system detects
between master unit
and inverter
db On 05 On C2 On compressor driver.
05_Internal The system detects
communication communication failure
detection between master unit
and inverter fan
db On 05 On C3 On driver.
The rated capacity
ratio is over-high
db On 05 On CH On between indoor and
111
ODUs.
The rated capacity
ratio is over-low
between indoor and
db On 05 On CL On ODUs.
For details about the above troubleshooting method, refer to the "Troubleshooting Method" part.
Step 10: Unit commissioning step 06 is component detection for ODU.
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system detects
06_Component that no ODU
detection for component fails and
ODU automatically enters
LED1 LED2 LED3
06_Component The system detects
detection for Corresponding component failure
ODU db On 06 On fault code On of ODU.
Step 11: Unit commissioning step 07 is component detection for IDU.

LED1 LED2 LED3
The system detects
07_Component that no IDU
detection for component fails
IDU and automatically
Commissioning
LED1 LED2 LED3
07_Component The system detects
detection for XXXX/Corresponding component failure
IDU db On 07 On fault code On of IDU.
"XXXX" indicates the project number of the faulty IDU. The corresponding fault code is displayed after
three seconds. For example, if a d5 fault occurs on IDU 100, LED3 will circularly display "01", "00" (two
seconds later), and "d5" (two seconds later).
Step 12: Unit commissioning step 08 is compressor preheating confirmation.
If it is detected that the compressor preheating period is more than eight hours, the main board is
112
displayed as follows and the unit automatically enters the next step.
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system detects
that the compressor
08_Compresso
preheating period is
r preheating
more than eight hours
confirmation
and automatically
If it is detected that the compressor preheating period is less than eight hours, an exception is prompted
and the main board is displayed as follows. In this case, press "SW7" to skip the waiting time and
automatically enter the next commissioning step. However, the compressor may be damaged if it is
forcibly started.
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system gives a
08_Compresso prompt if the
r preheating compressor preheating
confirmation period is less than eight
db On 08 On U0 On hours.
Step 13: Unit commissioning step 09 is pre-startup refrigerant confirmation.
If the refrigerant volume meets the system startup requirements, the main board is displayed as follows
and the unit automatically enters the next commissioning step.
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system detects that
09_Pre-startup
refrigerants are normal
refrigerant
and automatically
detection
db On 09 On 0C On enters the next step.
If no refrigerant exists in the system or the refrigerant volume does not meet the system startup
requirements, "U4 lack of refrigerant protection" is prompted and the main board is displayed as follows.
The unit cannot enter the next commissioning step. In this case, check for leakage or append
refrigerants till the exception disappears.
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system detects
09_Pre-startup insufficient refrigerants
refrigerant and stops to balance
detection the pressure lower than
db On 09 On U4 On 0.3 MPa.
Step 14: Unit commissioning step 10 is pre-startup ODU valve status detection.
If the master unit is displayed as follows, it indicates that the unit is being enabled.
LED1 LED2 LED3
10_Pre-startup
ODU valve Outdoor unit valves are
status db On 10 On ON On being opened.
113
detection
If the master unit is displayed as follows, it is required to check again whether the ODU valves are
completely opened.
LED1 LED2 LED3
10_Pre-startup It is required to check
ODU valve again whether the ODU
status valves are completely
detection db On 10 On U6 On opened.
After confirming that all valves are completely opened, press "SW7" to enter the next commissioning
step.
If it is detected that the unit valve status is normal, the main board is displayed as follows and the unit
automatically enters the next commissioning step.
LED1 LED2 LED3
10_Pre-startup
ODU valve Outdoor unit valves
status have been properly
detection db On 10 On OC On opened.
Step 15: Unit commissioning step 11 is manually calculated refrigerant perfusion status.
Without operations, the system gives a function prompt and automatically enters the next step.
Step 16: Unit commissioning step 12 is unit commissioning startup confirmation.
To avoid enabling the unit before all preparations are completed, it is required to confirm again whether
to enable the unit.
If the master unit is displayed as follows, it indicates that the unit is waiting for enabling confirmation.
LED1 LED2 LED3
12_Unit
commissioning The system waits for a
startup unit commissioning
confirmation db On 12 On AP Blinking startup command.
If it is confirmed to enable the unit, press "SW7". The main board is displayed as follows and the unit
automatically enters the next commissioning step.
LED1 LED2 LED3
12_Unit The unit is set to
commissioning manually-calculated
startup refrigerant perfusion
confirmation db On 12 On AE On commissioning status.
Step 17: After unit startup confirmation, the system automatically selects the cooling or heating mode
according to the environment temperature.
A. If the system selects the cooling mode, the main board is displayed as follows:
114
Commissioning
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system is in
cooling-mode
(the system
Db On 15 On AC On manual settings).
cooling-mode
Db On 15 On fault code On operation.
modules during the
15_Cooling cooling-mode
commissioning commissioning
operation Db On 15 On J0 On operation.
Db On 15 On U9 On pipes.
Db On 15 On XXXX/U8 On (two seconds later).
B. If the system selects the heating mode, the main board is displayed as follows:
Commissioning
LED1 LED2 LED3
The system is in
heating-mode
(the system automatically
selects the commissioning
operation mode without
db On 16 On AH On needing manual settings).
16_Heating
commissioning
Corresponding heating-mode
operation
db On 16 On fault code On commissioning operation.
modules during the
heating-mode
db On 16 On J0 On commissioning operation.
db On 16 On U9 On pipes.
115

seconds. For example, if a
U8 fault occurs on IDU
db On 16 On XXXX/U8 On (two seconds later).
Step 18: If no exception occurs when the unit continuously operates for 40 minutes, the system
automatically confirms commissioning completion, stops the entire unit, and restores the standby status.
The main board is displayed as follows:
Commissioning
LED1 LED2 LED3
The unit has completed
commissioning and in
17_Commissioning standby status. LED1
completion status displays the module
address; LED2 and LED3
01~04 On OF On OF On display "OF".
116
Step 19: After unit commissioning is completed, set unit functions according to the actual engineering
requirements on functions. For details about the setting method, refer to the "System Function Setting
Method" part. Skip this step if there are not special requirements.
Step 20: Deliver the unit for use and let users know the precautions.
3.2.2 Commissioning Through the Commissioning Software
Step 1: Install commissioning software to the computer and connect monitoring communication cables
(for details about the operation method, see the "GREE Central Air Conditioning Commissioning
Software" section).
Step 2: Completely cover the front panel of ODU.
Step 3: In power-off status of ODU, set the ODU to a corresponding static pressure mode according to
static pressure design requirements for outdoor engineering. For details about the setting method, see
the "Outdoor Fan Static Pressure Setting DIP Switch (SA6_ESP_S)" section.
Step 4: In power-off status of ODU, set one module of ODU to master unit. For details about the setting
method, see the "Master Unit Setting DIP Switch (SA8_MASTER-S)" section.
Step 5: Power on all outdoor and IDUs. In this case, all modules of ODU display that the unit is in
non-commissioning status.
Step 6: Switch the commissioning software to the commissioning control interface.

Click "Debug" to switch to the engineering commissioning interface. The unit will automatically operate
the commissioning modules listed in this interface from top to bottom and from left to right. Note: The
commissioning function only applies to the single-system network.
Click "Start" to enter the commissioning function and the software automatically performs commissioning.
" " indicates that commissioning is being performed on the phase and " " indicates that
commissioning is passed on the phase.
117
For the phase with "OK" displayed, a manual confirmation is required for entering the next
commissioning step. Click " " to display relevant information detected on this phase, which provides
references for selection. Click "Close" to close the information (the number of commissioning units is
displayed in "3 Confirm ODU Basic Module NO." and "4 Confirm IDU NO."; the preheating period is
displayed in ―8 Compr. Preheat Confirmation").
118
" " indicates that commissioning is not passed on the phase and troubleshooting is required (after
troubleshooting, the unit automatically enters the next step if no "OK" exists or click "OK" to enter the
next step). Click " " to display relevant information detected on this phase, which provides references
for troubleshooting. Click "Close" to close the information.
During commissioning, click "Stop" to stop commissioning and then click "Start" to continue
commissioning till commissioning ends. "Back" and "Skip" are provided in "10 ODU Valves Check
Before Startup". When an exception occurs in step 10, click "Back" to return to step 9 and then click "OK"
in step 9 to perform commissioning again for step 10. If a U6 fault (valve exception) occurs in step 10,
users can click "Skip" to skip the fault. For other faults, "Skip" is unavailable.
119
Commissioning steps 11, 13, and 14 are reserved. Steps 13, 14, 15, and 16 are parallel steps (one of
the four steps will be selected according to the actual unit).
At last, engineering commissioning is completed when " " is displayed on "Project Debug
Completion".
120
Note: During commissioning, users must listen to the operating sound of outdoor and indoor fans and
compressors to check for exceptions.
3.4 Operations after Commissioning
Sort and save data. Make detailed records of exceptions and troubleshooting methods during
commissioning for later maintenance and query. At last, make a commissioning report and hand it over
to users.
3.5 Precautions to Let Users Know after Commissioning
 Let users know where the master IDU is located and stick a label to the master IDU. Tell users that
modes of other IDUs are limited by the mode of master IDU.
 An ODU that has been in power-off status for more than 24 hours should be preheated for more than
eight hours before startup to prevent damaging compressors.
121
IV. References for Proper Unit Operation

Parameters
Parameter
SN Unit
Commissioning Item Name Reference Value
Outdoor
1 environment °C
temperature ——
●When the system compressor is
running, the normal discharge
pipe or top temperature for
cooling is 70-95°C, which is more
than 10°C higher than the
saturation temperature
2 °C corresponding to the system
high-pressure. The normal
temperature for heating is
65-80°C, which is more than
Discharge pipe 10°C higher than the saturation
temperature of temperature corresponding to the
compressor system high-pressure.
●When the system runs for
cooling, the defrosting
temperature is 5-11°C lower than
the system high-pressure value.
3 °C ●When the system runs for
heating, the defrosting
temperature is 2°C higher or
Defrosting lower than the system
temperature low-pressure value.
Outdoor ●The normal system
System
unit high-pressure value is 20-55°C.
parameter
parameter With the change of environment
temperature and system
operation capacity, the system
high-pressure value is 10-40°C
higher than the environment
temperature. The higher the
environment temperature, the
less the temperature difference.
4 °C
cooling with the environment
temperature being 25-35°C, the
system high-pressure value is
44-53°C.
temperature being -5 to 10°C, the
System system high-pressure value is
high-pressure 40-52°C.
temperature being 25-35°C, the
system low-pressure value is
5 °C
0-8°C.
System cooling with the environment
low-pressure temperature being -5 to 10°C, the
122
system high-pressure value is

-15 to 5°C.
●During the cooling operation,

the heating electronic expansion
Opening valves always remain at 480
degree of PLS.
6 PLS
heating ●During the heating operation,
electronic the adjustable electronic
expansion expansion valves change
valves between 120 and 480 PLS.
●The operation frequency of
inverter compressor 1 changes
Operation between 20 and 95 Hz.
7 Hz
frequency of ●The operation frequency of
inverter inverter compressor 2 changes
compressor between 30 and 100 Hz.
●According to different operation
frequencies and loads, the
current of inverter compressor 1
8 A changes between 7 and 25 A.
Current of The current of inverter
inverter compressor 2 changes between 7
compressor and 20 A.
●When the environment
temperature is lower than 35°C,
IPM module the temperature of the IPM
9 °C
temperature of module is lower than 80°C. The
inverter highest temperature is not higher
compressor than 95°C.
●The normal bus line voltage is
1.414 times larger than the
power voltage. For example, if
the three-phase power voltage is
390 V, the bus line voltage after
10 V
current rectification is 390 V ×
Driver bus line 1.414 = 551 V. It is normal if the
voltage of difference between the actual
inverter test value and the calculation
compressor value is within 15 V.
Operation ●With the adjustment of system
11 frequency of Hz pressure, the fans run between 0
fan and 65 Hz.
Environment
12 temperature of °C
IDU ——
Inlet-tube ●As the environment
temperature of temperature is different, the
13 °C
indoor heat inlet-tube temperature is 1-7°C
exchanger lower than the outlet-tube
Indoor unit
temperature of the same IDU in
parameter
cooling mode.
Outlet-tube ●The inlet-tube temperature is
14 °C
temperature of 10-20°C lower than the
indoor heat outlet-tube temperature of the
exchanger same IDU in heating mode.
Opening The opening degree
15 PLS
degree of automatically changes between 0
123
indoor and 2000 PLS or between 0 and

electronic 480 PLS.
expansion
valves
●The commissioning software
shows that the number of
16 Communica — IDUs/ODUs is consistent with the
tion actual engineering quantity,
parameter Communication data without communication failure.
●The drainage effect of IDU is
smooth and thorough, and no
adverse-slope water storage
exists in condensing drainage
17 —
pipes. The ODU can implement
drainage completely from the
Drainage drainage pipe, without drops
system —— from the unit foundation.
●No exceptional sound occurs on
compressors and indoor/outdoor
18
fans. No fault occurs on the unit
Other —— operation.
124
1.
r
symbol
symbol
symbol
symbol
Indoor
Outdoo
Content
Content
Distinctive
Distinctive
E
d
L
0
Outdoor unit fault (unified) Indoor unit fault
0
(unified)
1
High-pressure protection Indoor unit PCB
1
Indoor fan protection
Low exhaust temperature fault
2
Auxiliary heating
2
protection
protection
3
Low-pressure protection Temperature Water overflow
High exhaust temperature sensor fault
Intake protection 3
4
System Failure Code Table
Power supply
4
protection temperature
High exhaust temperature Middle over-current protection
5
sensor fault
5
protection for compressor 1 temperature Anti-freezing protection

High exhaust temperature Exhaust
6
sensor fault
6
protection for compressor 2 temperature Mode conflict

High exhaust temperature
7
sensor
Humidityfault
sensor
7
protection for compressor 3 No master IDU

High exhaust temperature fault
Water
8
protection for compressor 4
8
High exhaust temperature temperature Power supply shortage
125
protection for compressor 5 sensor fault Inconsistent number of
9
High exhaust temperature Jumper cap fault

multi-split IDUs
A
Indoor unit
protection for compressor 6 Inconsistent series of
A
network address
multi-split IDUs
H
Part 1 Failure Code Table
Exhaust temperature sensor exception

Wired controller Warning about poor air
H
C
falling protection for PCB exception quality
GREE VRF Display Code (2)

Exhaust temperature sensor Volume dial switch Mismatching indoor

C
compressor 1
L
falling protection for setting exception
Air outlet and ODU models
Exhaust temperature sensor
L
compressor 2 temperature
E
falling protection for
Exhaust temperature sensor fault
sensor CO2
Indoor
E
compressor 3
F
falling protection for sensor fault

Chapter 4 Maintenance
compressor 4
J
compressor 5
P
compressor
High 6
cover temperature
U
protection for compressor 1
High cover temperature Project
F J P U b
b
protection for compressor 2 commissioning
d n y
d n y
oor
Outd
symbol
symbol
Content
Content
e symbol
e symbol
Distinctiv
Distinctiv
b
F
0
0
Other module protection Outdoor unit main
Outdoor ambient board fault
Over-current protection
1
1
temperature sensor High pressure sensor
Defrosting for compressor 1 fault
fault Over-current protection
2
2
temperature sensor 1
Defrosting for compressor 2
fault Over-current protection
3
Low pressure sensor
3
temperature sensor 2
Subcooler outflow for compressor 3 fault
fault
4
4
temperature sensor
Subcooler exhaust for compressor 4 Compressor 1 exhaust
fault
5
5
temperature sensor temperature sensor
Air for compressor 5 Compressor 2 exhaust
fault
6
faultintake Over-current protection
temperature sensor 1 6 temperature sensor
Air for compressor 6 Compressor 3 exhaust
fault
7
faultintake Four-way valve leakage
7
temperature sensor 2 temperature sensor
protection Compressor 4 exhaust
fault
8
fault
Outdoor humidity High system pressure temperature sensor
8
sensor fault
Heat exchanger ratio protection Compressor 5 exhaust
fault
126
Low system pressure temperature sensor
9
exhaust temperature Compressor 6 exhaust

Oil return ratio protection fault
A
sensor fault Exceptional pressure temperature sensor
A
temperature sensor
protection fault
Compressor 1 current
H
fault
System clock
H
Cover temperature sensor fault

exception Compressor 2 current
C
sensor falling Water flow switch

sensor fault
C
Cover temperature
protection for protection Compressor 3 current
L
sensor Low high pressure sensor fault
L
compressorfalling1
protection for protection
E
compressor 2 sensor fault
F
sensor fault
J
sensor fault
P
Compressor 1 cover
temperature sensor
Compressor 2 cover
fault
temperature sensor
fault
E F J P U b d n y
U b d n y
oor
Outd
symbol
symbol
Content
sioning
Commis
P
Distinctive
U
Fan driver board fault (displayed on the Compressor driver board fault (displayed
Deficient preheating of the IDU) on the IDU)
0
compressor Fan driver board failure (displayed on the Compressor driver board failure
IDU) (displayed on the IDU)
1
Fan driver board power voltage protection Compressor driver board power voltage
Wrong ODU capacity
2
(displayed on the IDU) protection (displayed on the IDU)
code/jumper cap setting
Power phase sequence Fan drive module reset protection Compressor drive module reset protection
3
protection
Refrigerant shortage Fan drive PFC protection Compressor drive PFC protection
4
protection Variable frequency fan over-current Inverter compressor over-current
Wrong compressor drive
5
protection protection
board address
Fan drive IPM module protection Compressor drive IPM module protection
6
Valve exception warning
Compressor drive temperature sensor
Fan drive temperature sensor fault
7
fault
Fan drive IPM over-temperature Compressor drive IPM over-temperature
8
Indoor unit pipeline fault
Variable frequency fan out-of-step
127
Outdoor unit pipeline fault Inverter compressor out-of-step protection
protection
Variable frequency fan drive storage chip Inverter compressor drive storage chip
A
fault fault
Compressor drive DC bus high voltage
H
Fan drive DC bus high voltage protection
protection
Compressor drive current detection circuit
C
Master IDU is set Fan drive current detection circuit fault

Wrong compressor fault
Compressor drive DC bus low voltage
L
emergency operation dial Fan drive DC bus low voltage protection
protection
Variable frequency fan out-of-phase Inverter compressor out-of-phase
E
Invalid refrigerant injection
F
Fan drive recharging circuit fault Compressor drive recharging circuit fault
J
Variable frequency fan starting failure Inverter compressor starting failure
P
Variable frequency fan AC current
Inverter compressor AC current protection
protection
U
b
d n y
s
Statu
method.
symbol
Content
e symbol
Distinctiv
n
A
Economic mode The unit is not
0
setting commissioned. Communication failure between indoor and
1
ODUs and IDU's communicator
Upper indoor/outdoor After-sales refrigerant
2
capacity ratio recycling Communication failure between control board
and inverter compressor drive
3
Defrosting Communication failure between control board
Maximum output and variable frequency fan drive
4
Oil recycling
capacity No IDU
5
Indoor unit project number conflict warning
6
Unite fault enquiry Cooling and heating setting
Unit parameter Outdoor unit number inconsistency warning
7
Silent mode setting
enquiry
Indoor unit project
8
Vacuum mode Compressor emergency
number enquiry
128
Cooling and heating Fan emergency
A
model Module emergency
H
Heating model Heating
High rating capacity ratio
C
Cooling model Cooling
No controlling unit
L
E Low rating capacity ratio
Negative code Refrigerant injecting
F
Ventilation model Ventilation

Multiple controlling units
Filter cleaning reminder

System address dial conflict
Unit starting commissioning
P
confirmation
shown in the intersection of the line and column: High exhaust temperature protection.
Multiple master wired controllers
U
Remote emergency shutdown Communication failure between the IDU and

receiving light board
b
Emergency shutdown
IP address allocation overflow
d
Restricted operation
software. See n6 Fault Enquiry of the ODU or enquiry function of the commissioning software for the
For example, when E4 is displayed on the ODU, find line E and column 4 in the above tables. The fault is
Note: Previous faults in the system can be queried on the main board of the ODU and commissioning
n y
Part 2 Exception and Troubleshooting

Exception Analyzing and Troubleshooting
(1) Form analyzing
1. Control
Fault
Fault Possible reasons Solution
code
1. The clock chip on the main board

Faults in the ODU's
is damaged.
main board (such as 1. Replace the small CPU board.
2. The memory chip on the main
F0 memory and 2. Replace the control board.
board is damaged.
address chip 3. Replace the control board.
3. The address chip on the main
exceptions)
board is damaged.
1. The constant-frequency
1. If the compressor is not started, check if the AC
Faults in the compressor is not started.
contact is closed. If not, replace the AC contact.
constant frequency 2. The current detection board is
FC If the connection is loose, reconnect it;
compressor's faulty.
2. Replace the current detection board.
current sensor 3. The main board's detection
3. Replace the main board.
circuit is faulty.
Wrong outdoor
1. The capacity code is wrong. 1. Modify the capacity code setting.
U2 capacity code
2. The dial component is faulty. 2. Replace the main board.
setting
1. The three-phase power cable is
Power phase not connected correctly. 1. Check connection of the power cable.
U3
sequence protection 2. The main board's detection 2. Replace the control board.
circuit is faulty.
Wrong emergency 1. The dial setting is wrong. 1. Modify the dial setting.
UL
operation dial code 2. The dial component is faulty. 2. Replace the main board.
If C0 is not displayed on the control board of the

ODU, check the network between the IDU and
communicator. If C0 is displayed, check the network
between the IDUs and ODUs and between the IDU
1. The communication cable is not and communicator as follows:
connected. 1) Check if the cables connecting the control board of
Communication
2. The communicator is the ODU and the IDU and connecting the IDU and
failure between
disconnected. communicator are loose. If yes, reconnect them;
C0 indoor and ODUs
3. The communication cable is 2) Check if the cables connecting the control board
and IDU's
poorly connected. and IDU and connecting the IDU and
communicator
4. The communicator controller is communicator are broken. If yes, replace the
faulty. cables;
3) Check the contact of the communication cables;
4) Replace the control board. If the fault is solved, the
control board is faulty. Replace the IDU. If the fault
is solved, the IDU is faulty.
1) Check if the cable connecting the control board

and the compressor's drive board is loose. If yes,
reconnect it;
1. The communication cable is not 2) Check if the cable connecting the control board
Communication connected. and compressor's drive board is broken. If yes,
failure between 2. The communicator is replace the cable;
C2 main control board disconnected. 3) Check the contact of the communication cable
and inverter 3. The communication cable is connecting the control board and compressor's
compressor drive poorly connected. drive board;
4. The communicator is faulty. 4) Replace the control board. If the fault is solved, the
control board is faulty. Replace the compressor's
drive board. If the fault is solved, the compressor's
drive board is faulty.
129
1) Check if the cable connecting the fan's drive board

and the compressor's drive board is loose. If yes,
reconnect it;
1. The communication cable is not 2) Check if the cable connecting the fan's drive board
Communication connected. and compressor's drive board is broken. If yes,
failure between 2. The communicator is replace the cable;
C3 main control board disconnected. 3) Check the contact of the communication cable
and variable 3. The communication cable is connecting the fan's drive board and compressor's
frequency fan drive poorly connected. drive board;
4. The communicator is faulty. 4) Replace the control board. If the fault is solved, the
control board is faulty. Replace the fan's drive
board. If the fault is solved, the fan's drive board is
faulty.
Indoor unit project
1. Project numbers conflict with 1. Change conflicting project numbers and ensure
C5 number conflict
each other. that no IDU's project number is repeated.
warning
1. Communication cables between
ODUs are loose.
1. If the communication cable is loose, reconnect it;
Outdoor unit number 2. Communication cables between
2. If the communication cable is broken, replace it;
C6 inconsistency ODUs are broken.
3. Check contact of the communication cable;
warning 3. Communication cables between
4. Replace the control board.
ODUs are poorly connected.
4. The control board is faulty.
1. The SA8 dial switch of the ODU
1. Switch the SA8 dial switch of an ODU to 00;
is not switched to 00.
CC No controlling unit 2. Replace the control board or switch an ODU's SA8
2. The SA8 dial switch of the ODU
dial switch to 00.
is faulty.
1. SA8 dial switches of multiple
1. Leave one SA8 dial switch unchanged, while
Multiple controlling ODUs are switched to 00.
CF switch all the other dial switches to 11;
units 2. Dial switches of multiple ODUs
2. Replace the control board.
are faulty.
1. Check if the master IDU is powered on. If yes,
1. The master IDU is powered off. replace the main board;
2. The communication of the master 2. Check the contact of the communication cable of
IDU fails. the master IDU. If no communication failure (C0) is
L7 No master IDU
3. The main board of the master reported, replace the main board.
IDU is faulty. 3. Replace the IDU's main board and reset the
4. No master IDU is set in the master IDU.
system. 4. Set the master IDU.
Project number 1. Multiple IDUs share one project 1. Reset the repeated project number (useful when
C5
conflict number. there is no centralized control of multiple systems).
Note: Solution of C5 fault when multiple cooling systems are controlled in a centralized way
When multiple cooling systems are controlled in a centralized way, the C5 fault, i.e. project
number conflict, may occur on different cooling systems. In such case, set project numbers of
each system and solve the fault as follows:
1) Project number conflict:
When multiple systems are controlled in a centralized way, if two or more IDUs share the same
project number, the engineer number conflict occurs. In that case, IDUs cannot be switched to
varied modes or be turned on or off. The whole device cannot be started before the conflict is
solved. The commissioning software will show the following page:
130
Figure 1
2) Solution of project number conflict:

1. Manual setting on the commissioning software:
Use the commissioning software to set IDUs' project numbers separately in every system or
reset projects numbers in multiple systems.
Choose Setting -> Parameter Settings, as shown in Figure 2:
Figure 2
If project commissioning is finished and the IDU where the conflict occurs needs to be set
separately. Click Project Number Conflict, as shown in Figure 3. The pop-up box comprises two
parts: conflicting IDU box, showing the IDU's project number, system number and time; setting
131
box, showing the IDU project number setting and setting button.
Figure 3
Choose one IDU in the conflicting IDU box shown in Figure 3 and click Set in the setting box.
Choose a value in the pop-up box shown in Figure 4 and click Set.
Figure 4
If the conflict is solved, the system will return to the normal status and IDUs can be operated, as
shown in Figure 5:
132
Figure 5
If project commissioning is not finished and all the IDUs' project numbers need to be reset, click
Set All IDUs Project Number shown in Figure 2. As shown in Figure 6, the pop-up box comprises
two parts: Systems Selection, where you can choose the system to be reset; Settings box, where
you can give the resetting instruction.
Figure 6
Choose one or multiple systems in the Systems Selection box and click Set in the Settings box,
as shown in Figure 6. Click Set, as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7
If the conflict is solved, the system will return to the normal status and IDUs can be operated as
shown in Figure 5.
②Manual setting on the communicator and remote controller:
133
When the project number conflict occurs, you can use the communicator or remote controller to
revise project numbers and solve the conflict. See the manual of the communicator or remote
controller for the method.
③Setting of auto project number deviation on ODU's main board (recommended)
You can set auto IDU project number deviation via the ODU's main board as follows:
(1) After the whole system is commissioned, short press SW3 on the controlling unit and the
system will enter the standby status as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code LED Status Progress LED Status Status LED Status
A7 Flicker 00 Flicker 00 Flicker
n0 Flicker 01 Flicker 00 Flicker
(2) Press SW2 (▼) on the controlling unit and select n5. Short press SW7 to show the
following information:
LED1 LED2 LED3

Function Code LED Status Progress LED Status Status LED Status
n5 Solid On 00 Flicker OC Flicker
(3)
When project number deviation is to be confirmed, short press SW7 confirmation button
to enter the project number deviation status as shown in the following:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function LED Current LED
Status LED Status
Code Status Progress/Mode Status
n5 Solid On 00 Solid On OC Solid On
IDU project numbers in all systems will automatically deviate. The conflict will be solved in about
1 minute and the system will work properly.
The automatic deviation function only works when it is enabled on the controlling unit in the
system, of which the centralized control address is 00000.
Note: When there are only a few conflicting IDUs, manual setting is recommended. This method
only applies to conflicting IDUs and does only affect other IDUs' project numbers.
In case of many conflicting IDUs, auto deviation is recommended. This method is faster, but may
change project numbers of normal IDUs. This method applies for the first commissioning after
installation.
Fault
Fault Possible reasons Solution
code
134
1. Check the power supply of the control

1. The control board is powered off;
board. Replace the control board if it
2. The compressor drive board is
works properly;
Communication powered off;
2. Check the power supply of the drive
failure between 3. The communication cable
board. Replace the drive board if it
C2 main control board between the control board and
works properly;
and inverter compressor drive board is not
3. Connect the main board and drive
compressor drive connected;
board using the communication cable;
4. The compressor drive board's
4. Adjust the dial switch of the
dial switch SA201 is wrong.
compressor drive board.
Compressor drive
P3 module reset 1. Replace the compressor drive board.
faulty.
protection
1. The drive board's IPM module is
1. Replace the compressor drive board;
Inverter compressor damaged;
2. Reconnect the compressor's UVW
P5 over-current 2. The compressor's UVW cable is
cable;
protection not connected properly;
3. Replace the compressor.
3. The compressor is damaged.
1. The drive board's IPM module is
1. Replace the compressor drive board;
Compressor drive damaged;
2. Reconnect the compressor's UVW
P6 IPM module 2. The compressor's UVW cable is
cable;
protection not connected properly;
3. Replace the compressor.
3. The compressor is damaged.
Compressor drive
P7 temperature sensor 1. Replace the compressor drive board.
faulty.
fault
Compressor drive faulty; 1. Replace the compressor drive board;
IPM 2. Thermal gel is not applied evenly 2. Apply thermal gel evenly on the IPM
P8
over-temperature on the IPM module; module;
protection 3. The IPM module is not screwed 3. Screw the IPM module properly.
properly.
Inverter compressor 1. The compressor drive board is 1. Replace the compressor drive
P9 out-of-step faulty. board.
protection 2. The compressor is damaged. 2. Replace the compressor.
1. Does the voltage of the input
Compressor drive power cable of the whole system 1. Lower the voltage of the input power
PH DC bus high voltage exceed 460 V; cable to the required range;
protection 2. The compressor drive board is 2. Replace the compressor drive board.
faulty.
1. Is the voltage of the input power
Compressor drive cable of the whole system lower 1. Elevate the voltage of the input power
PL DC bus low voltage than 320 V; cable to the required range;
protection 2. The compressor drive board is 2. Replace the compressor drive board.
faulty.
Compressor drive
PC current check circuit 1. Replace the compressor drive board.
faulty.
fault
Compressor drive cable of the whole system lower 1. Elevate the voltage of the input power
PF recharging circuit than 280 V; cable to the required range;
fault 2. The compressor drive board is 2. Replace the compressor drive board.
faulty.
1. The drive board is damaged; 1. Replace the compressor drive board;
Inverter compressor 2. The compressor's UVW cable is 2. Reconnect the compressor's UVW
PJ
starting failure not connected properly; cable;
3. The compressor is damaged. 3. Replace the compressor.
Communication 1. The control board is powered off; 1. Check the power supply of the control
C3
failure between 2. The fan drive board is powered board. Replace the control board if it
135
main control board off; works properly;

and variable 3. The communication cable 2. Check the power supply of the drive
frequency fan drive between the control board and fan board. Replace the drive board if it
drive board is not connected; works properly;
4. The fan drive board's dial switch 3. Connect the main board and drive
is wrong. board using the communication cable;
4. Adjust the dial switch of the fan drive
board.
Fan drive module
H3 1. The fan drive board is faulty. 1. Replace the fan drive board.
reset protection
1. The fan drive board's IPM
Variable frequency module is damaged; 1. Replace the fan drive board;
H5 fan over-current 2. The fan's UVW cable is not 2. Reconnect the fan's UVW cable;
protection connected properly; 3. Replace the fan.
3. The fan is damaged.
1. The fan drive board's IPM
module is damaged; 1. Replace the fan drive board;
Fan drive IPM
H6 2. The fan's UVW cable is not 2. Reconnect the fan's UVW cable;
module protection
connected properly; 3. Replace the fan.
Fan drive
H7 temperature sensor 1. The fan drive board is faulty. 1. Replace the fan drive board.
fault
1. The fan drive board is faulty;
1. Replace the fan drive board;
Fan drive IPM 2. Thermal gel is not applied evenly
2. Apply thermal gel evenly on the IPM
H8 over-temperature on the IPM module;
module;
protection 3. The IPM module is not screwed
3. Screw the IPM module properly.
properly.
Variable frequency
1. The fan drive board is faulty. 1. Replace the fan drive board.
H9 fan out-of-step
2. The fan is damaged. 2. Replace the fan.
protection
1. Does the voltage of the input
Fan drive DC bus 1. Lower the voltage of the input power
power cable of the whole system
HH high voltage cable to the required range;
exceed 460 V;
protection 2. Replace the fan drive board.
2. The fan drive board is faulty.
1. Elevate the voltage of the input power
cable of the whole system lower
cable to the required range;
Fan drive DC bus than 320 V;
2. Connect the fan drive board with the
HL low voltage 2. Is the fan drive board well
compressor drive board according to the
protection connected with the compressor
wiring diagram;
drive board;
3. Replace the fan drive board.
3. The fan drive board is faulty.
Fan drive current
HC 1. The fan drive board is faulty. 1. Replace the fan drive board.
detection circuit fault
1. The drive board is damaged;
1. Replace the fan drive board;
Variable frequency 2. The fan's UVW cable is not
HJ 2. Reconnect the fan's UVW cable;
fan starting failure connected properly;
3. Replace the fan.
2. System faults
2.1 System exhaust temperature exception
136
Possible reasons
Fault Primary reason Secondary reason Tertiary reason
Fault Solution
code Descriptio Confirmatio Descriptio Confirmati Descripti Confirmati
n n method n on method on on method
1. The
stop valve
of the Fully open
Manual
ODU is —— —— —— —— the stop
check
not fully valve.
opened as
required.
2.1.1 The
When the
control
IDU is Connect
wire of
working in the
the
the cooling electronic
Reset the electronic
mode and expansion
IDU. expansio Manual
the valve's
2.1 The Listen to n valve is check
electronic control
controlling the sound not
expansion wire to the
of and touch connecte
valve is main
electronic the tube to d to the
opened to board.
expansion see if the main
2000PLS,
valve by electronic board.
the exhaust
main expansion 2.1.2 The
temperature
board of valve is control
of the IDU's
indoor unit reset. wire that Repair or
coil is more
is If it is set, it connects replace the
than 15°C
2. The abnormal. is normal. the control
High higher than Manual
IDU's Otherwise, electronic wire of the
exhaust the intake check
electronic it is faulty. expansio electronic
temperat temperature
E4 expansion n valve to expansion
ure ; when the
valve is the main valve.
protectio IDU is
not board is
n working in
working broken.
the heating
properly. Clean the
mode and
system
the
and clear
electronic 2.2.1
the
expansion Affected
impurities.
valve is by
2.2 The —— Replace
opened to impurities
electronic the body of
2000PLS, in the
expansion the
the intake Other system
valve in electronic
temperature reasons
the mode expansion
of the IDU's
switcher is valve.
coil is more
faulty. Replace
than 10°C
higher than 2.2.2 The the body of
valve the
the intake ——
temperature body is electronic
; faulty. expansion
valve.
The Touch the
3. The system's 3.1 The pipe along
Replace
system exhaust fluid pipe the flowing
—— —— and solder
pipeline is temperature is direction of
the pipe.
blocked. rises and blocked. refrigerant
the low to feel the
137
pressure is temperatur
too low e
(compared difference.
with the 3.2 The The Replace
reference air pipe is difference —— —— and solder
value). blocked. is large or the pipe.
part of the
pipe is
frosting.
Touch the
pipe along 3.3.1 The
Replace
the flowing block is
and solder
direction of caused
the pipe.
refrigerant by solder.
3.3 The to feel the
Cut off the
pipe that temperatur
3.3.2 The pipe to see
connects e
pipeline if it is
the IDU is difference.
is blocked. Replace
blocked. The
difference blocked and solder
is large or by the pipe.
part impurities
of the pipe .
is frosting.
The Inject
system's 4.1 Not
refrigerant
exhaust enough —— —— ——
as
temperature refrigerant
required.
rises and
4. Lacking the low Use the
Stop the
refrigerant pressure is refrigerant
4.2 leak. Pump
too low leak
Refrigera out air and
(compared detector to —— ——
nt pipe inject
with the detect the
leakage refrigerant
reference leak along
again.
value). the pipe.
Stop the
whole
system.
Test
the
system's
balance
pressure 20
minutes Discharge
later and existing
5. Wrong convert the refrigerant
refrigerant pressure and inject
—— —— —— ——
is into the the correct
injected. correspondi refrigerant
ng as
saturation required.
temperature.
Compare it
with the
outdoor
ambient
temperature
. If the
difference is
138
larger than
5°C , it is
exceptional.
Replace
6.
the
Exhaust
temperatur
temperatu —— —— ——
e sensor or
re sensor
main
failure
board.
7. The
ambient
temperatu
The It is a
re
outdoor Measure normal
exceeds
ambient the phenomen
the scope
—— temperatu ambient —— —— on caused
of
re temperatur by the
temperatu
exceeds e. protection
re
50°C . function.
required
for safe
operation.
When the 1.2.1 The
system is control
Connect
working wire of
the
in the the
heating 1.2 The electronic
ODU. expansion
mode and controlling expansio Manual
Listen to valve's
the ODU's heating n valve is check
the sound control
electronic electronic not
and touch wire to the
expansion expansion connecte
the tube to main
valve is of the d to the
see if the board.
opened to main main
electronic
100PLS, board or board.
expansion
the intake the 1.2.2 The
valve is
1. The temperature electronic control
reset.
Low ODU's of the expansion wire that Repair or
If it is set,
exhaust electronic correspondi valve of connects replace the
it is
temperat expansion ng liquid-air the the control
E2 normal. Manual
ure valve is separator is subcooler electronic wire of the
Otherwise, check
protectio not more than is faulty. expansio electronic
it is faulty.
n working 1°C lower n valve to expansion
properly. than the the main valve.
low-pressur board is
e saturation broken.
temperature Clean the
and the 1.3 The system
difference body of and clear
1.3.1
between the the the
Affected
compressor' electronic impurities.
Other by
s exhaust expansion —— Replace
reasons impurities
temperature valve is the body of
in the
or cover not the
system
temperature working electronic
and the properly. expansion
high-pressu valve.
139
re Replace
temperature 1.3.2 The the body of
is smaller body of the
——
than 10°C . the valve electronic
is faulty. expansion
valve.
2.1.1 The
control
Connect
wire of
When the the
the
system is electronic
working expansion
IDU. expansio Manual
in the valve's
Listen to n valve is check
cooling 2.1 The control
the sound not
mode and controlling wire to the
and touch connecte
the ODU's of main
the tube to d to the
electronic electronic board.
see if the main
expansion expansion
electronic board.
valve is valve by
expansion 2.1.2 The
opened main
valve is control
to 200PLS, board of
reset. wire that
the exhaust indoor unit Repair or
If it is set, connectin
temperature is replace the
it is g
2. The of the IDU's abnormal. control
normal. the Manual
IDU's coil is more wire of the
Otherwise, electronic check
electronic than 1°C electronic
it is faulty. expansio
expansion lower than expansion
n valve to
valve is the intake valve.
the main
not pipe's
board is
working temperature
broken.
properly and the
Clean the
difference
system
between
and clear
the 2.2.1
the
compressor' Affected
2.2 The impurities.
s exhaust by
body of —— Replace
temperature impurities
the the body of
or cover in the
electronic the
temperature Other system
expansion electronic
and the reasons
valve is expansion
high-pressu
not valve.
re
working Replace
temperature
properly. 2.2.2 The the body of
is smaller
valve the
than 10°C . ——
body is electronic
faulty. expansion
valve.
Replace
3.
the
Exhaust
temperatur
temperatu —— —— —— —— ——
e sensor or
re sensor
main
failure
board.
140
Check the
necessary
amount of
refrigerant
and
Incorrect
discharge
4. Too quantity of
Other the
much refrigerant —— —— ——
reasons unneeded
refrigerant is
refrigerant
injected.
slowly via
the stop
valve of
the fluid
pipe.
141
2.2 Pressure exception

Possible reasons
Fau Primary reason Secondary reason Tertiary reason
lt Confirmat Confirmat
cod Descripti ion Descripti Confirmation Descripti ion
e Fault on method on method on method Solution
1. The
stop
valve of
the ODU
is not
fully
opened Fully open
as Manual the stop
required. —— —— —— —— check valve.
2.1.1
The
block is
Touch the caused Replace
pipe along by and solder
the flowing solder. the pipe.
direction of 2.1.2
refrigerant to The
2.1. The feel the pipeline
system temperature is
air difference. blocked Cut off
pipeline The by the pipe Replace
is difference is impuritie and and solder
High blocked. large. s. check it. the pipe.
pressur Touch the
e pipe along
E1
protecti the flowing
on direction of
refrigerant to
feel the
temperature
difference.
The
2.2 The difference is
fluid pipe large or part Replace
is of the pipe is and solder
blocked. frosting. —— —— the pipe.
2.4.1
Touch the The
The pipe along block is
system's the flowing caused Replace
exhaust direction of by and solder
pressure refrigerant to solder. the pipe.
rises and feel the 2.4.2
the low temperature The
pressure 2.4 The difference. pipeline
2. The is too low pipe that The is
system (compare connects difference is blocked Cut off
pipeline d with the the IDU large or part by the pipe Replace
is reference is of the pipe is impuritie and and solder
blocked. value). blocked. frosting. s. check it. the pipe.
142
3.1 In the
cooling It is a
mode, normal
the phenome
outdoor non
temperat Measure the caused by
ure is outdoor the
over ambient protection
50°C . temperature. —— —— function.
3.2 In the
heating
mode,
the
actual It is a
ambient normal
temperat phenome
3. The ure of the non
ambient IDU's Measure the caused by
temperat return air temperature the
ure is too is over of the unit's protection
high. —— 30°C . return air. —— —— function.
Stop the
whole
system. Test
the system's
balance
pressure 20
minutes later
and convert
the pressure
into the
correspondin
g saturation
temperature.
Compare it
with the
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
4.1 The If the
4. The high difference is Replace
pressure pressure larger than the high
sensor is sensor is 5°C , it is pressure
faulty. —— faulty. exceptional. —— —— sensor.
143
Connect the
stop valve of
the module
fluid pipe and
air pipe to the
high and low
pressure
gauges and
transform the
readings into
correspondin
g
temperatures
4.2 The . Compare
high them to the
pressure high- and
and low low-temperat
pressure ures tested
sensors by the Reconnec
are system. If the t the high-
connecte difference is and
d larger than low-press
reversely 5°C , it is ure
. exceptional. —— —— sensors.
5.1.1
The
pressure
switch is
not
connect
ed to the
main Reconnec
—— board. —— t it.
5.1.2
The
connect
5.1 The wire
high between
pressure the
switch is pressure
not switch
connecte and Reconnec
E1 d to the main t them
protection main board is with the
is board. —— faulty. —— wire.
displayed 5.2 The
5. The on the high
high unit when pressure Replace
pressure it is switch is the
switch is powered damaged pressure
faulty. on. . —— —— —— switch.
A. The 6.1.1
ODU's The
fan does power
not work cable
in the connecti Reconnec
6. The cooling ng the t the
fan is not mode. B. 6.1 The motor motor with
working The IDU's IDU's fan and Manual the power
properly. motor is faulty. Manual check main check cable.
144
does not board is

work in loose.
the
heating
mode.
6.1.2
The
electric
capacity
is not Connect
connect or replace
ed or is the
damage Manual electric
d. check capacity.
6.1.3
The
motor is
damage Other Replace
d. reasons the motor.
6.2.1
The fan
motor is
not
properly
connect
ed with
the
control
board of
the
motor
with the Reconnec
power Manual t it
cable. check properly.
6.2.2
The fan
motor is
not
properly
connect
ed with
the
control
board of
the
motor
with the
signal Reconnec
feedbac Manual t it
k cable. check properly.
6.2.3
The
control
board of
6.2 The the fan's Replace
ODU's motor is the control
fan is damage Manual board of
faulty. Manual check d. check the motor.
145
6.2.4
The
main
board of
the fan's
motor is
damage Other Replace
d. reasons the motor.
Check the
necessary
amount of
refrigerant
and
discharge
unneeded
Incorrect refrigerant
quantity slowly via
7. Too of the stop
much refrigeran valve of
refrigeran Other t is the fluid
t reasons injected. —— —— —— pipe.
1.1 The
outdoor
ambient It is a
temperat normal
ure in the phenome
cooling non
mode is Measure the caused by
lower outdoor the
Low than ambient protection
high -10°C . temperature. —— —— function.
pressur 1.2 The
JL indoor It is a
e
protecti 1. The ambient normal
on ambient temperat phenome
temperat ure in the non
ure heating Measure the caused by
exceeds mode is temperature the
the lower of the unit's protection
range. —— than 5°C . return air. —— —— function.
Locate the
2. Not leak and
enough inject
refrigeran refrigerant
t —— .
Possible reasons
Fa Primary reason Secondary reason Tertiary reason
ult Confirma Confirma
cod Descripti tion Descripti Confirmation Descriptio tion
e Fault on method on method n method Solution
1. The
Low-pres stop Fully
sure valve of open the
E3 —— —— —— ——
Protectio the ODU stop
n is not Manual valve.
fully check
146
opened
as
required.
Touch the 2.1.1 The Replace

pipe along block is and
the flowing caused by solder
direction of solder. the pipe.
refrigerant to
2.1. The feel the
system temperature
air difference. 2.1.2 The Cut off Replace
pipeline The pipeline is the pipe and
is difference is blocked by and solder
blocked. large. impurities. check it. the pipe.
Touch the
pipe along
the flowing
direction of
refrigerant to
feel the
temperature —— ——
difference.
The
2.2 The difference is Replace
fluid large or part and
pipe is of the pipe is solder
blocked. frosting. the pipe.
The Touch the 2.4.1 The Replace
system's pipe along block is and
exhaust the flowing caused by solder
pressure direction of solder. the pipe.
rises and refrigerant to
the low feel the
pressure temperature
is too low 2.4 The difference.
2. The (compar pipe that The
system ed with connect difference is 2.4.2 The Cut off Replace
pipeline the s the large or part pipeline is the pipe and
is referenc IDU is of the pipe is blocked by and solder
blocked. e value). blocked. frosting. impurities. check it. the pipe.
3.1 The
outdoor
ambient It is a
temperat normal
ure is phenome
—— lower —— —— non
3. The than caused
ambient -25°C in Measure the by the
temperat the outdoor protectio
ure is heating ambient n
too low. mode. temperature. function.
Stop the
whole
4.1 The system. Test
4. The —— low the system's —— —— Replace
pressure pressure balance the high
sensor sensor pressure 20 pressure
is faulty. is faulty. minutes sensor.
147
later and
convert the
pressure
into the
correspondi
ng
saturation
temperature.
Compare it
with the
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
If the
difference is
larger than
5°C , it is
exceptional.
Connect the
stop valves
of the
module
high- and
low-pressur
e air pipes to
the high and
low pressure
gauges and
transform
the readings
into
correspondi
—— ——
ng
temperature
s. Compare
4.2 The them to the
high high- and
pressure low-tempera
and low tures tested
pressure by the
sensors system. If Reconne
are the ct the
connect difference is high- and
ed larger than low-press
reversel 5°C , it is ure
y. exceptional. sensors.
A. The 6.1.1 The
IDU's fan power
does not cable Reconne
work in connecting ct the
the the motor motor
cooling and main with the
mode. B. board is Manual power
The loose. check cable.
ODU's 6.1.2 The Connect
6. The fan does electric or
fan is not work 6.1 The capacity is replace
not in the IDU's not the
working heating fan is Manual connected Manual electric
properly. mode. faulty. check or is check capacity.
148
damaged.
6.1.3 The Replace

motor is Other the
damaged. reasons motor.
6.2.1 The
fan motor
is not
properly
connected
with the
control Reconne
board of Manual ct it
the motor. check properly.
6.2.2 The
fan motor
is not
properly
connected
with the
control
board of
the motor
with the
communic
ation Reconne
feedback Manual ct it
cable. check properly.
6.2.3 The Replace
control the
board of control
the fan's board of
motor is Manual the
damaged. check motor.
6.2.4 The
main
6.2 The board of
ODU's the fan's Replace
fan is Manual motor is Other the
faulty. check damaged. reasons motor.
Check
the
necessar
y amount
of
refrigeran
t and
inject
—— —— —— refrigeran
t slowly
via the
Incorrect stop
quantity valve of
7. Not of the
enough refrigera low-press
refrigera Other nt is ure air
nt reasons injected. pipe.
2.3 Poor cooling/heating performance
149
Possible reasons
Primary reason Secondary reason Tertiary reason
Confirm Confirm Confirm
Feedback Descript ation Descripti ation Descrip ation
from user Exception ion method on method tion method Solution
1. The
A. When stop
the IDU is valve of
working in the Fully
the ODU is open the
—— —— —— ——
cooling not fully stop
mode and opened valve.
the as
electronic required Manual
expansio . check
n valve is Touch 2.1.1
opened to the pipe The
2000PLS, along block is Replace
the the caused and
exhaust flowing by solder
temperatu direction solder. the pipe.
re of the of
IDU's coil refrigera
is more nt to feel
than 5°C the 2.1.2
higher temperat The
than the 2.1. The ure pipeline
intake system differenc is
temperatu air e. The blocked Cut off Replace
Poor re; B. pipeline differenc by the pipe and
heating/co when the is e is impuriti and solder
oling IDU is blocked. large. es. check it. the pipe.
performan working in Touch
ce the the pipe
heating along
mode and the
the —— flowing
electronic direction
expansio of
n valve is refrigera
opened to nt to feel
2PLS, the the
—— ——
intake temperat
temperatu ure
re of the differenc
IDU's coil e. The
is more differenc
than 12°C e is large
lower 2.2 The or part of Replace
than the fluid pipe the pipe and
saturation is is solder
temperatu blocked. frosting. the pipe.
re 2.4 The Touch 2.4.1
correspon 2. The pipe that the pipe The
ding to system connects along block is Cut off Replace
the high pipeline the IDU the caused the pipe and
pressure; is is flowing by and solder
blocked. blocked. direction solder. check it. the pipe.
150
of
refrigera
nt to feel
the
temperat
ure
differenc 2.4.2
e. The The
differenc pipeline
e is large is
or part of blocked Replace
the pipe by and
is impuriti solder
frosting. es. the pipe.
3.1.1
The
system
3.1 The has
——
ambient worked It is a
temperat for less normal
ure of than 1 phenome
the IDU hour. non.
that 3.1.2
works in An
the Measure improp Choose
cooling the er another
——
mode is outdoor system system
higher ambient is with
than temperat selecte larger
32°C . ure. d. power.
3.2 The
outdoor
ambient
temperat
ure in
—— the Measure —— ——
cooling the
mode is outdoor It is a
higher ambient normal
than temperat phenome
40°C . ure. non.
3.3.1
The
system
3.3 The has
——
ambient worked It is a
temperat for less normal
ure of than 2 phenome
the IDU hours. non.
3. The that 3.3.2
ambient works in An
tempera the Measure improp Choose
ture heating the er another
——
exceeds mode is outdoor system system
the lower ambient is with
required than temperat selecte larger
range. 12°C . ure. d. power.
151
3.4 The
outdoor
ambient
temperat
ure in
the Measure —— ——
heating the
mode is outdoor It is a
lower ambient normal
than temperat phenome
-7°C . ure. non.
4.1 The
air
intake
and
return
inlet of
the ODU
are too
close to
—— ——
each
other,
affecting
the heat
exchang Re-desig
e n the
performa Check airflow
nce of the distributio
—— the unit. distance. n.
4.2 The
air
intake
and
return
inlet of
the IDU
are too
close to —— ——
each
other,
causing
4. Poor poor Re-desig
airflow heat n the
distributi exchang Check airflow
on e of the the distributio
design unit. distance. n.
Check
the
necessar
y amount
of
refrigeran
t and
—— —— ——
inject
Incorrect refrigeran
quantity t slowly
7. Not of via the
enough refrigera stop
refrigera Other nt is valve of
nt reasons injected. the
152
low-press
ure air
pipe.
153
(2) Flowchart analyzing

1. High exhaust temperature protection (E4)
When the system shows high exhaust temperature protection for compressor, the IDU will show high
exhaust temperature fault E4, while the IDU will show the specific faulty compressor.
For example, when high exhaust temperature protection is enabled on compressor 2# of module 3# of
the ODU, IDUs will show E4 and the module will show E6, indicating that high exhaust temperature
protection is enabled on compressor 2#.
154
2. Low exhaust temperature protection (E2)
155
3. System high pressure protection (E1)
4. System low pressure protection (E3)
156
157
5. System refrigerant lacking protection (U4)
158
6. System high pressure ratio protection (J8)
159
7. System low pressure ratio protection (J9)
160
8. Indoor unit anti-freezing protection (L5)
9. Indoor unit water overflow protection (L3)
10. Temperature sensor fault
161
11. Pressure sensor fault
162
12. Analyzing of drive control system faults

When the unit fails and halts, first check the two-digit nixie tube of the control board and fault table to find
out the specific fault. Then check and solve the fault according to the following methods.
(1) Communication failure between the compressor's drive board and control board (outdoor fault C2)
C2
If the LED of the control board is off, replace the

No control board; if the LED of the drive board is off,
Check if the control board and
replace the drive board.
compressor's drive board are powered.
Yes
If not, reconnect them. If the cable is not

No conducting, replace the cable.
Check if the control board and compressor's
drive board are well connected to each other
using the communication cable.
Yes
No
Check the dial switch of the Adjust the drive board's dial .switch as required.
compressor's drive board is
correct.
Yes
Is the fault solved?
No
The compressor's drive board is

faulty and needs to be replaced.
Complete
163
(2) Faults in the IPM temperature sensor of the variable-frequency compressor's drive board (IDU fault
P7), current detection circuit (ODU fault PC), drive module reset protection (ODU fault P3) and
out-of-step protection (ODU fault P9)
P3, P7, P9 or PC
Check if the fault is solved

after turning on the system
for three times
No
The compressor's drive

board is faulty and needs to
be replaced.
Complete
(3) Variable-frequency compressor over-current protection (ODU fault P5) and IPM module protection
faults (ODU fault P6)
P5 or P6
Yes
Check if the IPM module is Replace the compressor's
damaged according to the method drive board
mentioned in Attachment 3.3.
No
No
Check if the compressor's
Connect the compressor's
UVW cable connects well.
UVW cable properly.
Yes
Is the fault solved after

the compressor's drive
board is replaced?
No
The compressor is faulty

and needs to be
replaced.
Complete
164
Attachment: How to check whether the IPM module is damaged

1. Preparation: Find a digital multi-meter and switch it to the diode. Remove U, V and W cables of the
compressor from the drive board two minutes after the system is powered off. Make sure that it is tested
at least two minutes after the system is powered off.
2. Method: Use the black probe of the multi-meter to touch the place marked by P in the follow picture
and the red probe to touch places marked by U, V and W respectively and record readings of the
multi-meter. Use the red probe to touch the place marked by N and black probe to touch places marked
by U, V and W respectively and record readings of the multi-meter.
3. Analyzing: If the reading ranges between 0.3 V and 0.7 V in the above-mentioned six scenarios, the
IPM module is normal. If the reading is 0 in one or multiple scenarios, the IPM module is damaged.
(4) Variable-frequency compressor drive board IPM over-temperature fault (ODU fault P8)
P8
Yes
Check if the fault Replace the
occurs when the compressor's drive
system is powered on. board.
No
Screw the IPM module

No properly and apply
Check if the IPM module is thermal gel on the
screwed well and thermal gel surface.
is applied on the surface.
Complete
165
(5) Recharging circuit faulty of the variable-frequency compressor drive board (ODU fault PF)
PF
Elevate the voltage of

No the input power cable
Check if the voltage of the
whole system's input power to 380V.
cable reaches 280V.
Yes
The compressor drive board

is faulty and needs to be
replaced.
Complete
(6) High voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency compressor's drive board (ODU fault
PH)
PH
Lower the voltage of

Yes the input power cable
whole system's input power to 380 V.
cable exceeds 460 V.0V.
No

be replaced.
Complete
166
(7) Low voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency compressor's drive board (ODU fault
PL)
PL
Elevate the voltage of

Yes the input power cable
whole system's input power to 380 V.
cable is lower than 320V.
No

be replaced.
Complete
(8) Variable-frequency compressor starting failure (ODU fault PJ)

PJ
Restart the system five

minutes after shutting down it
to see if the failure is solved.
No
No Reconnect the
Check if the compressor's
UVW cable is connected compressor's UVW
properly. cable.
Yes
Replace the compressor's

drive board to see if the
failure is solved.
No
The compressor is faulty

and needs to be replaced.
Complete
167
13. Analyzing of faults in the variable-frequency fan drive's control system
(1) Communication failure between the fan's drive board and control board (outdoor fault C3)
C3
Replace the control board if its LED is off;

No replace the drive board if its LED is off.
Check if the control board and fan's
drive board are power on.
Yes
If not, reconnect them. If the cable is not

No conducting, replace the cable.
Check if the fan's drive board and
compressor's drive board are well connected
to each other using the communication cable.
Yes
Switch the dial switch of the drive board to 00 in
No a signal-fan system. For a double-fan system,
Check if the dial switch of switch one to 00 and the other one to 01.
the fan's drive board is
correct.
Yes
The fan's drive board is

faulty and needs to be
replaced.
Complete
(2) Faults in the IPM temperature sensor of the fan's drive board (ODU fault H7), current detection circuit
(ODU fault HC) and out-of-step protection (ODU fault H9)
H7, H9 or HC
Check if the fault is solved

after turning on the system
for three times
No

replaced.
Complete
168
(3) Variable-frequency fan over-current protection and IPM module protection faults (ODU fault H5 and
H6)
H5 or H6
Yes
Check if the IPM module is Replace the fan's drive board
damaged according to the method
mentioned in Attachment 4.3.
No
No
Check if the fan's UVW
Reconnect it properly.
cable is connected
properly.
Yes
Replace the fan's drive

board to see if the fault is
solved.
No
The fan is faulty and

needs to be replaced.
Complete
Attachment: How to check whether the IPM module is damaged

① Preparation: Find a digital multi-meter and switch it to the diode. Remove U, V and W cables of the
fan from the drive board two minutes after the system is powered off. Make sure that it is tested two
minutes after the system is powered off.
② Method: Use the black probe of the multi-meter to touch the place marked by P in the follow picture
and the red probe to touch places marked by U, V and W respectively and record readings of the
multi-meter. Use the red probe to touch the place marked by N and black probe to touch places marked
by U, V and W respectively and record readings of the multi-meter.
③ Analyzing: If the reading ranges between 0.3 V and 0.7 V in the above-mentioned six scenarios, the
IPM module is normal. If the reading is 0 in one or multiple scenarios, the IPM module is damaged.
169
(4) Variable-frequency fan drive board IPM over-temperature fault (outdoor fault H8)
H8
Yes
Check if the fault occurs Replace the fan's drive
after the system is board.
power on.
No
Screw the IPM module

No properly and apply thermal
Check if the IPM module is gel on its surface.
screwed properly and thermal gel
is applied on the surface.
Complete
(5) High voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency fan's drive board (ODU fault HH)
HH
Lower the voltage to

Yes 380 V.
whole system's input power
cable exceeds 460V
No

replaced.
Complete
170
(6) Low voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency fan's drive board (ODU fault HL)
HL
Elevate the voltage to

Check if the voltage of the Yes 380V.
input power cable is lower
than 320V
No
Check if the terminal

Check if the terminal CN503 and No CN503 and CN504
CN504 on the fan's drive board on the fan's drive
are connected. board are connected.
Yes

replaced.
Complete
(7) Variable-frequency fan starting failure (ODU fault HJ)

HJ
No Reconnect it properly.
Check if the fan's UVW
cable is connected properly.
Yes
Replace the fan's drive

board to see if the fault is
solved.
No
The fan is faulty and needs

to be replaced.
Complete
171
Part 3 Key Parts Maintenance

I. Cautions on Controller AP1 Replacement
1. Cautions on ODU AP1 Replacement
1.1 Distinguishing Master Module from Slave Module
Before replacing ODU AP1, determine the module is a master ODU or a slave ODU. They can be
distinguished based on:
①―Master module DIP state (SA8_MASTER-S)‖
Every cooling system has only one master module (set in power-off state). When a DIP is ―ON‖, the
corresponding position is ―0‖; when the DIP is ―OFF‖, the corresponding position is ―1‖. If
SA8_MASTER-S is set to ―00‖, it indicates a master module; if it is set to ―10‖, it indicates a slave module
(as shown in the figure below).
DIP setting DIP setting

position position
DIP setting DIP setting

position position
Master module state Slave module state
②AP1 LED
When a master module is powered on, LED1 is displayed as ―01‖. For a slave module, LED1 is
displayed as ―02‖, ―03‖ or ―04‖ (as shown in the figure below).
Or Or
LED1 display state LED1 display state LED1 display state LED1 display state
Master module state Slave module state Slave module state Slave module state
1.2 Cautions on Replacement of Master ODU AP1

Before replacing master module AP1, make the following preparations:
①Master module DIP setting
Set the new AP1 identical to the faulty AP1. Note that settings must be performed when the master ODU
is powered off and they will take effect after the ODU is powered on. Settings that are performed in
power-on state are invalid.
②Communication state check
After AP1 DIP setting and all wiring, power on the master ODU AP1 and check whether D3 and D4 LEDs
are flashing. See the figure below:
IDU and ODU Inter-system Main

Power Running Reserved
communication communication system
ODU ODU System1 System1
→ → → → Main-
Power Run
IDU IDU System2 System2 system
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
If the LEDs flash, the ODU and IDUs normally communicate; if the LEDs are steadily on, communication
172
is faulty. Check communication lines connecting the ODU and IDUs.

Note: After AP1 is replaced, you should power on the ODU and IDUs at the same time or power on the
ODU first; otherwise, ―CC does not have module‖ will be prompted and a ―C0 fault‖ alarm will be reported
by the IDUs.
③Master ODU engineering debug setting
Debug the entire system after master module AP1 replacement.
④System parameter setting
After system debug, reset system parameters. For details, refer to section 1 ―ODU Function Setting‖, in
part II, chapter III.
1.3 Cautions on Replacement of Slave ODU AP1
Before replacing slave module AP1, set DIP identical to that of the faulty AP1, check wiring, and then
power on the AP1.
2. Cautions on IDU AP1 Replacement
Before replacing IDU AP1, determine the module is a master IDU or a slave IDU.
2.1 AP1 DIP Setting and Jumper Cap Confirmation
Whatever the AP1 you replace is a master IDU AP1 or a slave IDU AP1, after it is replaced,
check original DIP setting and model.
Configure capacity DIP for the new AP1 and confirm its jumper cap, fan overload detect
terminal, and overflow detect terminal. They should be kept identical to those of the faulty
AP1.
Their positions and corresponding silkscreen are as follows:
Capacity DIP: S1 (Capacity)
Jumper cap: U22 (Jump)
Overflow detect terminal: CN35(WATER-DTCT)
Fan overload detect terminal: CN36(OVC-FAN)
S1
U22
CN3
5
CN3
6
2.2. Restoring AP1 Engineering Parameters to Factory Settings (This Step Is Not
Required for Original Packaged Parts)
After wiring, whatever the AP1 is a master IDU AP1 or a slave IDU AP1, the new AP1 must
be restored to factory settings. There are three methods to restore engineering parameter
settings:
① If the IDU is configured with wired control, set P35 and P36 to default values.
② If the IDU is configured with wireless control, use the special control YV1L1 to set P35
and P36 to default values.
③ If the IDU is configured with wireless control and special control, you can restore
engineering settings through the AP1 SW1 button. After AP1 is powered on, press and
hold SW1 for 5 seconds. If a tick sound is heard, release the button.
173
SW1
2.3 Cautions on Replacement of Master IDU AP1

If the AP1 of the master IDU needs to be replaced, after the IDU is powered on, ―No master
IDU (L7)‖ or ―Project number conflict (C5)‖ alarm may be reported.
①Troubleshoot for ―no master IDU (L7)‖ fault
Number
Auto
Method 1: If the IDU is configured with wired control, stop the IDU (except for lock mode) and press and
hold the ―MODE‖ button for 5 seconds to enter setting mode. After setting, the ―Master‖ icon will be
highlighted and the wired control buzzer will beep once.
Method 2: If the IDU is configured with lamp board or wired control, set to fan mode, 30°C/86 °F, and
press and hold ―-‖ and ―+‖ consecutively three times within 5 seconds. The IDU and wired control will
identify it as a master IDU setting command, and show ―set master IDU success (UC)‖ (5 seconds) and
highlight the ―Master‖ icon respectively.
Method 3: If the IDU is configured with the Debugger, set the IDU to master IDU through this software.
②Troubleshoot for ―project number conflict (C5)‖
174
Number
Auto
If this fault occurs, the number of the new AP1 is identical to that of a unit within the network. Manually
change it to the original number of the faulty AP1 or a unique number. There are three methods to
change project number:
Method 1: If the IDU is configured with wired control, set P42 to a new project number.
Method 2: If the IDU is configured with lamp board, use the special control YV1L1 to set P42 to a new
project number.
Method 3: If the IDU is configured with the Debugger, configure a new project number through this
software.
Tip:
If there are N units within the network, the units should be numbered from N+1.
Special situation:
In some cases, the created project number is identical to that of a unit within the network. In this case,
you can use the ―one-key IDU project number reset‖ function. However, this function will cause the
project number of the entire system to be re-distributed; thus, original number will be changed. If you do
not expect this result, forbid the use of this function and replace the AP1 again.
Methods to use the ―one-key IDU project number reset‖ function:
Method 1: If the IDU is configured with wired control, set P45 to reset IDU project number through one
key function.
Method 2: If the IDU is configured with lamp board, use the special control YV1L1 to set P45 and reset
IDU project number through one key function.
Method 3: On the AP1 of the master ODU, press and hold SW5 for 10 seconds at least to clear all
project numbers of the IDUs and then redistribute project numbers. Other parameters are kept
unchanged.
175
2.4 Cautions on Replacement of Slave IDU AP1

If the AP1 of a slave IDU needs to be replaced, after it is powered on, ―Project number
conflict (C5)‖ alarm may be reported. Refer to section 2.3 ―Cautions on Replacement of
Master IDU AP1‖ to address the issue.
3. Cautions on Wired Control Replacement
3.1. Cautions on Wired Control XK46 Replacement
(1) If the wired control to be replaced controls only one IDU, directly replace the control.
(2) If the wired control to be replaced controls multiple IDUs, perform the steps below first:
Set the wired control parameter ―P14‖ to change the number of managed IDUs to the actual quantity the
control manages. For example, if the wired control manages 3 IDUs, set this parameter to 3. If you keep
the default value 1, the LCD displays L9 (as shown in the figure below).
Auto
(3) If there are two wired controls controlling one or multiple IDUs, perform the steps below first:
Set the wired control parameter ―P13‖ to change the address of one control to 01 (master) and that of the
other control to 02 (slave); otherwise, a CP (multiple master wired controls) fault alarm will be reported
(as shown in the figure below).
Auto
After setting, the LCD displays the icon, as shown in the figure below.
Auto
176
Note: All wired controls are set to master wired controls by default.
(4) If the AP1 of the master IDU is replaced,
Reset the master IDU through the wired control; otherwise, the LCD displays L7 (no master IDU). There
are two methods to set the IDU:
①In shut mode, press and hold the ―MODE‖ button for 5 seconds and set the IDU corresponding to this
wired control to a master IDU. After setting, the ―Main‖ icon is highlighted.
②Set the wired control parameter ―P10‖ to 1.
3.2. Cautions on Wired Control XK49 Replacement
To replace the wired control XK49, in addition to the preceding handling steps specific for XK46, you
should also configure access control.
(1) If the wired control does not need an access control system, set switch ―1‖ for DIP S1 at the bottom of
the wired control to digital end (neglect switch ―2‖).
(2) If the wired control needs an access control system, set switch ―1‖ for DIP S1 at the bottom of the
wired control to ON (neglect switch ―2‖) and connect the access control card interface to ports N and L or
ports VCC and GND of the wiring terminal. The following should be noted:
①Ports N and L are power interfaces of 100-240V~50/60Hz access control.
②Ports VCC and GND are power interfaces of DC 5-24V access control.
③Either of them can be selected at one time.
II. Compressor Replacement and Cautions

1. Determining Compressor Fault
1.1 Precondition: Units can be normally started.
Step 1:
If units can be normally started, start the units so as to measure line current of the faulty compressor.
Use a pressure gauge to measure pressure of various valves and connect the gauge to a PC for viewing
test data. Verify the current data in the figures below against the current recommended. For inverter
compressors, current will be deviated 10% while rate of turn and operating condition vary.
①For inverter compressors E655DHD-65D2YG and E705DHD-72D2YG:
The figure below shows current curves that change with evaporating temperature and condensing
temperature while the compressors work at 30 Hz.
Compressor
Current (A)
Condensing
Temp. (°C)
Evaporating
Temp. (°C)
Compressor
Current (A)
Condensing
Temp. (°C)
Evaporating
Temp. (°C)
177
Compressor
Current (A)
Condensing
Temp. (°C)
Evaporating
Temp. (°C)
Note: You can infer from the preceding figures the current of the compressors operating at other
frequency bands.
②For inverter compressor E405DHD-38D2YG:
temperature while the compressor works at 30 Hz.
Current curve Condensing temp.
Secondary current (A)
Evaporating temp. (°C)
178
Current curve Condensing temp.
Secondary current (A)
Evaporating temp. (°C)
Note: You can infer from the preceding figures the current of the compressor operating at other
frequency bands.
Step 2:
Check whether the compressor sounds sharp or rubs. Compare the sound of the faulty compressor with
that of normal ones.
Step 3:
Check whether the electric expansion valves of ODUs and the 4-way valves act, and whether the oil
return pipes and oil balance valves 1 and 2 are normal. Touch the pipelines next to the return capillary
tubes to check whether there is oil flowing.
Check method for each part:
①Electric expansion valve: This valve will reset for each power-on or power-off action. Touch the valve
and you will feel its vibration during the reset action. A crack sound will be heard as well.
Electric expansion
valve of heater
Electric
expansion valve
of subcooler
Description of electric expansion valve:
179
Touch the upper

part of an electric
expansion valve
and you will feel
its vibration while
units are being
powered on
Make sure the

coil is fixed
and firm
②Four-way valve: While this valve is normally running, the four copper pipes connected to it will suffer
different temperature. When a unit switches to act the valve, you will feel obvious vibration and hear
sound.
Here is the position of a 4-way

valve within a unit. DO NOT
touch it. The exhaust pipe it
connects with transmits
high-temperature refrigerant
which may scald you
180
D – Connects to exhaust.
Watch out for scald!
Labels on the 4-way valve and their meanings: D – connects to exhaust; E – connects to IDU evaporator;
S – connects to intake of gas separator; C – connects to condenser. When the system is cooling, the
pipe at side C works at high pressure high temperature, the pipes at sides E and S work at low pressure
low temperature; when the system is heating, the pipe at side E works at high pressure high temperature,
the pipes at sides C and S work at low pressure low temperature. The pipe at side D connects to exhaust
and it is always working at high pressure high temperature. When units are starting, defrosting, or
returning oil, the valve will vibrate obviously. DO NOT touch the pipe; or, you may be scalded.
③Oil balance solenoid valve: This valve can be operated based on its state that is shown through the
monitoring software and actual situation. When this valve is opened, the coil will be heated and lubricant
at both sides of the valve flows.
Solenoid
valve
Oil balance
valve 2
Oil balance
valve 1
Step 4:
Test the compressor drive, namely the IPM module, to see whether it is normal.
1. Disconnect the power supply. Five minutes later, remove the line of the faulty compressor.
2. Set a multimeter to gear diode. As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to pad P (on the
left of pad U (BL)) and the red test probe to pad U (BL) (make sure the moisture proof tape is removed).
In normal cases, the multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V. If it is ―0‖ or infinitely great, the IPM module is
faulty.
181
3. As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to pad P and the red test probe to pad V (YE)
(make sure the moisture proof tape is removed). In normal cases, the multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V.
If it is ―0‖ or infinitely great, the IPM module is faulty.
4. As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to pad P and the red test probe to pad W (RD)
5. As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to pad U (BL) and the red test probe to pad NU
182
6. As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to pad V (YE) and the red test probe to pad NV
183
7. As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to pad W (RD) and the red test probe to pad NW
1.2 Precondition: Units cannot be normally started.

Step 1:
Disconnect the power supply of the units and open the electric junction box of the compressor to see
whether wiring of the compressor is intact.
Step 2:
Measure resistance between two wiring terminals (U, V, W). The resistance value range should be
0.5~2.0 Ω.
Measure
resistance
between two
wiring terminals
using a multimeter
Measure the
resistance to earth of
each wiring terminal
one after another
Measure the resistance to earth of each wiring terminal. The value should be 10 MΩ. If not, the
compressor has an internal fault.
Step 3:
Check the solenoid valves of the system, include electric expansion valves, oil return valves, and oil
balance valves. Refer to the preceding section for the test method.
Step 4:
Check the IPM module. Refer to the preceding section for the test method.
184
2. Compressor Replacement (GMV-450WM/A)

Step 1: Disconnect power supply.
Turn off the power switch of the ODUs and disconnect the line of the power supply and the power line of
the ODUs. Meanwhile, cover the power line with tape for insulation and put a warning sign beside the
power switch to prevent electric shock.
Step 2: Clear electric parts (do not need to disassemble the electric box).
Before removing compressors‘ lines, temperature sensors, and electric heaters, mark them so that you
will reconnect them in a correct manner after clearing. The removed electric box must be covered and
protected from wind and sun.
1. Unscrew
the electric
box.
4. The method
of removing the
box at the left
side is similar 2. Make
to that of sure to
removing this support the
electric box. electric box.
3. Take the
electric box
out.
For GMV5 series, only GMV-400WM/B and GMV-450WM/B units are configured with the left electric box,
which contains mainly the drive of the compressor E405DHD-38D2YG. After the box is removed, take
care with the removal of electric parts‘ lines. DO NOT pull the lines with excessive force; or they may be
broken. The removed electric box must be protected for dustproof and waterproof purposes.
185
Step 3: Check oil quality.
Oil checking
valve
Before releasing the refrigerant, get some freezing oil through the oil checking valve. Connect a rubber
hose to the oil checking valve at one end and a glass container at the other end. Open the oil checking
valve. Control oil flow speed. Since the oil is a mixture of volatile refrigerant and lubricant, DO NOT cover
the container; or it may explode.
After the lubricant is fully gasified, record the volume of oil.
Step 4: Release refrigerant.

Refrigerant should be released from the high pressure side and low pressure side at the same time. If it
is released from one side only, the scroll is sealed, causing the refrigerant to fail to be released
completely. Control the release speed (it is expected to release for 12 hours or more). If too fast, massive
lubricant will be discharged with the refrigerant. Make sure to mark the valves.
186
At the high pressure

side, refrigerant is
released through
the high pressure
sensor.
Oil checking
valve
Refrigerant should be
released from the high
pressure side and low
pressure side at the
same time. Control the
release speed. At the low
pressure side, refrigerant
is released through the
low pressure check valve.
Low
pressure
check valve
Gas
Liquid pipe
pipe Balance
pipe
Step 5: Remove faulty compressors.

Confirm faulty compressors, including number of faulty ones, compressor position, and model.
Handling procedure varies with compressor model.
1. Inverter compressors and oil quality
If the inverter compressor is damaged, or the oil of the fixed speed compresor is contaminated, remove
the inverter compressor. The procedure is as follows:
187
1. Inlet of inverter
compressor
2. Outlet of
inverter
compressor
compressor
compresor
3. Unscrew the
Inverter
Inverter
compressor
188
For GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X variable frequency units, their compressors are both
inverter compressors, differing in models. The one close to the condenser is compressor 1
―E655DHD-65D2YG‖ and the other close to the liquid separator head is compressor 2
―E405DHD-38D2YG‖. The removal procedure is basically the same.
1. Inlet of inverter
compressor Inverter compressor
2. Outlet of
inverter
compressor 1
compressor
3. Unscrew the
Compressor –
compressor frequency
variable
Inverter
Name-
plate
2
After the compressor and oil separator are removed, check oil quality. If oils are contaminated, replace
the compressor, oil separator, and gas/liquid separator. If oil changes to black, check oils of other
modular units. The check procedure is similar to the preceding.
Note: Before replacing the faulty compressors, make sure to block their openings with tapes. They
should be kept intact for further analysis.
Step 5: Check system parts.

If system oil is contaminated, check unit parts, including oil separator, gas/liquid separator, and storage
tank.
1. Check oil separator.
Remove the oil separator. For the removal procedure, refer to step 4. Tilt the separator to draw oil out
into a container. Block the container for further factory inspection.
189
2. Weld the inlet

and outlet pipes of
the oil separator
1. Weld the oil

return pipe and oil
balance oil pipe of
the separator
3. Unscrew the oil

separator
2. Check oil balancer.
2. Weld the
inlet and outlet
pipes of the oil
separator
1. Weld the oil

return pipe and
oil balance oil
pipe of the 3. Unscrew
separator the oil
separator
190
3. Check gas/liquid separator.
1. Weld the
inlet and outlet
pipes of the
gas separator
3. Remove the
2. Unscrew the gas/liquid separator
gas separator
After the gas separator is taken out, check whether it contains impurities. The check procedure is as
follows:
Note: While drawing liquid

out from the gas separator,
make sure to keep the
outlet downward.
This angle should

not exceed 20°.
Use a glass container to hold the liquid. Check liquid impurities and colours and block the container for
further factory inspection.
※ Note: If the compressor needs replacement, the gas/liquid separator needs replacement as
well, regardless whether the separator contains impurities or has faults or not.
191
4. Check oil return pipes.

Remove oil return pipes and balance pipes, and check oil volume and impurity.
Remove
oil return
pipes
Remove balance
pipes
※ Note: Before replacing the faulty parts, make sure to block their openings with tapes. They
should be kept intact for further analysis.
※ Note: Volumes of oils drawn out from the oil separator, gas separator, and oil balancer should
be recorded. After faulty compressors and parts are replaced, you should fill new oils of
equivalent amount into the compressors and parts.
Step 6: Clear pipeline system.

Check pipelines for abnormalities. Charge nitrogen into the main pipeline and clear the pipeline system.
①Clear the balance pipes.
Components of oil balance valve 1:
192
3. Remove the large

filter to see whether 2. Remove the oil
it is blocked. If yes, balance filter to see
replace the filter whether it is blocked. If
yes, replace the filter
4. Blow nitrogen into

the balance pipes,
capillary tubes, and
filters to clean them 1. Disconnect
the pipes at both
sides of the oil
balance valve
Components of oil balance valve 2:
1. Disconnect the
pipes at both sides of
the oil balance valve
2. Remove the oil

balance filter to see
whether it is blocked. If

the balance pipes and
capillary tubes to clean
them
193
②Clear oil return pipes.

the oil return pipes
and capillary tubes to
clean them
1. Remove the oil

return filter to see
③Clear liquid pipe filters.
1. Remove the liquid

pipe filter to see
2. Replace
the drying
filter
For other pipeline parts, clear them based on actual situation. If you do not replace the parts immediately,
make sure to block the pipes with tapes, preventing air moistures and impurities from contaminating
them.
Step 7: Preparations.
1. Prepare new parts.
In the course of moving compressors, do not lay them down or put them upside down. The tilt angle
should be less than 30°. Make sure oil will not overflow from the oil balance opening. The inlet and outlet
194
should be blocked. If the sealing rubber is not available, cover them with tape to prevent direct contact of
oil and air.
The rubbers
used for
blocking the
inlet and outlet
of compressors
must be intact
The cover of the

electric box
should be intact
Note: The new compressor must be consistent with the faulty one in model.
Warning
Prevention against electric shock
Turn power off before servicing. Use this compressor on a grounded system only.
AND-NOT
Prohibition
DO NOT put flammable or explosive gas into the compressor.
Check the rubbers for oil separator, gas separator, oil balancer, and drying filter. If they are lost during
transportation, cover the parts with tape to keep the compressor dry and airtight inside.
195
The sealing
rubbers for
various parts
must be intact
Note: Compressor lubricant must be kept completely airtight. Hitachi compressors use special
lubricant FVC68D whose moisture absorption capability is high. Requirements on air-tightness
of these compressors are higher.
2. Prepare other materials.
(1) Prepare nitrogen. Prepare enough nitrogen. They will be used during welding. Nitrogen pressure
should be 2.0 MPa at least.
(2) Prepare welding rods. In addition to ordinary welding rods, you should also prepare special welding
rods (containing 5% or more silver). Compressors‘ inlets and outlets are made of copper plated steels,
which require special welding rods and materials.
(3) Prepare gases for welding. Oxygen and acetylene of proper amount should be determined with
consideration of actual welding positions. Try to finish the welding task once. Avoid repeated welding.
(4) Prepare tools, including hexagon, diagonal pliers, combination pliers, needle nose pliers, multimeter,
pressure gauge, Phillips screwdriver, flathead screwdriver, wrenches (at least two), PVC insulation tape,
and tielines (multiple).
Step 8: Install a new gas/liquid separator.

Note: If a faulty compressor needs replacement, the gas/liquid separator needs replacement as
well. This is to avoid abnormality from happening inside the gas separator, and affecting system
safety and reliability.
Put the gas/liquid separator on a chassis and connect the inlet pipe of the gas separator with the outlet
pipe. Then, connect the pipe to a nitrogen source. The nitrogen source can be connected based on
actual situation, for example, you can add a bypass interface or directly connect the nitrogen source to
the inlet/outlet pipe. If the pipe is big, cover it with tape as well. Make sure nitrogen can smoothly flow
through the gas separator.
196
2. Connect the
inlet pipe of the
separator with
the outlet pipe
3. Weld the
pipes together
1. Put the
gas/liquid
4. Screw the separator on a
separator onto the proper position
chassis
Step 9: Install a new oil balancer.

The original oil balancer, if is found to have no impurities or other objects, can be used further more. This
part serves as a container and it does not have complex structure. However, if it contains impurities or
other objects, replace it. This is because a dirty oil balancer cannot be thoroughly cleaned.
2. Weld the
connecting pipes
of the oil balancer
1. Put the oil

balancer on
a proper
4. Weld the oil position
balancer
components
3. Screw the
oil balancer
Step 10: Install a new oil separator.

If the original oil separator contains impurities inside, replace it.
197
2. Weld the
connecting
pipes of the 1. Put the oil
oil separator separator on a
proper position
4. Weld the
oil return
3. Screw the
components
oil separator
Step 11: Install a new compressor.
198
2. If it is a inverter compressor that needs replacement,
1. Weld the inlet

of the inverter
compressor
2. Weld the outlet

of the inverter
compressor
3. Screw the
compressor
For compressors of GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X units, make sure the new compressors are
consistent with the faulty ones in model. If both compressors need replacement, make sure
corresponding position and wiring are correct. You are advised to replace them one after another.
4. Weld the inlet

1. Weld the inlet
of inverter
compressor 2 of inverter
compressor 1
5. Weld the
2. Weld the
outlet of inverter
outlet of inverter
compressor 2
compressor 1
Compressor –
frequency
Name- variable
plate
6. Screw the 3. Screw the
compressor compressor
199
Note: Keep wiring identical to factory installation. Control varies with compressors. Wrong
wiring or inverse connection of the compressors may cause damage to units.
Cautions on replacement of compressors:
1) Before installing new compressors, remove the sealing rubbers and weld the compressors with
corresponding pipes. During welding, charge nitrogen into the pipes. Since compressors‘ suction
and discharge pipes are made of copper plated steels, you need to prepare special welding rods
(containing 5% or more silver). Welding clearance should be controlled within 0.1~0.3mm, avoiding
blockage or loose welding. During welding, control pipe openings from being over-heated.
2) After the pipeline system is welded, use special supports and bolts to fix the compressors, ensuring
stability of the compressors during running.
3) Power lines of the compressors should be wired following the factory installation. You can refer to
the wiring diagram. Phase sequence error and inverse connection of compressors are not allowed.
In particular, if there are two inverter compressors GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X that
need replacement, pay attention to wiring. Control varies with compressors. Inverse connection of
the compressors may cause damage to units.
Step 12: System check.

1. Check welding joints for abnormalities.
2. Charge nitrogen into the system for leakage detection. If you are maintaining ODUs and the IDU
system is normal, you can charge nitrogen into the ODU system only. Note that nitrogen should be
charged from both the high pressure side and low pressure side. You are advised to charge through all
valves. Nitrogen pressure should be larger than 20 kgf. Then, charge soapsuds into the system and
check specially the weld joints for leakage.
3. Finally, charge nitrogen into the system again for pressure check. Close all valves and keep system
pressure up to 25 kgf for more than 12 hours. If the pressure remains unchanged, you can extract all air.
Otherwise, you should find the leakage points first.
※ While determining system pressure change, take temperature into consideration. For 1°C
temperature change, pressure will change by 0.01 MPa accordingly. Suppose that nitrogen pressure
reaches 2.5 MPa at 30°C, 12 hours later, temperature decreases to 25°C and pressure decreases to
2.43 MPa accordingly. The system is regarded qualified despite the pressure decrease.
Step 13: Fill lubricant.

Quantity of lubricant that is needed is subject to the total draw amount from compressors and parts. The
fill amount should be equivalent to the draw amount. If the draw amount is too little or too much, clear all
lubricant first and determine fill amount by referring to Appendix 1 (accessory list).
Fill amount is determined by two factors: the number of compressors replaced and the draw amount
from each part. For replacement of one compressor, 1.5 L lubricant should be added. The fill amount
should be equal to or a little larger than the draw amount.
Examples:
(1) For GMV-450WM/B-X units, one compressor is replaced; lubricant that is drawn from the gas
separator is 1 L and lubricant that is drawn from the oil separator is 0.7 L. Then, the total required
amount is 1.5 L + 1 L + 0.7 L = 3.2 L. You should add 3.2 L lubricant into the system.
(2) For GMV-280WM/B-X units, one compressor is replaced; gas separator and other filters are replaced
as well; pipes have been charged with nitrogen for cleaning. Since the maintenance work involves most
of the parts, there is little residual lubricant inside the system. You are advised to clear the residual
lubricant and add 3.5 L new lubricant into the system (determined by referring to the accessory list).
Specific procedure is as follows:
1) GMV5 series units use FVC68D lubricant. Make sure to confirm the trademark of the lubricant first.
Lubricant of other trademarks is not allowed.
2) Open all valves and extract air for 30 minutes or longer.
3) Connect a rubber hose to the oil checking valve at one end. Open the container that holds lubricant
and pour lubricant into a measuring glass. If the glass is too small to hold the lubricant of a required
amount, measure the lubricant portion by portion. Record volume of each portion and then put the
other end of the rubber hose into the glass.
4) Keep on extracting air and open the oil checking valve. The lubricant will be pressed into the low
pressure side of units.
5) If the lubricant is added portion by portion, close the oil checking valve first and then measure
another portion of lubricant. In the course of repeated measuring and adding, keep the extraction
action.
200
6) After a required amount of lubricant is added, close the oil checking valve to ensure tightness.
Extract air through all

valves. In the course of oil
fill, keep on the extraction
action
Oil checking
valve
Connect the rubber hose

to the oil checking valve at
one end and put the other
end of the hose into the
glass for drawing lubricant
Low
pressure
check valve
Gas
Liquid pipe
pipe Balance
pipe
Note: Lubricant is of great importance to the normal running of compressors. You should follow
Gree’s requirement to add qualified lubricant of the specified trademark and ensure properness
of fill amount.
Step 14: Vacuum-pump.

After lubricant is added, keep on extracting air through a vacuum pump till the internal pressure reaches
the absolute pressure 0 kgf/cm2 and the pressure gauge reads -1 kgf/cm2. This is to ensure that
moistures inside the pipeline system are completely vaporized.
Vacuum pumps of the specifications below are recommended:
Max. Discharge Purpose
Type
Rate For air discharge For vacuum drying
Lubricant driven pump 100 L/min Applicable Applicable
Lubricant free pump 50 L/min Applicable Applicable
Open all valves in order that the vacuum pump extracts air through all the valves, during which, connect
the units to a pressure gauge. When the internal pressure reaches 0 kgf/cm 2 and the pressure gauge
reads -1 kgf/cm2, keep on the extraction action for 0.5~1.0 hour more. Finally, turn off the rotary switch of
the gauge and close the pump. One hour later, if the pressure remains the same, fill refrigerant. If the
pressure increases to 0.1 kgf/cm2 or higher, conduct leakage check again.
201
Open all valves in

order that the
vacuum pump
extracts air through
all the valves
Oil checking
valve
If the
maintenance
work involves
multiple parts,
extract air of the
balance pipe
independently
Low pressure
check valve
Gas pipe
Liquid
pipe Balance
pipe
Step 15: Fill refrigerant.

Before filling refrigerant, check its manufacturer, package, and print information. Besides, check
refrigerant pressure and quality against the saturation pressure / temperature list.
1. Measure and check the pressure of the entire refrigerant product against the saturation pressure /
temperature list. Verify temperature parameter. If the difference between the actual temperature and the
parameter value is 3°C or more, the refrige rant quality is unsatisfactory.
202
2. If the refrigerant is proved satisfactory, fill refrigerant of the combined amount of the rated amount
(specified on the nameplate) and the calculated refrigerant loss amount.
For a multi-modular unit system, if only the refrigerant of an ODU is drawn out, add 80% refrigerant of
the rated fill amount (specified on the nameplate of the ODU) and start the system for a debugging test.
Step 16: Install electric parts.
Install the electric box and connect various parts to the electric box by referring to the marks made
beforehand and the wiring diagram on the back of the box. Wire the compressors and corresponding
electric heating belts.
Note: Wires should be checked against the wiring diagram beforehand so that they can be
connected correctly.
Step 17: Start for debugging.
Start the units and set them to run in refrigerating full-start, refrigerating single-start, heating full-start,
and heating single-start modes respectively. Duration for each running mode should be 30 minutes at
least. After the debug, analyze data and adjust the unit system, to ensure indexes of the entire system.
For details about each index, please consult after-sale persons and technicians.
III. Cautions on Compressor Drive

Replacement
1. Disconnect the power supply of the system. Set a multimeter to the AC voltage gear and measure
voltage between two of the lines (L1, L2, L3, and N). The measuring result should be 0 V
(sometimes, multimeters may be faulty and read false values). Set a mark beside the power supply
for warning.
2. Measure compressor drive DC bus voltage between two wire terminals of P, U, V, W and N. Set the
multimeter to the DC voltage gear and measure the voltage between P and N. The voltage should
be lower than 36 V. If no multimeter is available, wait for 20 minutes before performing the steps
below.
Note: The blue squares

indicate pads.
3. Disconnect all lines of the compressor drive, including: compressor line; communication line
between the master unit and the drive; communication line between the compressor drive and fan
drive; compressor drive output 18 VDC; bridge rectifier output P; bridge rectifier output N;
compressor drive output 540 VDC; reactor‘s wiring terminal; bridge rectifier input AC inlead;
compressor drive‘s mains terminal. See the figure below:
203
Communication line
between master
unit and the drive
Communication line
between compressor
drive and fan drive
Compressor drive
output 18 VDC
Connect to compressor
U – blue
V – yellow
W – red
Reactor’s wiring terminal is

not distinguished by polarity
Connect to
540VDC mains
terminal
4. Loosen the screws on the compressor drive, as shown in the figure below:
5. Replace the compressor drive. Before the replacement, apply some silicone tape onto the IPM
module.
204
Apply some silicone

tape on it evenly
6. Install a new compressor drive, screw and wire it.
U – blue
V – yellow
W – red
Connect to a reactor
and do not distinguish
by polarity
205
IV. Assembling and Disassembling Key Parts

of ODUs
Compressor
Precondition: No refrigerant exists in the pipeline system and the power supply has been disconnected.
Step Diagram Operation Procedure
1. Remove the front ●Use a screwdriver to unscrew
panels. the upper and lower front
panels.
●Lift the front panels in order to
take it out.
Note: Both the upper panel and
lower panel are fixed with two
fasteners respectively to
connect to the side panels.
2. Disconnect the ●Remove the sound-proof

power line of the sponge from the compressor.
compressor, and ●Use a screwdriver to unscrew
remove the electric the power line.
heating belt, top ●Remove the power line.
temperature sensor, ●Remove the electric heating
and discharge air belt, top temperature sensor,
temperature sensor. and discharge air temperature
sensor.
Note: Before removing the
power line, mark the colours of
the line and corresponding
wiring terminals.
3. Loosen the nuts of ●Use a wrench to unscrew the
the compressor. four nuts.
4. Remove the ●Heat the suction and discharge

suction and pipes by acetylene welding and
discharge pipes. then remove the pipes.
●During welding, charge
nitrogen into the pipes. The
pressure should be controlled
within 0.5±0.1 kgf/cm 2 (relative
pressure).
●Avoid nearby materials from
being burnt during welding.
206
5. Remove the ●Remove the compressor from

compressor. the chassis.
6. Install a new ●Put the compressor in a proper

compressor on the position.
chassis. ●Use a wrench to screw the nuts
on the compressor.
●The compressor should not be
installed upside down.
7. Connect the ●Heat the suction and discharge

suction and pipes by acetylene welding and
discharge pipes of then install the pipes.
the compressor to ●During welding, charge
the pipeline system. nitrogen into the pipes. The
within 0.5±0.1 kgf/cm 2 (relative
pressure).
●Avoid nearby materials from
8. Connect the ●Put the power line in a proper
power line to the position.
compressor, and ●Use a screwdriver to screw the
install the electric power line.
heating belt, top ●Install the electric heating belt,
temperature sensor, top temperature sensor, and
and discharge air discharge air temperature
temperature sensor. sensor.
●Put the sound-proof sponge
back to position.
9. Check and then ●Check various parts and
install the front connecting lines.
panels. ●If no problem is found, hook
the front panels and tighten the
screws.
207
Four-way valve
1. Loosen the hooks ●Remove the upper and lower
at the bottom of the front panels.
electric box and the ●Loosen the hooks at the
screws. bottom of the electric box.
●Use a screwdriver to unscrew
the electric box.
2. Remove the ●Disconnect internal and

electric box. external connecting lines of the
electric box.
●Protect the internal parts
during the disassembly.
3. Disassemble the Use a screwdriver to unscrew

four-way valve. accessories of the four-way
valve.
Remove the accessories.
●Heat the connecting pipes of
the four-way valve by acetylene
welding and then remove the
pipes.
●Record the direction of the
valve and position of the pipe
joints.
Note: Avoid nearby parts from
4. Remove the ●Remove the four-way valve
four-way valve. from the pipeline.
208
5. Install a new ●Put the valve in a proper

four-way valve. position.
●Weld the valve with the
pipeline.
●Before welding, cover the valve
with wet cloth to avoid internal
slide from being burnt and
prevent water from flowing in the
pipeline.
within 0.5±0.1 kgf/cm2 (relative
pressure).
6. Fix and wire the ●Put the electric box back to
electric box. original position and screw it.
●Connect all lines.
7. Check and install ●Check various parts and

the front panels. connecting lines.
●If no problem is found, hook
screws.
209
Electric expansion valve

the electric box.

electric box.
3. Disassemble the ●Remove the coil from the

electric expansion electric expansion valve.
valve. ●Heat the connecting pipes of
the electric expansion valve by
welding and remove the pipes.
4. Remove the ●Remove the electric expansion

electric expansion valve.
valve.
210
5. Install a new ●Weld the connecting pipes with

electric expansion the electric expansion valve.
valve. ●Before welding, cover the valve
with wet cloth.
pressure).
●Install the coil on the electric
expansion valve.

screws.
Oil separator
211

the electric box.

electric box.
3. Disassemble the ●Use a screwdriver to unscrew

oil separator. the oil separator.
●Loosen the electric heating
belt.
●Heat the four pipe joints of the
oil separator by welding and
remove the connecting pipes.
4. Remove the oil ●Remove the oil separator from

separator. the chassis.
212
5. Install a new oil ●Weld the four pipe joints with

separator. the oil separator.
During welding, charge nitrogen
into the pipes. The pressure
should be controlled within
0.5±0.1 kgf/cm2 (relative
pressure).
●Screw the oil separator.
●Tighten the electric heating
belt.

screws.
Gas/liquid separator
the electric box.
213

electric box.
3. Disassemble the ●Heat the connecting pipes of

gas/liquid separator. the gas/liquid separator by
acetylene welding and then
remove the pipes.
4. Remove the ●Unscrew and remove the

gas/liquid separator. gas/liquid separator.
5. Install a new ●Put the gas/liquid separator

gas/liquid separator. based on the position of the
suction and discharge pipes and
weld the pipes with the
gas/liquid separator.
pressure).
●Screw the gas/liquid separator.
214


screws.
Heat exchanging board

the electric box.
215

electric box.
3. Disassemble the ●Heat the connecting pipes of

heat exchanging the heat exchanging board by
board. acetylene welding and then
remove the pipes.
being burnt during welding. The
joints of the board must be
welded with copper plated steel.
Ensure welding quality.
4. Remove the heat ●Unscrew the support of the

exchanging board. heat exchanging board, and
remove the support and board.
5. Install a new heat ●Screw the support of the heat

exchanging board. exchanging board and fix the
board onto the chassis.
●Put the heat exchanging board
based on the position of the
suction and discharge pipes and
weld the pipes with the heat
exchanging board.
pressure).
216


screws.
217
V. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PART LIST

1. Model: GMV-224WM/B-X, GMV-280WM/B-X
Exploded View:
218
Parts List:
GMV-224WM/B-X GMV-280WM/B-X
No. Name of part Product Code CN851W1280 Product Code CN851W1290
Part code Quantity Part code Quantity
1 Rear Grill 01574105 1 01574105 1
2 Top Cover 01264230 1 01264230 1
3 Diversion Circle 10474100 1 10474100 1
4 Fan motor Sub-Assy 15404605 1 15404605 1
5 Axial Flow Fan Sub-Assy 10338702 1 10338702 1
6 Fan Motor 15704124 1 15704124 1
7 Motor Support Sub-Assy 01804771P 1 01804771P 1
8 Gas By-pass Sub-Assy 04224100129 1 04224100129 1
9 Magnet Coil 4304000425 1 4304000425 1
10 Filter 07415200002 1 07415200002 1
11 Electromagnetic Valve 43000054 1 43000054 1
12 Top Cover 01264231P 2 01264231P 2
13 Rear Grill 01576013 1 01576013 1
14 Condenser Assy 0112431001 1 0112431001 1
Low Pressure Survey Valve
07334100026 1 07334100026 1
15 Sub-Assy
16 Cut-off Valve 1/4 07130239 1 07130239 1
17 Throttle Assy 05374100006 1 05374100006 1
18 Dry Filter Sub-Assy 07314100001 1 07314100001 1
19 Gas Tube Filter 072190511 1 072190511 1
20 Dry Filter 07218769 1 07218769 1
21 Cut-off Valve 3/8 07334100011 1 07334100011 1
Electronic Expansion Valve
4304413206 1 4304413206 1
22 Coil
23 Electronic Expansion Valve 07334390 1 07334390 1
24 Discharge Valve 07334100002 1 07334100002 1
4304413204 1 4304413204 1
25 Coil
26 Plate-type Heat Exchanger 00904100005 1 00904100005 1
27 Electronic Expansion Valve 07334412 1 07334412 1
28 One way Valve 04324001 1 04324001 1
29 Bidirectional Filter 07210044 1 07210044 1
30 07334100030 1 07334100030 1
Sub-Assy
31 Left Side Plate 01314712P 1 01314712P 1
32 Chassis Sub-assy 01194708 1 01194708 1
33 Gas-liquid Separator 07424188 1 07424188 1
34 Base Frame Assy 01284711 1 01284711 1
35 Oil Separator 0742418601 1 0742418601 1
36 Electrical Heater(Compressor) 7651873209 1 7651873209 1
37 Compressor and Fittings 00204100002 1 00204100002 1
38 Electric Heater(Compressor) 7651540713 1 7651540713 1
39 Magnet Coil 4304000423 1 4304000423 1
40 Magnet Coil 4304000415 1 4304000415 1
41 Gas Tube Filter 072190511 1 072190511 1
42 Cut-off Valve 07334100011 1 07334100011 1
219
43 Oil Equalizing Pipe Sub-Assy 04224100148 1 04224100148 1

44 Oil Separator 07424100023 1 07424100023 1
45 Pressure Switch 4602000911 1 4602000911 1
46 Discharge Tube Sub-assy 04534100050 1 04534100050 1
47 Front Panel 01544627P 1 01544627P 1
48 Handle 26904100016 2 26904100016 2
49 Front Panel 01544620P 1 01544620P 1
Temperature Sensor
50 39008000006G 1 39008000006G 1
Sub-Assy
51 Pressure Sensor 32218000009 1 32218000009 1
52 Pressure Sensor 32218000008 1 32218000008 1
53 Right Side Plate 01314713P 1 01314713P 1
54 4-Way Valve Sub-Assy 04044100013 1 04044100013 1
55 Cut-off Valve 1-1/8 07334100014 1 07334100014 1
56 Filter 07218603 1 07218603 1
57 Magnet Coil 4300040032 1 4300040032 1
58 4-way Valve 43000339 1 43000339 1
59 One way Valve 07335210 1 07335210 1
60 Nozzle for Adding Freon 06120012 2 06120012 2
61 Filter Board 30228000015 1 30228000015 1
62 Rectifier 46010604 1 46010604 1
63 Reactor 43138000034 1 43138000034 1
64 Main Board 30228000010 1 30228000010 1
65 Electric Box Assy 01394100191 1 01394100191 1
66 Radiator 49018000002 1 49018000002 1
67 Main Board 30229010 1 30229010 1
68 Radiator 49018000001 1 49018000001 1
69 Terminal Board 42010247 1 42010247 1
70 Main Board 30223000005 1 30223000005 1
71 Terminal Board 42018000026 1 42018000026 1
Above data is subject to change without notice,pls reference the SP in global service website.
220
2. Model: GMV-335WM/B-X
Exploded View:
221
Parts List:
GMV-335WM/B-X
No. Name of part Product Code CN851W1300
Part code Quantity
1 Rear Grill 01574100002 2
2 Top Cover 01264100006P 1
3 Diversion Circle 10474100002 2
4 Motor for Axial Fan Assy 15404100018 2
5 Axial Flow Fan 10434100002 1
6 Fan Motor 15704124 1
7 Gas By-pass sub- assy 04634100012 1
8 Magnet Coil 4304000420 1
9 Filter 07415200002 1
10 Electromagnetic Valve 43000054 1
11 Rear Top Cover 01264100005P 1
12 Rear Grill 01574100001 1
13 Condenser Assy 01124100096 1
14 Low Pressure Survey Valve Sub-assy 07334100010 1
15 Cut off Valve 07130239 1
16 Throttle Assy 05374100012 1
17 Electric Expansion Valve Sub-Assy 43044100012 1
18 Electric expand valve fitting 4304413203 1
19 Electronic Expansion Valve 07331139 1
20 Discharge Charge Valve 07334100002 2
21 One way Valve 04324001 2
22 Electric expand valve fitting 4304413204 1
23 Electronic Expansion Valve 07334412 1
24 Bidirection Strainer 07210044 1
25 Dry Filter Sub-Assy 00904100012 1
26 Dry Filter Sub-Assy 07314100002 1
27 Gas Tube Filter 072190511 2
28 Dry Filter 07218769 1
29 Gas-liquid Separator 07424138 1
30 Oil Separator 0742418601 1
31 Electric Heater(Compressor) 7651873209 1
32 Right Side Plate 01314713P 1
33 Chassis Sub-assy 01194100069P 1
34 Base Frame Assy 01284100002 1
35 Liquid Valve Sub-Assy 07304100009 1
36 Cut off Valve 07334100013 1
37 Valve 07304100007 1
38 Cut off Valve 07334100011 1
39 Gas Hose Sub-Assy 04574100027 1
40 Cut off Valve 07334100014 1
41 Compressor Gasket 70410226 4
42 Compressor 00204100004 1
43 Electric Heater(Compressor) 7651540713 1
44 Oil Equalizing Pipe Sub-Assy 04224100054 1
222
45 Magnet Coil 4304000440 1

46 Oil Equalizing Pipe Sub-Assy 04224100059 1
47 Magnet Coil 4304000423 1
48 Left Front Panel 01544100003P 1
49 Right Front Panel 01544100005P 1
50 Handle 26904100016 2
51 Front Top Cover 01264100004P 2
52 Sensor Sub-assy 39004100008G 1
53 Pressure Sensor 32218000009 1
54 Pressure Sensor 32218000008 1
55 Discharge Tube Sub-assy 04534100052 1
56 Oil Separator 07424100023 1
57 Pressure Protect Switch 4602000910 1
58 Left Side Plate 01314712P 1
59 4-Way Valve Sub-Assy 04044100003 1
60 Filter 07218603 1
61 Magnet Coil 4300040030 1
62 4-way Valve 43000339 1
63 One way Valve 07335210 1
64 Nozzle for Adding Freon 06120012 2
65 Electric Box Assy 01394100192 1
66 Filter Board 30228000015 1
67 Reactor 43138000034 1
68 Rectifier 46010604 1
69 Main Board 30228000010 1
70 Main Board 30229009 1
71 Radiator 49018000002 1
72 Radiator 49018000001 2
73 Terminal Board 42010247 1
74 Main Board 30223000005 1
75 Terminal Board 42018000026 1
223
3. Model: GMV-400WM/B-X，GMV-450WM/B-X
Exploded View:
224
Parts List:
GMV-400WM/B-X GMV-450WM/B-X
No. Name of part Product Code CN851W1310 Product Code CN851W1320
Part code Quantity Part code Quantity
1 Rear Grill 01574100002 2 01574100002 2
2 Top Cover 01264100006P 1 01264100006P 1
3 Diversion Circle 10474100002 2 10474100002 2
Motor for Axial Fan
4 15404100018 2 15404100018 2
Assy
5 Axial Flow Fan Blade 10434100002 1 10434100002 1
6 Fan Motor 15704124 1 15704124 1
Gas By-pass Sub-
7 04514100036 1 04514100036 1
Assy
8 Magnet Coil 4304000420 1 4304000420 1
9 Filter 07415200002 3 07415200002 3
10 Electromagnetic Valve 43000054 1 43000054 1
11 Cover Plate 01264100005P 1 01264100005P 1
12 Rear Grill 01574100001 01574100001
13 Condenser Assy 0112410009001 1 0112410009001 1
Low Pressure Survey
14 07334100010 1 07334100010 1
Valve Sub-Assy
15 Cut-off Valve 1/4 07130239 1 07130239 1
16 Throttle Assy 05374100003 1 05374100003 1
Electronic Expansion
17 43044100012 1 43044100012 1
Valve Fittingss
18 4304413204 1 4304413204 1
Valve Fittings
19 07331139 1 07331139 1
Valve
20 Discharge Valve 07334100002 2 07334100002 2
21 4304413203 1 4304413203 1
Valve Fittings
22 Check Valve 04324001 2 04324001 2
23 07334412 1 07334412 1
Valve
24 Bidirectional Filter 07210044 1 07210044 1
Plate-type Heat
25 00904100007 1 00904100007 1
Exchanger Sub-Assy
26 Dry Filter Sub-Assy 07314100002 1 07314100002 1
27 Gas Tube Filter 072190511 1 072190511 1
28 Dry Filter 07218769 1 07218769 1
29 Left Side Plate 01314712P 1 01314712P 1
30 Gas-liquid Separator 07424138 1 07424138 1
31 Oil Separator 0742418601 1 0742418601 1
Electrical
32 7651873209 1 7651873209 1
Heater(Compressor)
33 Chassis Sub-Assy 01194100001P 1 01194100001P 1
34 Base Frame Assy 01284100002 1 01284100002 1
35 Cut-off Valve 1/2 07334100013 1 07334100013 1
36 Liquid Valve Sub-Assy 07304100009 1 07304100009 1
37 Cut-off Valve 3/8 07334100011 1 07334100011 1
38 Valve 07304100007 1 07304100007 1
39 Cut-off Valve 1-1/8 07334100014 1 07334100014 1
40 Gas Valve Sub-Assy 07304100008 1 07304100008 1
Oil Equalizing Pipe
41 04224100054 1 04224100054 1
Sub-Assy 1
42 Magnet Coil 4304000423 1 4304000423 1
43 Magnet Coil 4304000414 1 4304000414 1
44 Oil Equalizing Pipe 04224100059 1 04224100059 1
225
Sub-Assy 2
Compressor and
45 00204116 1 00204116 1
Fittings
Electric
46 7651540714 1 7651540714 1
Heater(Compressor)
47 Compressor 00204100002 1 00204100002 1
Electric
48 7651540713 1 7651540713 1
Heater(Compressor)
49 Front Panel (Left) 01544100003P 1 01544100003P 1
50 Front Panel (Right) 01544100005P 1 01544100005P 1
51 Handle 26904100016 2 26904100016 2
52 Cover Plate 01264100004P 2 01264100004P 2
53 Sensor Sub-Assy 39008000028G 1 39008000028G 1
54 Pressure Sensor 32218000009 1 32218000009 1
55 Pressure Sensor 32218000008 1 32218000008 1
56 Suction Pipe Sub-Assy 04574100039 1 04574100039 1
57 Oil Separator 07424100023 2 07424100023 2
58 Pressure Switch 4602000911 1 4602000911 1
59 Pressure Switch 4602000912 1 4602000912 1
Exhaust Trunk
60 04534100012 1 04534100012 1
Sub-Assy
61 Check Valve 07333700032 2 07333700032 2
Gas By-pass Sub-
62 04514100036 1 04514100036 1
Assy
63 Magnet Coil 4304000402 1 4304000402 1
64 4-Way Valve Sub-Assy 04044100019 1 04044100019 1
65 Filter 07218603 1 07218603 1
66 Magnet Coil 4300040030 1 4300040030 1
67 4-way Valve 43000339 1 43000339 1
68 Check Valve 07335210 1 07335210 1
Nozzle for Adding
69 06120012 2 06120012 2
Freon
70 Right Side Plate 01314713P 1 01314713P 1
72 Reactor 4313017401 1 4313017401 1
73 Filter Board 30228122 1 30228122 1
74 Rectifier 46010058 1 46010058 1
75 Main Board 30228609 1 30228609 1
76 Radiator 49018000001 1 49018000001 1
78 Filter Board 30228000015 1 30228000015 1
79 Rectifier 46010604 1 46010604 1
80 Main Board 30228000010 1 30228000010 1
81 Reactor 43138004 1 43138004 1
82 Main Board 30229009 2 30229009 2
83 Radiator 49018000001 2 49018000001 2
84 Terminal Board 42010247 1 42010247 1
85 Main Board 30223000005 1 30223000005 1
86 Terminal Board 42018000026 1 42018000026 1
226
4. Model: GMV-504WM/B-X, GMV-560WM/B-X, GMV-615WM/B-X

Exploded View:
227
Parts List:
GMV-504WM/B-X GMV-560WM/B-X GMV-615WM/B-X

No CN851W16 CN851W16 CN851W16
Name of part Product Code Product Code Product Code
. 10 20 30
Part code Quantity Part code Quantity Part code Quantity
1 Rear Grill 01574100002 2 01574100002 2 01574100002 2
01264100006
2 Coping 1 01264100006P 1 01264100006P 1
P
3 Diversion Circle 10474100002 2 10474100002 2 10474100002 2
4 Axial Flow Fan 10434100002 2 10434100002 2 10434100002 2
5 Fan Motor 15704124 2 15704124 2 15704124 2
Nozzle for Adding
6 06120012 2 06120012 2 06120012 2
Freon
7 One way Valve 07335210 1 07335210 1 07335210 1
8 4-way Valve 43000412 1 43000412 1 43000412 1
9 Filter 07218603 1 07218603 1 07218603 1
Electromagnetic
10 43000054 4 43000054 4 43000054 4
Valve
11 Strainer 07415200002 6 07415200002 6 07415200002 6
Upper Cover Plate 01264100005
12 1 01264100005P 1 01264100005P 1
(back) P
01600150038
13 Rear Grill 1 016001500381 1 016001500381 1
1
011002500162 011002500162
01124100169
14 Condenser Assy 1 01 1 01 1
01
15 One Way Valve 07333700032 2 07333700032 2 07333700032 2

Gas-liquid
16 07424138 1 07424138 1 07424138 1
Separator
01194100070
17 Chassis Sub-assy 1 01194100070P 1 01194100070P 1
P
01205550002 012055500022 012055500022
18 Left Side Plate 1 1 1
2P P P
Plate-type Heat
19 00904100004 1 00904100004 1 00904100004 1
Exchanger
Electronic
20 07334412 1 07334412 1 07334412 1
Expansion Valve
21 Dry Filter 07218769 1 07218769 1 07218769 1
22 Gas Tube Filter 072190511 2 072190511 2 072190511 2
Electronic
23 07331139 1 07331139 1 07331139 1
Expansion Valve
24 Strainer 07210037 1 07210037 1 07210037 1
25 One way Valve 04324001 2 04324001 2 04324001 2
Discharge Charge
26 07334100002 2 07334100002 2 07334100002 2
Valve
27 Oil Separator 07424100023 2 07424100023 2 07424100023 2
28 Cut off Valve 07130239 2 07130239 2 07130239 2
29 Cut off Valve 07334100053 1 07334100053 1 07334100053 1
30 Cut off Valve 07334100011 1 07334100011 1 07334100011 1
31 Cut off Valve 07334100014 1 07334100014 1 07334100014 1
Pressure Protect
32 4602000911 1 4602000911 1 4602000911 1
Switch
33 Oil Separator 0742418601 1 0742418601 1 0742418601 1
Compressor and
34 00204100008 2 00204100008 2 00204100008 2
Fittings
35 Reactor Sub-assy 01394100449 1 01394100449 1 01394100449 1
36 Reactor 4313017403 2 4313017403 2 4313017403 2
228
01264100004
37 Top Cover (front) 2 01264100004P 2 01264100004P 2
P
01206250004 012062500040 012062500040
38 Left Front Panel 1 1 1
0P P P
39 Handle 26904100016 1 26904100016 1 26904100016 1
Electric expand
40 4304413203 1 4304413203 1 4304413203 1
valve fitting
Electric Expand
41 4304413204 1 4304413204 1 4304413204 1
Valve Fitting
42 Magnet Coil 4304000414 1 4304000414 1 4304000414 1
43 Magnet Coil 4304000440 1 4304000440 1 4304000440 1
44 Magnet Coil 4304000423 1 4304000423 1 4304000423 1
45 Magnet Coil 4300040030 1 4300040030 1 4300040030 1
46 Magnet Coil 4304000420 1 4304000420 1 4304000420 1
47 Pressure Sensor 32218000009 1 32218000009 1 32218000009 1
48 Pressure sensor 32218000008 1 32218000008 1 32218000008 1
Electric
49 Heater(Compress 7651540713 1 7651540713 1 7651540713 1
or)
Electric
50 Heater(Compress 7651540714 1 7651540714 1 7651540714 1
or)
Electrical
51 Heater(Compress 7651873209 1 7651873209 1 7651873209 1
or)
39008000102
52 Sensor Sub-assy 1 39008000102G 1 39008000102G 1
G
Pressure Protect
53 4602000912 1 4602000912 1 4602000912 1
Switch
01205650002 012056500021 012056500021
54 Right Side Plate 1 1 1
1P P P
55 Electric Box Assy 01394100426 1 01394100426 1 01394100426 1
56 Radiator 49018000001 2 49018000001 2 49018000001 2
57 Main Board 30223000032 2 30223000032 2 30223000032 2
58 Filter Board 30223000025 2 30223000025 2 30223000025 2
59 Terminal Board 42010247 1 42010247 1 42010247 1
60 Main Board 30223000041 1 30223000041 1 30223000041 1
Communication
61 30118000068 1 30118000068 1 30118000068 1
Interface Board
62 Terminal Board 42018000026 1 42018000026 1 42018000026 1
63 Terminal Board 42018000577 2 42018000577 2 42018000577 2
64 Main Board 30223000039 2 30223000039 2 30223000039 2
65 Radiator 49018000088 2 49018000088 2 49018000088 2
66 Radiator 49018000080 2 49018000080 2 49018000080 2
67 Electric Box Assy 01394100373 1 01394100373 1 01394100373 1
229
Ⅵ. Common Parameter Lists

1. R410a refrigerant pressure / saturation temperature list
Corresponding Corresponding Corresponding

Temperature Temperature Temperature
saturation pressure saturation pressure saturation pressure
(°C) (°C) (°C)
(BAR) (BAR) (BAR)
-43 1.54 -9 5.96 25 16.4
-42 1.61 -8 6.16 26 16.9
-41 1.68 -7 6.37 27 17.3
-40 1.76 -6 6.58 28 17.8
-39 1.84 -5 6.80 29 15.9
-38 1.93 -4 7.03 30 18.7
-37 2.02 -3 7.26 31 19.2
-36 2.11 -2 7.50 32 19.7
-35 2.24 -1 7.74 33 20.2
-34 2.33 0 7.99 34 20.7
-33 2.43 1 5.94 35 21.2
-32 2.53 2 8.50 36 21.7
-31 2.64 3 8.77 37 22.3
-30 2.75 4 9.04 38 22.8
-29 2.86 5 9.32 39 23.4
-28 2.98 6 9.61 40 24.0
-27 3.10 7 9.90 41 24.6
-26 3.22 8 10.2 42 25.2
-25 3.35 9 10.5 43 25.8
-24 3.48 10 10.8 44 26.4
-23 3.61 11 11.1 45 27.0
-22 3.75 12 11.5 46 27.7
-21 3.89 13 11.8 47 28.3
-20 4.04 14 12.1 48 29.0
-19 4.19 15 12.5 49 29.6
-18 4.35 16 12.8 50 30.3
-17 4.51 17 13.2 52 31.7
-16 4.67 18 13.6 54 33.2
-15 4.84 19 14.0 56 34.7
-14 5.02 20 14.4 58 36.3
-13 5.19 21 14.7 60 37.9
-12 5.38 22 15.2 62 40.17
-11 5.57 23 15.6 65 42.78
-10 5.76 24 16.015 67 44.57
2. Resistance / temperature lists of temperature sensors

2.1 Voltage list of 15 kΩ temperature sensors (including ODU and IDU temperature sensors)
Temperature (°C) Resistance (kΩ) Voltage (V) Temperature (°C) Resistance (kΩ) Voltage (V)
-20 144 0.311 71 2.523 2.825
-19 138.1 0.323 72 2.439 2.838
-18 128.6 0.345 73 2.358 2.852
-17 121.6 0.362 74 2.28 2.865
-16 115 0.381 75 2.205 2.877
-15 108.7 0.4 76 2.133 2.889
-14 102.9 0.42 77 2.064 2.901
-13 97.4 0.44 78 1.997 2.912
-12 92.22 0.462 79 1.933 2.923
-11 87.35 0.484 80 1.871 2.934
-10 82.75 0.506 81 1.811 2.945
-9 78.43 0.53 82 1.754 2.955
-8 74.35 0.554 83 1.699 2.964
-7 70.5 0.579 84 1.645 2.974
-6 66.88 0.605 85 1.594 2.983
-5 63.46 0.631 86 1.544 2.992
230
-4 60.23 0.658 87 1.497 3.001

-3 57.18 0.686 88 1.451 3.009
-2 54.31 0.714 89 1.408 3.017
-1 51.59 0.743 90 1.363 3.025
0 49.02 0.773 91 1.322 3.033
1 46.8 0.801 92 1.282 3.04
2 44.31 0.835 93 1.244 3.047
3 42.14 0.866 94 1.207 3.054
4 40.09 0.899 95 1.171 3.061
5 38.15 0.931 96 1.136 3.068
6 36.32 0.965 97 1.103 3.074
7 34.58 0.998 98 1.071 3.08
8 32.94 1.033 99 1.039 3.086
9 31.38 1.067 100 1.009 3.092
10 29.9 1.102 101 0.98 3.098
11 28.51 1.138 102 0.952 3.103
12 27.18 1.174 103 0.925 3.108
13 25.92 1.21 104 0.898 3.114
14 24.73 1.246 105 0.873 3.119
15 23.6 1.282 106 0.848 3.123
16 22.53 1.319 107 0.825 3.128
17 21.51 1.356 108 0.802 3.133
18 20.54 1.393 109 0.779 3.137
19 19.63 1.429 110 0.758 3.141
20 18.75 1.467 111 0.737 3.145
21 17.93 1.503 112 0.717 3.15
22 17.14 1.54 113 0.697 3.153
23 16.39 1.577 114 0.678 3.157
24 15.68 1.613 115 0.66 3.161
25 15 1.65 116 0.642 3.165
26 14.36 1.686 117 0.625 3.168
27 13.74 1.722 118 0.608 3.171
28 13.16 1.758 119 0.592 3.175
29 12.6 1.793 120 0.577 3.178
30 12.07 1.829 121 0.561 3.181
31 11.57 1.863 122 0.547 3.184
32 11.09 1.897 123 0.532 3.187
33 10.63 1.931 124 0.519 3.19
34 10.2 1.964 125 0.505 3.192
35 9.779 1.998 126 0.492 3.195
36 9.382 2.03 127 0.48 3.198
37 9.003 2.062 128 0.467 3.2
38 8.642 2.094 129 0.456 3.203
39 5.997 2.125 130 0.444 3.205
41 7.653 2.185 131 0.433 3.207
42 7.352 2.215 132 0.422 3.21
43 7.065 2.243 133 0.412 3.212
44 6.791 2.272 134 0.401 3.214
45 6.529 2.299 135 0.391 3.216
46 6.278 2.326 136 0.382 3.218
47 6.038 2.353 137 0.372 3.22
48 5.809 2.379 138 0.363 3.222
49 5.589 2.404 139 0.355 3.224
50 5.379 2.429 140 0.346 3.226
51 5.179 2.453 141 0.338 3.227
52 4.986 2.477 142 0.33 3.229
53 4.802 2.5 143 0.322 3.231
54 4.625 2.522 144 0.314 3.232
55 4.456 2.544 145 0.307 3.234
56 4.294 2.566 146 0.299 3.235
57 4.139 2.586 147 0.292 3.237
58 3.99 2.607 148 0.286 3.238
59 3.848 2.626 149 0.279 3.24
60 3.711 2.646 150 0.273 3.241
61 3.579 2.664 151 0.266 3.242
62 3.454 2.682 152 0.261 3.244
63 3.333 2.7 153 0.254 3.245
231
64 3.217 2.717 154 0.248 3.246

65 3.105 2.734 155 0.243 3.247
66 2.998 2.75 156 0.237 3.249
67 2.898 2.766 157 0.232 3.25
68 2.797 2.781 158 0.227 3.251
69 2.702 2.796 159 0.222 3.252
70 2.611 2.811 160 0.217 3.253
2.2 Voltage list of 20 kΩ pipeline temperature sensors (including temperature sensors for
defroster, sub-cooler, gas/liquid separator, and IDU suction and discharge pipes)
-30 361.8 0.173 66 3.998 2.75
-29 339.8 0.183 67 3.861 2.766
-28 319.2 0.195 68 3.729 2.781
-27 300 0.206 69 3.603 2.796
-26 282.2 0.218 70 3.481 2.811
-25 265.5 0.231 71 3.364 2.825
-24 249.9 0.245 72 3.252 2.838
-23 235.3 0.259 73 3.144 2.852
-22 221.6 0.273 74 3.04 2.865
-21 208.9 0.288 75 2.94 2.877
-20 196.9 0.304 76 2.844 2.889
-19 181.4 0.328 77 2.752 2.901
-18 171.4 0.345 78 2.663 2.912
-17 162.1 0.362 79 2.577 2.923
-16 153.3 0.381 80 2.495 2.934
-15 145 0.4 81 2.415 2.944
-14 137.2 0.42 82 2.339 2.954
-13 129.9 0.44 83 2.265 2.964
-12 123 0.462 84 2.194 2.974
-11 116.5 0.484 85 2.125 2.983
-10 110.3 0.507 86 2.059 2.992
-9 104.6 0.53 87 1.996 3.001
-8 99.13 0.554 88 1.934 3.009
-7 94 0.579 89 1.875 3.017
-6 89.17 0.605 90 1.818 3.025
-5 84.61 0.631 91 1.763 3.033
-4 80.31 0.658 92 1.71 3.04
-3 76.24 0.686 93 1.658 3.047
-2 72.41 0.714 94 1.609 3.054
-1 68.79 0.743 95 1.561 3.061
0 65.37 0.773 96 1.515 3.068
1 62.13 0.804 97 1.47 3.074
2 59.08 0.835 98 1.427 3.08
3 56.19 0.866 99 1.386 3.086
4 53.46 0.898 100 1.346 3.092
5 50.87 0.931 101 1.307 3.098
6 48.42 0.965 102 1.269 3.103
7 46.11 0.998 103 1.233 3.108
8 43.92 1.033 104 1.198 3.114
9 41.84 1.067 105 1.164 3.119
10 39.87 1.102 106 1.131 3.123
11 38.01 1.138 107 1.099 3.128
12 36.24 1.174 108 1.069 3.133
13 34.57 1.209 109 1.039 3.137
14 32.98 1.246 110 1.01 3.141
15 31.47 1.282 111 0.9825 3.145
16 30.04 1.319 112 0.9556 3.15
17 28.68 1.356 113 0.9295 3.153
18 27.39 1.393 114 0.9043 3.157
19 26.17 1.429 115 0.8799 3.161
20 25.01 1.466 116 0.8562 3.165
21 23.9 1.503 117 0.8333 3.168
22 22.85 1.54 118 0.8111 3.171
232
23 21.85 1.577 119 0.7895 3.175

24 20.9 1.614 120 0.7687 3.178
25 20 1.65 121 0.7485 3.181
26 19.14 1.686 122 0.7289 3.184
27 18.32 1.722 123 0.7099 3.187
28 17.55 1.758 124 0.6915 3.19
29 16.8 1.793 125 0.6736 3.192
30 16.1 1.828 126 0.6563 3.195
31 15.43 1.863 127 0.6395 3.198
32 14.79 1.897 128 0.6232 3.2
33 14.18 1.931 129 0.6074 3.203
34 13.59 1.965 130 0.5921 3.205
35 13.04 1.998 131 0.5772 3.207
36 12.51 2.03 132 0.5627 3.21
37 12 2.063 133 0.5487 3.212
38 11.52 2.094 134 0.5351 3.214
39 11.06 2.125 135 0.5219 3.216
40 10.62 2.155 136 0.509 3.218
41 10.2 2.185 137 0.4966 3.22
42 9.803 2.215 138 0.4845 3.222
43 9.42 2.243 139 0.4727 3.224
44 9.054 2.272 140 0.4613 3.226
45 8.705 2.299 141 0.4502 3.227
46 8.37 2.326 142 0.4394 3.229
47 8.051 2.353 143 0.4289 3.231
48 7.745 2.379 144 0.4187 3.232
49 7.453 2.404 145 0.4088 3.234
50 7.173 2.429 146 0.3992 3.235
51 6.905 2.453 147 0.3899 3.237
52 6.648 2.477 148 0.3808 3.238
53 6.403 2.5 149 0.3719 3.24
54 6.167 2.522 150 0.3633 3.241
55 5.942 2.544 151 0.3549 3.242
56 5.726 2.565 152 0.3468 3.244
57 5.519 2.586 153 0.3389 3.245
58 5.32 2.607 154 0.3312 3.246
59 5.13 2.626 155 0.3237 3.247
60 4.948 2.646 156 0.3164 3.249
61 4.773 2.664 157 0.3093 3.25
62 4.605 2.682 158 0.3024 3.251
63 4.443 2.7 159 0.2956 3.252
64 4.289 2.717 160 0.2891 3.253
65 4.14 2.734
2.3 Voltage list of 50 kΩ discharge temperature sensors (including top temperature sensor, and
discharge air temperature sensor)
-30 911.56 0.036 61 11.736 1.518
-29 853.66 0.038 62 11.322 1.548
-28 799.98 0.041 63 10.925 1.577
-27 750.18 0.043 64 10.544 1.606
-26 703.92 0.046 65 10.178 1.635
-25 660.93 0.049 66 9.8269 1.664
-24 620.94 0.052 67 9.4896 1.693
-23 583.72 0.056 68 9.1655 1.722
-22 549.04 0.059 69 8.9542 1.741
-21 516.71 0.063 70 8.5551 1.778
-20 486.55 0.066 71 5.9676 1.806
-19 458.4 0.07 72 7.9913 1.834
-18 432.1 0.075 73 7.7257 1.862
-17 407.51 0.079 74 7.4702 1.889
-16 384.51 0.084 75 7.2245 1.916
-15 362.99 0.088 76 6.9882 1.943
-14 342.83 0.094 77 6.7608 1.969
233
-13 323.94 0.099 78 6.542 1.995

-12 306.23 0.104 79 6.3315 2.021
-11 289.61 0.11 80 6.1288 2.046
-10 274.02 0.116 81 5.9336 2.071
-9 259.37 0.123 82 5.7457 2.096
-8 245.61 0.129 83 5.5647 2.12
-7 232.67 0.136 84 5.3903 2.144
-6 220.5 0.143 85 5.2223 2.168
-5 209.05 0.151 86 5.0605 2.191
-4 195.97 0.158 87 4.9044 2.214
-3 188.12 0.167 88 4.7541 2.237
-2 178.65 0.175 89 4.6091 2.259
-1 169.68 0.184 90 4.4693 2.281
0 161.02 0.193 91 4.3345 2.302
1 153 0.202 92 4.2044 2.323
2 145.42 0.212 93 4.0789 2.344
3 135.96 0.223 94 3.9579 2.364
4 131.5 0.233 95 3.841 2.384
5 126.17 0.242 96 3.7283 2.404
6 119.08 0.256 97 3.6194 2.423
7 113.37 0.267 98 3.5143 2.442
8 107.96 0.28 99 3.4128 2.46
9 102.85 0.292 100 3.3147 2.478
10 98.006 0.306 101 3.22 2.496
11 93.42 0.319 102 3.1285 2.514
12 89.075 0.333 103 3.0401 2.531
13 84.956 0.348 104 2.9547 2.547
14 81.052 0.362 105 2.8721 2.564
15 77.349 0.378 106 2.7922 2.58
16 73.896 0.393 107 2.715 2.595
17 70.503 0.41 108 2.6404 2.611
18 67.338 0.427 109 2.5682 2.626
19 64.333 0.444 110 2.4983 2.64
20 61.478 0.462 111 2.4308 2.655
21 58.766 0.48 112 2.3654 2.669
22 56.189 0.499 113 2.3021 2.682
23 53.738 0.518 114 2.2409 2.696
24 51.408 0.537 115 2.1816 2.709
25 49.191 0.558 116 2.1242 2.722
26 47.082 0.578 117 2.0686 2.734
27 45.074 0.599 118 2.0148 2.747
28 43.163 0.621 119 1.9626 2.759
29 41.313 0.643 120 1.9123 2.77
30 39.61 0.665 121 1.8652 2.781
31 37.958 0.688 122 1.8158 2.793
32 36.384 0.711 123 1.7698 2.804
33 34.883 0.735 124 1.7253 2.814
34 33.453 0.759 125 1.6821 2.825
35 32.088 0.784 126 1.6402 2.835
36 30.787 0.809 127 1.5996 2.845
37 29.544 0.835 128 1.5602 2.855
38 28.359 0.86 129 1.522 2.864
39 27.227 0.886 130 1.485 2.873
40 26.147 0.913 131 1.449 2.882
41 25.114 0.94 132 1.4141 2.891
42 24.128 0.967 133 1.3803 2.9
43 23.186 0.994 134 1.3474 2.908
44 22.286 1.022 135 1.3155 2.916
45 21.425 1.05 136 1.2846 2.924
46 20.601 1.078 137 1.2545 2.932
47 19.814 1.107 138 1.2233 2.94
48 19.061 1.136 139 1.1969 2.947
49 18.34 1.164 140 1.1694 2.955
50 17.651 1.193 141 1.1476 2.96
51 16.99 1.223 142 1.1166 2.969
52 16.358 1.252 143 1.0913 2.975
53 15.753 1.281 144 1.0667 2.982
234
54 15.173 1.311 145 1.0429 2.988

55 14.618 1.34 146 1.0197 2.995
56 14.085 1.37 147 0.9971 3.001
57 13.575 1.4 148 0.9752 3.007
58 13.086 1.429 149 0.9538 3.013
59 12.617 1.459 150 0.9331 3.018
60 12.368 1.475
3. Voltage / pressure lists of pressure sensors

3.1 High-pressure sensor (R410a)
Temperature (°C) Absolute pressure (kPa) Voltage (V) Temperature (°C) Absolute pressure (kPa) Voltage (V)
-40 176 0.102 16 1300 1.3

-39 184 0.111 17 1337 1.34
-38 193 0.12 18 1375 1.38
-37 202 0.13 19 1413 1.421
-36 211 0.139 20 1453 1.463
-35 220 0.149 21 1493 1.506
-34 230 0.16 22 1535 1.551
-33 240 0.17 23 1577 1.596
-32 250 0.181 24 1620 1.641
-31 261 0.193 25 1664 1.688
-30 273 0.206 26 1708 1.735
-29 283 0.216 27 1754 1.784
-28 295 0.229 28 1801 1.834
-27 307 0.242 29 1848 1.884
-26 319 0.255 30 1897 1.937
-25 332 0.268 31 1946 1.989
-24 345 0.282 32 1996 2.042
-23 359 0.297 33 2048 2.098
-22 373 0.312 34 2100 2.153
-21 388 0.328 35 2153 2.21
-20 403 0.344 36 2208 2.268
-19 418 0.36 37 2263 2.327
-18 434 0.377 38 2320 2.388
-17 450 0.394 39 2377 2.448
-16 467 0.412 40 2436 2.511
-15 484 0.43 41 2495 2.574
-14 502 0.45 42 2556 2.639
-13 520 0.469 43 2618 2.705
-12 538 0.488 44 2681 2.772
-11 558 0.509 45 2745 2.841
-10 577 0.53 46 2810 2.91
-9 597 0.551 47 2876 2.98
-8 618 0.573 48 2944 3.053
-7 639 0.596 49 3013 3.126
-6 661 0.619 50 3083 3.201
-5 684 0.644 51 3154 3.277
-4 707 0.668 52 3226 3.353
-3 730 0.693 53 3300 3.432
-2 754 0.718 54 3374 3.511
-1 779 0.745 55 3450 3.592
0 804 0.772 56 3528 3.675
1 830 0.799 57 3606 3.759
2 857 0.828 58 3686 3.844
3 884 0.857 59 3767 3.93
4 912 0.887 60 3849 4.018
5 940 0.917 61 3932 4.106
6 969 0.947 62 4017 4.197
7 999 0.979 63 4103 4.288
8 1030 1.012 64 4190 4.381
9 1061 1.046 65 4278 4.475
10 1093 1.08 66 4367 4.57
11 1125 1.114 67 4457 4.666
235
12 1159 1.15 68 4548 4.763

13 1193 1.186 69 4639 4.86
14 1228 1.224 70 4731 4.958
15 1263 1.261 71 4893 5.13
3.2 Low-pressure sensor (R410a)
Temperature Absolute pressure Voltage Temperature Absolute pressure Voltage

(°C) (kPa) (V) (°C) (kPa) (V)
-70 36 0.369 -14 502 1.301
-69 38 0.373 -13 520 1.337
-68 40 0.377 -12 538 1.373
-67 43 0.383 -11 558 1.413
-66 46 0.389 -10 577 1.451
-65 48 0.393 -9 597 1.491
-64 51 0.399 -8 618 1.533
-63 54 0.405 -7 639 1.575
-62 57 0.411 -6 661 1.619
-61 61 0.419 -5 684 1.665
-60 64 0.425 -4 707 1.711
-59 68 0.433 -3 730 1.757
-58 72 0.441 -2 754 1.805
-57 76 0.449 -1 799 1.895
-56 80 0.457 0 804 1.905
-55 84 0.465 1 830 1.957
-54 89 0.475 2 857 2.011
-53 94 0.485 3 884 2.065
-52 99 0.495 4 912 2.121
-51 104 0.505 5 940 2.177
-50 109 0.515 6 969 2.235
-49 115 0.527 7 999 2.295
-48 121 0.539 8 1030 2.357
-47 127 0.551 9 1061 2.419
-46 133 0.563 10 1096 2.489
-45 140 0.577 11 1125 2.547
-44 146 0.589 12 1159 2.615
-43 154 0.605 13 1193 2.683
-42 161 0.619 14 1228 2.753
-41 168 0.633 15 1263 2.823
-40 176 0.649 16 1300 2.897
-39 184 0.665 17 1337 2.971
-38 193 0.683 18 1375 3.047
-37 202 0.701 19 1413 3.123
-36 211 0.719 20 1453 3.203
-35 220 0.737 21 1493 3.283
-34 230 0.757 22 1535 3.367
-33 240 0.777 23 1577 3.451
-32 250 0.797 24 1620 3.537
-31 261 0.819 25 1664 3.625
-30 272 0.841 26 1708 3.713
-29 283 0.863 27 1754 3.805
-28 295 0.887 28 1801 3.899
-27 307 0.911 29 1848 3.993
-26 319 0.935 30 1897 4.091
-25 332 0.961 31 1946 4.189
-24 345 0.987 32 1996 4.289
-23 359 1.015 33 2048 4.393
-22 373 1.043 34 2100 4.497
-21 388 1.073 35 2153 4.603
-20 403 1.103 36 2208 4.713
-19 418 1.133 37 2263 4.823
-18 434 1.165 38 2320 4.937
-17 450 1.197 39 2377 5.051
-16 467 1.231 40 2439 5.175
-15 484 1.265
236
Chapter 5 Remote Control

Part 1 Engineering Debugger
1. Overview
With quick increase of comprehensive constructions and large buildings, central air conditioning systems
of the buildings are not only increased in number and diversified in model but also sparsely distributed,
which makes centralized management and maintenance difficult to realize. Gree Debugger, integrated
with electronic communication technology and PC software technology, helps monitor, control, and
debug central air conditioning units all round, making sparse distribution not an issue and realizing
centralized control and management. Managers, needless to go to the site to set and manage all units,
can perform running state query, unit start/stop, temperature adjustment, and other operations using a
PC, improving working efficiency and reducing manpower, material, and management input.
At present, Gree Debugger can be used to comprehensively monitor and control Gree multi units. So
long as users have a PC, they can monitor and control air conditioning units through the software. Gree
Debugger is an effective intelligent management tool for air conditioning systems and also a tool for
engineering setup and after-sale debugging. With Gree Debugger, users can debug air conditioners on
site, understand units' running state, and conveniently analyze units' health conditions, not only
improving users' working efficiency and reducing maintenance difficulty and cost but also improving
customers' service quality and speed.
2. System Networking
Gree Debugger is applicable to both single-system network and multi-system network. In a

single-system network, the software can control both IDUs and ODUs. In a multi-system network,
however, the software can control the master ODU only.
2.1 Composition of System Network
From the network topology, it can be seen that Gree debugging network is composed of three parts:
Control PC part in the monitor room, including Gree Debugger and USB Converter Driver installed in the
PCs.
USB data conversion part, mainly converts air conditioning units' communication mode into PC
recognizable mode. Devices include USB data converters and USB data lines.
Air conditioning unit part, mainly composed of air conditioning units, including ODUs, IDUs, and lines. If
the lines are not long enough, the transfer board accompanied with Gree Debugger can help connect the
lines together. In a single-system network, the converter can be connected to an IDU or an ODU. In a
multi-system network, however, the converter can be connected to a master ODU only.
237
3. Hardware
3.1 List of Parts
Name Type BOM Remark
Converts unit
communication mode
USB data converter ME40-00/B 30118000001
into PC recognizable
communication mode
This disk contains the
Gree Debugger, monitor
Debugger suite (disk) DE40-33/A(C) 36400000003 software, USB driver,
and USB converter
configuration software
A line connecting a PC with
USB data line \ 40020082 the converter over the USB
interface
This board serves to
connect units with control
COM interface board \ 30118015
PCs when they are too
distant to communicate
A 4-core line connecting
Connecting line (1 m) \ 4001023229
units with the converter
A 4-core line connecting
Connecting line (5.5 m) \ 4001023214
units with the converter
User manual \ 64134100023 Instructions
3.2 USB Data Converter

3.2.1 Function
The USB data converter converts communication mode of the air conditioning units, for example, RS485,
HBS, and CAN into a mode that is recognizable through PC's USB interface.
3.2.2 Appearance
238
239
3.2.3 LEDs and Interfaces

Power LED: a red LED. When it is on, it indicates that the converter is normally supplied with power;
when it is off, it indicates that the converter's power supply is abnormal.
Communication LEDs: two yellow LEDs. When a PC is delivering data, the data transmitting LED will
flash; when an air conditioning unit is uploading data to the PC, the data receiving LED will flash.
Function LEDs: three green LEDs:
If the RS485 to USB LED is steady on, it indicates that the converter is working in RS485 mode.
If the CAN to USB LED is steady on, it indicates that the converter is working in CAN mode.
If the HBS to USB LED is steady on, it indicates that the converter is working in HBS mode.
USB interface: connects to a USB data line.
CAN interface: When air conditioners work in CAN mode, they are connected to the converter over this
CAN interface. This interface is not distinguished by polarity. Thus, the two contacts C1 and C2 can be
used interchangeably.
HBS interface: When air conditioners work in HBS mode, they are connected to the converter over this
HBS interface. This interface is not distinguished by polarity. At present, Gree Debugger and monitor
software do not support this interface.
240
RS485 interface: When air conditioners work in RS485 mode, they are connected to the converter over
this RS485 interface. This interface is distinguished by polarity. Thus, the two contacts A and B cannot
be used interchangeably.
3.2.4 Precautions
The converter should be installed indoors and prevented from being hit. It is recommended that the
converter is installed in the monitor room with PCs.
The converter does not need to be connected to a power supply. It is powered by the PC via the USB
interface.
3.3 COM Interface Board
This board mainly transfers data. Providing a transfer function, the board serves to connect units with
control PCs when they are too distant to communicate.
3.4 Lines
3.4.1 USB Data Line
A USB data line is connecting to a USB interface of a PC at one end and to another USB interface of a
converter at the other end. See the following figure:
3.4.2 Connecting Line

Gree Debugger is accompanied with two lines: 1 m and 5.5 m. They are completely the same except the
length. The line is connecting to the COM interface of an air conditioning unit at one end and to the CAN
interface of a converter at the other end, as shown in the following figure. The air conditioning unit can be
either an IDU or an ODU.
Connecting line
4. Software Setup
4.1 Prerequisites
4.1.1 PC Configuration
Memory Min: 1 GB
Recommended: 2 GB or larger
Hardware 10 GB available
CPU Core 2 or later versions
Min: 1 GHz
241
Recommended: 2 GHz or higher

OS Windows Server 2003 SP3 or later versions
Windows XP SP3 or later versions
Windows Vista
Windows 7
4.1.2 Running the Disk
Make sure you have the administrator permission and the PC has been configured with a driver. Put the
disk into the driver. If it is running automatically, the following page will appear. If not, double click the
―Launcher.exe‖ file to display the page.
If it is the first time to use Gree Debugger, the following software needs to be installed: .Net Framework 4.0,
USB Converter Driver, Access Driver (required for versions earlier than Office 2007), and Gree
Debugger.
4.2 Installation Flowchart
242
Start
No
Yes
Install Access
Driver
No
Yes
Install .Net
Framework 4.0
Install Gree
Debugger
No
Yes
Install USB
Converter Driver
No
Yes
Install Gree USB
data converter
configuration software
End
This is a simplified software setup procedure. For details, read the following section.
4.3 Installation Procedure
4.3.1 Installing .Net Framework 4.0
If your PC has been installed with .Net Framework 4.0 or later version, skip this step. Otherwise, click
―Install .Net Framework 4.0‖.
Loading file.
243
Check ―I have read and accept the license terms‖ and click ―Install‖.
Installing.
244
Click ―Finish‖.
245
4.3.2 Installing Access Driver

Before the Gree Debugger can run, install the Access Driver (required for versions earlier than Office
2007). Click ―Install Access Driver‖.
Click ―Next‖.
246
Check ―I accept the terms in the License Agreement‖ and click ―Next‖.
247
Click ―Browse‖ to select a path. If you want to use the default path, click ―Install‖.
Installing.
248
Click ―OK‖.
4.3.3 Installing Gree Debugger

Before installing Gree Debugger, make sure your PC has been installed with .Net Framework 4.0 or later
version. Click ―Install Gree Debugger‖.
249
Click ―Next‖.
Click ―Browse‖ to select a path. If you want to use the default path, click ―Next‖.
250
Click ―Next‖.
Installing.
251
Click ―Close‖.
252
5. Using Debugger
5.1 Major Functions
5.1.1 One-Click Engineering Debug
Engineering debug personnel can use this software to debug units based on engineering debug logic by
one-click operation. The minute you deliver a debug command through the software, units begin
automatic debug step by step. When the units pass debug of a step, the step is automatically checked
green. If they fail this step, it will be checked red.
5.1.2 All-Round Monitor and Health Analysis
All-round monitor on the air conditioning systems, including functions, devices, and parts is supported.
Intuitive and clear display facilitates users to understand running of the entire systems and units.
5.1.3 Real-Time Control and Running Mode Adjustment
Air conditioner operation time and requirement on the air conditioners vary with geographical locations.
Users can adjust parameters of air conditioning units through a PC based on the actual situation of an
area, including start/stop, temperature, airflow speed, and mode. Gree Debugger also enables users to
set and query parameters for ODUs and gateways.
5.1.4 Other Functions
Gree Debugger also instructs users to connect units, and allows users to capture screens, open
database files, rebuild database, and modify database file saving path.
5.2 How to Use Gree Debugger
5.2.1 Viewing Unit Parameters
Run Gree Debugger.
On the initial page, select a language and unit. If you want to use default settings, click ―OK‖ to enable
Gree Debugger.
Select a language.
253
Select a unit.
If units you want to monitor have been connected and normally communicating, and COM interface and
protocol are set, click ―Connect‖ to access the parameter page. If not, follow the figure below to connect
the units.
254
Set COM interface. Gree Debugger will automatically detect available serial ports of your PC. You can
select one of them.
255
Set protocol. This is to choose a communication mode of your air conditioning units. At present, CAN is
the proper communication mode.
Click ―Connect‖. If units can be in normal communication with the PC, Gree Debugger will switch over to
the parameter page. Otherwise, Gree Debugger shows it is being connecting.
256
The following figure shows the compositions of the parameter page. You can click and to hide
the unit information area and system information area. Within the IDU information area and fault
information area, you can drag. Within the outdoor module information area, you can choose to show
one module only (by default, two modules are displayed at the same time in the proportion of 3:1). The
257
menu bar can also be hidden by clicking . In the status bar, current sampling time and total sampling
time are shown.
Menu bar
Title bar
Fault information
System information
Outdoor module information
Unit information
IDU information
Status bar
In the unit information area, you can choose to view any unit to be monitored.
5.2.2 Engineering Debug

Click ―Debug‖ in the menu bar to switch over to the engineering debug page. Units will automatically
execute debug steps one after another based on the order of steps on the page. Note that the debug
function can be used for single-system network only.
258
Click ―Start‖ to enable Gree Debugger and units automatically debug. indicates a currently
debugging step and indicates a successfully debugged step.
Steps that have the ―OK‖ button available enable users to continue further debug. Click and
corresponding debug information will be shown, enabling you to determine whether to continue debug.
259
Click ―Close‖ to close the information. For step 3 ―Confirm ODU Basic Module NO.‖ and step 4 ―Confirm
IDU NO.‖, quantity of units debugged will be shown; for step 8 ―Compr. Preheat Confirmation‖,
preheating time will be shown. See the following figures.
The icon indicates that corresponding step failed and a fault exists. In this case, users need to
rectify the fault first. After the issue is addressed, Gree Debugger automatically continues the debug
procedure if there is not an ―OK‖ button available; otherwise, users should click ―OK‖ to confirm. Click
and corresponding debug information will be shown, helping you analyze the fault. Click ―Close‖ to close
the information.
260
During debugging, if you click ―Stop‖, the debug is interrupted. Click ―Start‖ to continue debug. When
debug goes on to step 10 ―ODU Valves Check Before Startup‖, ―Back‖ and ―Skip‖ are available. If this
step fails, you can go back to step 9. Click ―OK‖ of step 9 to continue step 10. If the failure is U6 fault
(valve exception alarm), click ―Skip‖ to skip this step. For other fault causes, this button is greyed out.
261
Steps 11, 13, and 14 are reserved. Steps 13 to 16 are concurrent steps. That is, only one of them will be
executed at one time.
When ―Project Debug Completion‖ is checked green, the engineering debug is finished.
5.2.3 Controlling Units

In the menu bar, choose ―Setting‖ -> ―Parameter Settings‖. Shortcut menus ―Gateway Settings‖, ―IDU
Settings‖, ―System Settings‖, ―Project Number Conflict‖, and ―System Historical Info‖ are available.
Select one of them to set. Note that if project number of an IDU conflicts, other options will be greyed out.
In this case, you need to set the ―Project Number Conflict‖ parameter to solve the conflict.
262
If you select ―IDU Settings‖, the following dialog box will appear.
Check desired IDUs from the IDU Selection area. You can also click ―Select All‖ or ―Select Inverted‖ to
check the IDUs. Parameter information of selected IDUs will be shown in the Settings area. Click ―Set…‖
and click in the displayed dialog box to select. After you click ―Set‖, the page will be updated to
show the selected value.
263
5.2.4 Other Functions

Capturing screen
To capture a screen, click ―Capture Screen‖ in the menu bar. If you want to open the screen, click
―Open‖.
264
Searching for database files

To search for database files, click "Open Data Folder" to open the default folder that is saving database
files.
265
Changing pressure value

Choose ―Others‖ -> ―Display Settings‖. In the displayed dialog box, you can set ―High Low Pressure
Value‖ and ―Refrigerant Type‖. If you set ―High Low Pressure Value‖ to ―Temperature‖, the pressure
parameter is changed to temperature; if you set ―High Low Pressure Value‖ to ―Pressure‖, the pressure
value is shown. The value of ―Refrigerant Type‖ affects the pressure value.
266
Saving multi-system data

Choose ―Others‖ -> ―Database Save Settings‖. For a multi-system network, you need to specify a system
to save unit data. Since data volume of a multi-system network is large, you can select only a suite of
system data to save.
267
Changing database saving path and rebuilding database

―Change Database Saving Path‖ and ―Rebuild Database‖ must be configured before Gree Debugger
runs. Choose ―Others‖ -> ―Change Database Saving Path‖. In the displayed dialog box, click ―Browse‖ to
select a path. Choose ―Others‖ -> ―Rebuild Database‖ to rebuild database. If Gree Debugger has run,
you can stop the software and return to the connection page to operate.
268
269
6. Software Debug
6.1 Debug Flowchart
This is a simplified software debug procedure. For details, read the following section.
6.2 Troubleshooting
6.2.1 Installation
A fault occurs during Gree Debugger setup.
After you click ―Install Gree Debugger‖ to run, the following prompt is displayed.
Cause:
The .Net Framework 4.0 is not installed.
Troubleshooting:
Install .Net Framework 4.0 first and then install Gree Debugger.
Part 2 Remote Control

Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System is an Internet- or LAN-based remote automation and centralized
management system, a smart energy management system, and an all-round solution to air conditioning
systems, providing remote control, fault alarm, visualized management and other functions, enabling
users to manage air conditioning units in a real time, safe, and effective way.
Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System helps users reduce manpower input and management cost.
270
Through a browser (for example, IE, Firefox, or Chrome), users, wherever they are, can control air
conditioners of a building over Internet, including running state query, unit start/stop, and temperature
setting.
GMV5 remote monitoring system supports Modbus and BACnet gateways, which can be selected based
on actual situations.
Modbus Gateway Remote Monitoring System
1. Major Functions
Visualized management
Centralized control
Energy management
Monitoring running state of central air conditioners
Fault alarm
Setting running parameters of units
2. Terms and Definitions
Server: A PC for installing Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System and providing remote monitoring and
data collection services.
Client: A PC for users to access server resources. Through the browser installed on this PC, users can
access Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System of the server to perform unit control, data display, and
management functions.
3. Network Topology of Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System
Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System relies on Modbus gateways (model, for example, ME30-24/E4(M))
to communicate with software. The software, gateways, and air conditioning units are combined into a
system network. See the following figure:
271
Either Gree Web-based Remote Monitoring
and Control System or BMS
Internet
BMS
Gree Web-based
Remote Monitoring
and Control System
(server side)
Other device Lighting Fire Vent Lift Electricity
Gree Web-based Remote
Monitoring and Control System RS232-RS485
(client side) R1 Converter
Modbus bus L1
L2 System 1
L3
CAN2 bus
……
CAN2 bus
Modbus gateway 1
Master outdoor unit Indoor unit
Indoor unit
To the next Slave outdoor unit

Slave outdoor unit
system
L2
L1
System 16
Modbus bus
L3
……
Master outdoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
Slave outdoor unit CAN2 Network 1
L2 System 1
CAN2 bus L3
……
Modbus gateway 2
Master outdoor unit
L2
CAN2 bus
Slave outdoor unit Slave outdoor unit Slave outdoor unit
System 2
Modbus bus
……
Modbus gateway 3 Indoor unit

Mater outdoor unit
To the next Slave outdoor unit CAN2 Network 2

system
To next
Modbus
gateway
L1
L2 System 1
CAN2 bus
L3
……
L2
Modbus gateway 255 Master outdoor unit
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
To the next
system Slave outdoor unit
272
Composition of the System Network

The network is composed of three parts:
Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System of the monitor network, including an RS232-485 Optoelectronic
Isolated Converter.
Modbus gateways: They serve to bridge air conditioning unit network with the monitor network and
transmit data between the networks. Each Modbus gateway is configured with an address (realized
through an 8-bit DIP switch); value range: 1~255. Each gateway address within a system must be
unique.
Air conditioning unit network.
Note
A serial port for the monitor network can be connected to up to 255 Modbus gateways.
Modbus bus: L1 represents the Modbus bus which can support up to 255 Modbus gateways.
CAN2 bus: L2 represents the CAN2 bus which is the link to the Modbus gateway and the master
ODU.
CAN2 network: in one CAN2 network, a maximum of 16 air conditioning systems and 255 IDUs
are allowed. If exceeded, the CAN2 network should be divided into two.
Air conditioning system: one air conditioning system consists of at most four ODUs (among
them one is the master unit) as well as the matched IDUs.
Allowable number accessible to the gateway: one Modbus gateway can support at most 16 air
conditioing systems (each system includes at most 4 ODUs) and the total maximum allowable
IDUs is 128. If exceeded, another Modbus gateway will be required as shown in CAN2 Network 2.
1.4 Hardware
1.4.1 List of Parts
Name Type BOM Supply Remark
Range
Interconnect with remote
monitoring system:
Protocol interface: Modbus
RTU
Remote Hardware interface: RS485
Modbus monitoring part Baud rate: 9600
MC20000060 SC
Start bit: 1
gateway suite ME30-24/E4(M) Data bits: 8
Parity bit: none
Stop bit: 1
Main fittings: Modbus gateway,
instruction
For communication bus, set a
Optoelectronic Optoelectronic
repeater every 800 m; for
isolated isolated repeater EN02200010 Optional
Modbus gateways, add a
repeater RS485-W
repeater every 30 gateways.
Optoelectronic Optoelectronic EN02200020 This converter is required only
isolated isolated converter Optional when remote monitoring
converter GD02 systems work in RS232 mode.
/ Prepared
Control cabinet /
by users
1.4.2 Modbus Gateway

1.4.2.1 Functions
GREE Modbus gateways for the central air conditioning system are used to bridge the internal network
of the air conditioning system (CANbus) and the monitoring network (Modbus). It will provide the Gree
web-based remote monitoring and control system/BMS communication interfaces and is enabled to take
the real-time monitoring and the long-distance control to the air conditioning system. Also, it will provide
the Modbus RTU protocol, five digital inputs and five digital outputs, among which the DI1 is defined for
the fire alarm input (when the fire alarm signal is input, the Modbus gateway will stop the air conditioning
system immediately).
273
Running Alarm Power
Address
Function
Gateway
Power input
274
(1) Interface Drawing
CAN interface, for

communication
with air conditioning units Running Alarm Power
Address
Digital
input (DI)
Function
RS485-1 interface, for

communication with
Gree Web-based
Remote Monitoring and
Digital
Control System/BMS
output (DO)
Gateway
Power input
Power input
(2) Power Supply Interfaces
CAN Interface: It is connected to the air conditioning system through twisted pairs so as to get
through the communication between the Modbus gateway and the air conditioning system.
RS485-1 Interface: It is connected to Gree Web-based Remote Monitoring and Control
System/BMS through twisted pairs so as to get through the communication between the Modbus
gateway and the Gree Web-based Remote Monitoring and Control System/BMS.
RS485-2 Interface: it is reserved.
275
1.4.2.2 Hardware Installation

98.5mm
Running Alarm Power
Address
Function
296mm
Gateway
Power input
177mm
56mm
Length x Width x Height: 296 x 177 x 56 (mm)
The Modbus gateway should be located inside the electric cabinet, hung up with the front side facing
upwards and fixed with four bolts. See the following figure for the required clearance (only for reference).
50mm
Fixed with 98.5mm

four bolts
296mm
Hung up with
the front side
facing upward
Cable trough
Cable trough
120mm Gateway
120mm 120mm Gateway
120mm 120mm Gateway
120mm
177mm Electric cabinet
Power input
The power input should be 100VAC-240VAC, 50/60Hz.
Do not touch the input port of the power supply when the gateway is energized.
Modbus gateway is recommended to install near air conditioning units so as to shorten their
communication distance. The maximum allowable communication distance of them is 500 m. For
the communication distance between Modbus gateway and Gree CAC Remote Monitoring
System/BMS system, we can use optoelectronic isolated repeaters for expansion.
The power lines and communication lines of Modbus gateways should be laid separately; otherwise,
Modbus gateways may become faulty. In the preceding figure, the thin dotted line indicates
communication lines and the thick dotted line indicates strong current lines; they are for reference
only.
Control cabinets should be designed to satisfy Modbus gateways both in number and layout as well
276
as location.
Each Modbus gateway should be supplied with power independently. Therefore, you should install
as many 220V AC power sockets as possible in the control cabinet. It is not allowed to connect
multiple Modbus gateways to a same power socket.
Make sure to keep at least 15 cm between communication lines and strong current lines. It is
forbidden to bind them together. If their distance is less than 15 cm, put them into shield tubes
respectively to prevent electromagnetic disturbance.
The control cabinet must be installed indoors. Avoid knock or exposure to sunshine or rain. It should
be locked as well to avoid body contact.
1.4.2.3 Communication System Installation
The Modbus gateway works to get through the communication
(1) Between the Modbus gateway and the Gree Web-based Remote Monitoring and Control
System/BMS.
(2) Between the Modbus gateway and the air conditioning system.
1. Selection of Communication Lines
(1) Communication lines between the Modbus gateway and the Gree Web-based Remote Monitoring
and Control System/BMS
Type Size Applicable Standard Remarks

An optoelectronic repeater is required
Category five 24AWG
TIA/EIA-568-A when the communication distance is
twisted pairs (2  0.6 mm)
more than 800 m.
(2) Communication lines between the Modbus gateway and the air conditioning system
Wire
Length Applicable
Type Gauge Remarks
(m) 2 Standard
(mm )
1. If the wire diameter is enlarged to 2 × 1
Light/Ordinary mm2, the total communication line
polyvinyl length can reach 800 m.
chloride
L  500
 IEC 2. The cord shall be Circular cord (the
sheathed cord. 2  0.75 60227-5:2007 cores shall be twisted together).
(60227 IEC 52 3.If unit is installed in places with intense
/60227 IEC 53) magnetic field or strong interference, it is
necessary to use shielded wire.
Note: The length of the CAN2 bus connecting the Modbus gateway with master ODUs should not
exceed 500 m, as shown in the following figure:
Max.: 500 m
CAN2 bus
……
ODU system 1 ODU system 2 ODU system n Modbus gateway

Master ODU Master ODU Master ODU
―n‖ (n≤16) represents the quantity of the air conditioning systems.
2. Connection of Communication Lines

Precaution
Only serial connection is allowed for all communication lines of the Modbus gateway. The star
connection is prohibited.
(1) Communication lines between the Modbus gateway and the Gree Web-based remote monitoring and
control system/BMS
277
Gree Remote Monitoring

System/BMS System
Gree Remote Monitoring

System/BMS System
……
(2) Communication lines between the Modbus gateway and the air conditioning system
……
ODU system 1 ODU system 2 ODU system…… n
Master outdoor unit 1 Master outdoor unit 1 Master outdoor unit 1
……
ODU system 1 ODU system 2 ODU system n

Master outdoor unit 1 Master outdoor
ODU unit
system 11 ODU system 2 Master outdoor unit 1 ODU system n
ODU system
Master 1
ODU of ODU system
Master ODU 2of Master ODU of
ODU system n
Master
ODU outdoor
systemunit
1 1 Master
ODUoutdoor
systemunit
21 Master
ODU outdoor
systemunit
n 1
……
……
ODU system 1 ODU system 2 …… n
ODU system
……
Master ODU of1

ODU system Master ODU of
ODU system 2 Master ODU of
ODU system n
ODU system
Master 1 1
outdoor unit ODU
Master system
outdoor
ODU 21 1
systemunit ODU system 2 ODU outdoor
Master system unit
n 1 ODU system n
……
……
ODU system
Master ODU of1 ODU system
Master ODU of2 ODU system
Master n
ODU of
Master outdoor unit
ODU system 1 1 Master
ODUoutdoor
systemunit
2 1 Master
…… unit
ODU outdoor
system n 1
……

Master outdoor unit 1 Master
ODUoutdoor
systemunit
1 1 ODU system 2 Master outdoor unit 1 ODU system n
Master outdoor unit 1 Master outdoor unit 1 278 Master outdoor unit 1
3. Connection Steps
(1) Connection between the Modbus gateway and the Gree web-based remote monitoring and control
system
Step 1: confirm the first Modbus gateway (Modbus gateway 1) to be connected to the Gree web-based
remote monitoring and control system, and then connect RS485-1 interface R+ and R- of this Modbus
gateway to the optoelectric converter interface R+ and R- or BMS through communication lines. (see ①)
Step 2: connect RS485-1 interface R+ and R- of Modbus gateway 1 to the second Modbus gateway
(Modbus gateway 2) RS485-1 interface R+ and R- through communication lines. (see ②)
Step 3: follow the same way as in Step 2 to connect other Modbus gateways in series. (see ③)
(2) Connection between the Modbus gateway and the air conditioning system
Step1: confirm the master units to be connected to each Modbus gateway. Serial connection should be
applied as described in Section 5.2.2.(2) Communication lines between the Modbus gateway and the air
conditioning system. (see ④)
Step 2: connect the Modbus gateway‗s CAN interface G1 and G2 to the interface G1 and G2 at the
terminal board of the corresponding master unit. (see ⑤)
Step 3: when two Modbus gateways (gateway 2 and gateway 3) are required for one CAN2 network,
connect one gateway's (gateway 2) CAN interface G1 and G2 to the interface G1 and G2 at the terminal
board of the master unit, and then connect the other gateway's (gateway 3) interface G1 and G2 to the
interface G1 and G2 of the former gateway (gateway 2). (see ⑥ and ⑦)
※ CAN2 network: Please refer to the system network diagram.
279
1.4.2.4 Hardware Debug

1. DIP Switch
Note
The DIP switches shall be set prior to operation of the gateway.
This Modbus gateway includes two kinds of DIP switches, address DIP switch and function DIP switch.
Address
Function
(1) Structural Drawing of the DIP Switches
0 1
0
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LSB MSB
Projecting lever
(2) Address DIP Switch——Modbus Gateway Address Setting
The address DIP switch is intended to set the address of the Modbus gateway.
Precaution
Before using this gateway, configure an address DIP switch first. This address must be unique in the
same bus network; or communication fails.
Value range of Modbus gateway address: 1~255.
Example:
The following figure shows how to set address 11.
0 Address Code
Address DIP
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Add
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 11
Address DIP
The
following figure shows how to set address 43.
280
0 Address Code
Address DIP
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Add
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 43
Address DIP
(3) Function DIP Switch-CAN Bus Matched Resistance Setting

Precaution
The master ODU of air conditioning system or the gateway located at either end of the CAN2 bus (see
the topological drawing) should include a matched resistance; otherwise the normal communication
would fail.
The eighth position of this function DIP switch is used to set the matched resistance of the CAN2 bus.
When the Modbus gateway is located at either end of the CAN2 bus, it shall be coupled with a matched
resistance and the eighth position should be set to ―0‖.
When the Modbus gateway is located at neither end of the CAN2 bus, no matched resistance is required
the eighth position should be set to ―1‖.
CAN2 bus
CAN2 bus
……
……
ODU system 1 ODU system 2 ODU system 16

Master ODU
ODU system 1 of Master ODU2of
ODU system Master ODU16of
ODU system
Master outdoor
ODU system unit 1
1 Mastersystem
ODU outdoor unit
21 Master
ODUoutdoor
system unit n
1
With the matched Without the Without the With the matched
Withresistance
the matched matched resistance
Without the matched resistance
Without the Withresistance
the matched
resistance matched resistance matched resistance resistance
The following figure shows how to set matched resistance:
With
0 Without matched 0
matched resistance
1 resistance configured
1
configured
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8
indicates the position
Function of toggle switch
Note: The master ODU at either end of the CAN2 bus must be configured with matched resistance as
well. The following figure shows how to set matched resistance for GMV5 DC converter multi-online air
conditioning units and specific position:
Master outdoor unit
Matched
resistance
Master ODU
Matched resistance
(4) Function DIP Switch-RS485 Bus Matched Resistance Setting

The seventh position of this function DIP switch is used to set the matched resistance for the RS485 bus
(herein, it is the Modbus bus)
281
The RS485 bus should be terminated with a matched resistance to avoid signal reflex along the
transmission line.
In application of the Modbus gateway, an upper unit as the terminal unit is usually coupled with a RS485
matched resistance, so this gateway is factory defaulted to be without a matched resistance.
When the Modbus gateway is required to be set with a matched resistance, the seventh position of this
DIP switch should be set as shown in the figure above to ―0‖ and the gateway should be located at the
end of the RS485 bus.
With
Without matched
matched resistance
resistance configured
configured
Function indicates the position of toggle switch
(5) Function DIP Switch-First IDU No. Setting

As shown in the topological air conditioning network, each IDU has an identification number.
The sixth position of the function DIP switch is intended to set the first IDU number which is used to
define the range of the IDUs under the control of the gateway.
The number of IDUs ranges from 1 to 255.
When the first IDU number is set to ―1‖, it indicates the range of the IDUs under the control of the
gateway is 1 through 128.
When the first IDU number is set to ―129‖, it indicates the range of the IDUs under the control of the
gateway is 129 through 255.
When the IDU number is beyond the range defined by the gateway, it should be modified.
The following figure shows how to set the No. of the first IDU underthe control of the gateway:
0 First indoor unit

0
number: 129
First indoor
1 1
unit number :1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 6
Function DIP Projecting lever
2. Indicating LED
Running Alarm Power
RX It flashes when the gateway receives data from the target equipment
(like, the air conditioning system).
CAN
TX It flashes when data is communicated to the target equipment (like, the
air conditioning system).
RX It flashes when the gateway receives data from the monitoring PC or
RS485-1 BMS.
TX It flashes when data is communicated to the monitoring PC or BMS.
RX It is reserved.
RS232
TX It is reserved.
RX It is reserved.
RS485-2
TX It is reserved.
282
POWER It lights on when the Modbus gateway is powered normally.

RUN It flashes when the Modbus gateway is in normal operation.
ALARM It is reserved.
3. Digital Inputs and Outputs
This gateway supports five DIs (digital inputs) and five DOs (digital outputs). There is another reserved
digital output DO 6.
DI1...DI5
Digital inputs: binary (0/1) digital signals, applicable to passive inputs.
DI 1: it is defined for the fire alarm input. When K1 is short circuited, DI 1 will input the binary signal ―1‖,
which indicates that the Modbus gateway will stop the whole air conditioning system at once. When K1 is
opened, DI 1 will input the binary signal ―0‖, which indicates the whole system will resume the normal
operation.
DI2...DI5: they will be defined by the user.
E.g.: when K5 is closed, DI 5 will input the binary signal ―1‖ and input the binary signal ―0‖ when it is
opened.
Fire signal
K5 K4 K3 K2 K1
DO1...DO5
Digital outputs: relay outputs, normally open contacts.
Maximum allowable power: 250VAC,3A; 30VDC,3A
E.g.: when DO 5 is input the binary signal ―1‖, its two contacts will be closed; when DO 5 is input the
binary signal ―0‖, its two contacts will be opened.
Power
supply
283
1.4.2.5 Communication Debug
284
1.4.3 Introduction of Optoelectronic Isolated Converter

1.4.3.1. Function Introduction
The optoelectronic isolated converter is designed to convert the RS232 signal from the computer serial port into RS485
signal. It is only used when the user's BMS system uses RS232 communication mode.
1.4.3.2. Appearance
Note: Actual product prevails. The picture is for reference only.
285
1.4.3.3 Interfaces and LEDs

RS485 cable connector
A B
R+ R-
Power LED POWER

Data receiving
RX
LED
Data transmitting TX
LED
C53
V+ V- E RS232
Power cable DB9 Female Head

connector Connect the PC COM
SN Interface Name Description Remark

1 Power interface Input AC220V~50HZ; Output 12~30V DC Accompanied power
800mA supply of the converter
2 Communication Line A of RS485 connected to R+ on 485 See related instructions
interface terminal, and Line B connected to R-. RS232
port connected to RS232 on computer
3 Power indicator Normally bright when it is energizing. See related instructions
4 Communication RX/TX indicator blinks during normal See related instructions
indicator communication.
1.4.3.4 Dimensions
R+ R-
POWER
RX
TX
94mm 25mm
C53
V+ V- E RS232
72mm
88mm
1.4.3.5 Cautions on Installation
 It must be installed indoors. Avoid knock or exposure to sunshine or rain. It is suggested to place it in the monitoring
room together with the computer.
 The manufacturer's original equipment must be used. Never use any other model or substitute product.
 Independent power supply is required. Make sure to install adequate 220V AC socket for power supply.
1.4.4 Introduction of Optoelectronic Isolated Repeater
1.4.4.1. Function Introduction
Function of optoelectronic isolated repeater
1) To ensure the signal completeness and prevent the signal from attenuation under long distance communication when
the distance of the whole communication line exceeds 800m.
2) The general optoelectronic isolated repeater at present can support 32 nodes and ensure completeness of their
communication signals. When the communication nodes in the network exceed 32, the communication signal will become
incomplete. To ensure reliable transmission and completeness of the signals, we require that repeater must be used when
the number of nodes in the network exceeds 30.
286
A maximum of 30 Modbus gateways are

supported between two repeaters.
The total length of communication lines used

between two repeaters cannot exceed 800 m.
1.4.4.2 Appearance
Note: Actual product prevails. The picture is for reference only.
287
1.4.4.3 Interfaces and LEDs

RS485 terminal
Power LED
Run LED
Power line terminal RS485 terminal
SN Interface Name Description Remark

1 Power interface Input AC220V~50HZ; Output 12~30V DC 800mA Accompanied power
supply of the repeater
2 Communication interface Line A of RS485 connected to R+ on 485 terminal, See related instructions
and Line B connected to R-.
3 Power indicator Normally bright when it is energizing See related instructions
4 Communication indicator Data indicator blinks during normal See related instructions
communication.
1.4.4.4 Dimensions
R+ R-
POWER
Data
94mm 25mm
C51
V+ V- E R+ R-
72mm
88mm
1.4.4.5 Cautions on Installation
 It must be installed indoors. Avoid knock or exposure to sunshine or rain. It is suggested to place in
the control room together with the computer.
 The manufacturer's original equipment must be used. Never use any other model or substitute
product.
 Independent power supply is required. Make sure to install adequate 220V AC socket for power
supply.
288
5. Software
5.1 List of Parts
Table 4. Parts of Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System
Part Quantity Supply Range Purpose
Disk 1 SC Used for installing Gree CAC Remote
Monitoring System on a PC
Installation guide 1 SC Providing instruction on the installation of
Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System
5.2 Preliminary Check
Check whether the Modbus gateway has been successfully debugged. If not, refer to the Technical
Service Manual of Modbus Gateway to debug the gateway.
Check whether the server has serial ports. If not, replace the server with one that has serial ports.
Check whether the server is configured with driver that can read disks. If not, replace the server with one
that has driver.
Check whether the server satisfies the following software configuration requirements.
Table 5. Software configuration of Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System
Part Name Min. Configuration Recommended
Configuration
Internet Information 6.0 or later versions 6.0
Service (IIS) manager
MSMQ / /
Memory 1 GB or larger 2 GB or larger
Hardware 10 GB available 10 GB available
CPU Main frequency: 2 GHz or higher 2 GHz or higher
OS Windows Server 2003 SP2 or Windows Server
later versions, Windows 7 2003 SP
Note
Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System supports Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later versions and
Windows 7. Windows Server 2003 SP2 is recommended because the server can better provide users
with services in Windows Server 2003 SP2 system.
5.3. Software Setup
The software needs support of some Windows components in order to run; therefore, you should install
these components first before setup. The following installation flowchart shows you the basic installation
procedure. If some of the components have been available on your PC, you can skip corresponding
steps.
289
This is a simplified software installation procedure. In practice, the software has realized ―one-click setup‖.
You only need to select a proper OS for installation. See the following page:
290
For details, read the following section.

5.3.1 Installing Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System
1. Double click BASGuide.exe and the Setup Wizard is enabled. Follow the steps to install the software.
2. If the PC is not installed with Windows Installer 4.5, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed window and the
Setup Wizard will install Windows Installer 4.5 for you.
3. If the PC is not installed with Microsoft.NET Framework 4, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed window and
the Setup Wizard will install Microsoft.NET Framework 4 for you.
291
4. If the PC is not installed with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed
window and the Setup Wizard will install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express for you.
5. If the PC is not installed with Windows Image Component, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed window and
the Setup Wizard will install Windows Image Component for you.
292
6. Click ―Next‖ in the displayed window and select ―I Agree‖ on the ―License Agreement‖ page. Click
―Next‖ to install Windows Image Component.
293
294
7. After Windows Imaging Component is installed, the Wizard begins installing Windows Installer 4.5. A
system restart window will be displayed after Windows Installer 4.5 is installed. Restart the system so as
to continue.
8. After restart, the system will continue to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0.
295
Note
If the Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 window does not appear, double click the BASGuide.exe file to
enter the Setup Wizard. The components that have been installed will not be prompted and you can
continue to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0.
9. After Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 is installed, the system begins to install Microsoft SQL Server
2008 R2 Express, which takes a long time. Note that if your PC has been installed with this software, the
Wizard will not prompt you to install.
10. After Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express is installed, the Setup Wizard will automatically detect
whether your system has installed IIS6.0 or later versions and MSMQ. If not, it will prompt you to install.
Click ―Yes‖ in the displayed window.
11. While IIS or MSMQ is being installed, do not close the following window. It will automatically close
after installation is finished.
12. When all components are prepared, the Setup Wizard instructs you to install Gree CAC Remote
Monitoring System. Click ―Next‖.
296
11. In the displayed window, select ―I Agree‖ and click ―Next‖ to continue.
297
12. Select a path for installing the software. The default path is recommended. Continue to click ―Next‖.
13. When installation succeeds, ―BAS Manager‖ service is displayed. This service is an accompanied
service. Do not click ―Stop‖.
298
14. Several seconds later, the software SN window will appear. Click ―OK‖ to complete installation.
Note
Send your software SN to a dealer of Gree. If you do not activate the software, it can be used for a trial
period of 30 days. Use the activation code the dealer sends to you to activate your software, and you can
continue to use it.
5.3.3 Registration
Software activation procedure is as follows:
299
Choose ―Start‖ -> ―All Programs‖ -> ―Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System‖ -> ―Activate Software‖ and
enter the correct activation code.
5.4 Uninstallation
Software uninstallation procedure is as follows:
1. Stop the ―BAS Manager‖ service.
2. Choose ―Start‖ -> ―Settings‖ -> ―Control Panel‖ and double click ―Add or Remove Programs‖.
3. In the ―Add or Remove Programs‖ window, select ―Gree CAC Web-based Remote Monitoring and
Control System‖ and click ―Delete‖ to delete the software.
300
301
6. Software Debug
This part describes how to debug the software after it is successfully installed and the client can
communicate with the server (LAN-based access). For detailed software debug procedure, please refer
to the Help of the software.
6.1 Debug Flowchart
6.2 Debug Procedure
1. Querying IP address of the server the software is installed in
The IP address of the server PC can be queried via the Network Neighborhood.
a. Right click ―Network Neighborhood‖ and choose ―Properties‖. ―Network Connect‖ page appears.
302
b. Right click ―Local Connect‖ and choose ―Local Connect Properties‖.
c. In the ―Local Connect Properties‖ window, select ―Internet (TCP/IP)‖ and click ―Properties‖. The ―Internet
(TCP/IP) Properties‖ window appears. The ―IP Address (I)‖ is the IP address of the server PC. The following
figure shows that the IP address of the PC is 172.16.63.245.
303
304
2. Logging in to Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System via a browser

a. Open a browser (for example, IE) on a PC and enter the IP address of the server.
Note: Make sure the PC and the server PC are in the same LAN and can communicate with each other.
b. Enter the IP address in the address bar and click "To‖ to switch over to the system login page, as
shown in the following figure:
Note: If your browser is set to English, the login page will be English as well.
If the following page appears, the client PC cannot connect to the server. Possible cause is that the client
PC or the server PC does not connect to the LAN, causing both to fail to communicate.
305
Troubleshooting procedure is as follows:

1. Check network lines of the server and client and make sure they connect to the LAN;
2. Ping the IP address of the server on the client (for detailed operation, refer to the maintenance
chapter). If Ping succeeds, they can normally communicate; otherwise, the software cannot be used.
c. Enter the default username and password of the Administrator and click ―Login‖. If the following
system homepage appears, system debug succeeds and the software can be used.
Default username of the Administrator: admin; password: basstart
Note
This debug method is for the Administrator only. Other roles are not allowed to use this method.
306
Note
The preceding figure is the page showed for initial server access. Software visualization requires
Microsoft Silverlight to support. Therefore, a Microsoft Silverlight installation wizard will be prompted.
Click ―Click now to install‖ to install the plugin.
After Microsoft Silverlight is installed, the page is automatically refreshed, as shown in the following
page:
7. Remote Monitoring System Debug

After the remote monitoring system is installed and connected, follow the procedure below
to debug it.
7.1 Cooling System Debug
Before debugging air conditioners, set the air conditioning systems first, including:
Step 1: Set the master ODU for the single system network and the centralized control address for the
multi-system network.
①Check the DIP switch of the master ODU for each cooling system. For details, refer to
part II ―Introduction of Unit Function‖ in chapter II product debug.
②For the multi-cooling system network, check the address DIP switch of each cooling
system. For details, refer to part II ―Introduction of Unit Function‖ in chapter II product
debug.
Step 2: Set offset of IDU numbers.
1. After multi-system connection and debug, press SW3 on the master ODU whose
centralized control address is 0. The system enters function selection state and the
following is shown on the master ODU:
307
By default, ―A7‖ is displayed.

LED1 LED2 LED3
Function code Display mode Current progress Display mode Current state Display mode
A7 Flash 00 Flash 00 Flash
2. Press SW2 (▼) on the master ODU to select the function code n5 (setting of IDU number
offset) and press SW7 to confirm. The following is displayed:
LED1 LED2 LED3
n5 ON 00 Flash 00 Flash
3. While number offset waits for being confirmed, press SW7 to enter number offset state.
―Press SW7 to confirm" is displayed.
LED1 LED2 LED3
n5 ON 00 ON 00 ON
In this case, all IDU numbers will be automatically offset. One minute later, conflict is
addressed and the system returns to normal. The offset can be set on only the master ODU
whose centralized control address is 0.
Note: If the quantity of conflict IDU numbers is not large, you are advised to manually set
them using Gree Debugger, control panel, or remote control. Manual setting is applicable to
intra-ODU conflicts only, not affecting numbers of other IDUs. If the quantity is large,
automatic offset is recommended, which is easy to realize. However, numbers of normal
ODUs may be altered. Automatic setting is applicable to initial installation and debug.
7.2 Communication Debug Between Modbus Gateways and Air Conditioning Units
Step 1: Set matched resistance of CAN2 bus.
CAN2 bus
CAN2 bus
……
……
ODU system 1 ODU system 2 ODU system 16

Master ODU
ODU system 1 of Master ODU2of
ODU system Master ODU16of
ODU system
Master outdoor
ODU system unit 1
1 Mastersystem
ODU outdoor unit
21 Master
ODUoutdoor
system unit n
1
With the matched Without the Without the With the matched
Withresistance
the matched matched resistance
Without the matched resistance
Without the Withresistance
the matched
resistance matched resistance matched resistance resistance
As shown in the preceding figure, the master ODU and the Modbus gateway at both ends of the CAN2
bus need to be configured with matched resistance.
The following figure shows how to set matched resistance on the Modbus gateway at the end of the
CAN2 bus:
With
0 Without matched 0
matched resistance
1 resistance configured
1
configured
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8
indicates the position
Function of toggle switch
The following figure shows how to add matched resistance on the master ODU:
308
Master outdoor unit
Matched
resistance
Step 2: Power off air conditioning units and Modbus gateways and then power them on.
Step 3: View communication LEDs.
Check whether the CAN_RX LED corresponding to the Modbus gateway is flashing. If not, check
whether the G_TX LED corresponding to the master ODU whose centralized control address is 0 is
flashing or steady on. If not, check communication lines and DIP settings.
7.3 DIP Switch Setting for Modbus Gateways
Step 1: Set Modbus gateway address.
Refer to section ―Hardware Debug‖ to set Modbus gateway address. Make sure the address DIP switch
on the same Modbus bus is unique and ranges from 1 to 255.
Step 2: Set the number of first IDU.
According to the number range of IDUs to be processed by Modbus gateways, the first IDU should be
numbered 1 or 129. For details, refer to section 1.4.2.4 ―Hardware Debug‖.
7.4 Communication Debug Between Modbus Gateways and Gree Remote Monitoring System
After Gree Remote Monitoring system is installed, perform the following steps:
Step 1: Configure Modbus serial port.
Choose ―Start‖ -> ―Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System‖ -> ―Com Configuration‖.
The following window is displayed. Select a serial port number and click ―OK‖.
309
The following window is shown. Click ―OK‖ to restart the PC.

Step 2: Enable BAS Manager.
There are two methods to enable BAS Manager.
Method 1
①Right click the BAS Manager icon in the status bar at the lower right corner on the desktop and choose
―Open‖.
②In the displayed ―BAS Manager‖ window, click ―Start‖ to enable BAS Manager.
Method 2
Choose ―Start‖ -> ―All Programs‖ -> ―Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System‖ -> ―ServiceManager‖. In the
displayed ―BAS Manager‖ window, click ―Start‖ to enable BAS Manager.
310
Step 3: Log in to Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System.
Step 4: Enter the ―Visual config‖ page and click ―Automatic detect‖.
311
After detection, detected devices will be listed in the ―Net tree‖.
312
Step 5: Complete an air conditioner list.

Based on this list, users can check air conditioners of each building, storey, or apartment.
Step 6: Create a visualization project.
Enter the ―Visual config‖ page and create a project in the ―Project tree‖.
Step 7: Define devices.

Based on the air conditioner list, define devices.
Enter the ―Visual config‖ page, select devices from the ―Net tree‖, and click ―Edit‖ to define the selected
devices.
313
Step 8: Add the devices selected from the ―Net tree‖ into the ―Project tree‖.
Click the rooms in the ―Project tree‖ one after another.
314
Double click a room.
Click ―Net tree‖ and select devices based on the air conditioner list. Drag the devices into the room.
View the devices in the ―Project tree‖.
315
Step 9: Save the project.
Step 10: Enter the ―Visual navigation‖ page and you can monitor the air conditioners of the created
316
project.
Note: The devices also can be monitored in the ―Net tree‖ and ―Intelligent steward‖.
317
8. Troubleshooting
8.1 Hardware Faults
Table 6. Hardware faults
Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting
The communications lines Replace the communication
are not twisted pairs. lines with twisted pairs.
Replace the damaged
Gateway damages.
gateway.
Communication lines
Weld the interrupted lines.
interrupt.
A software communication
Communication lines are Repair the short circuited
fault alarm is reported, and
short circuited. part.
some or all units' running
Twisted pairs are too close
state is not displayed or Separate the two types of
to the power lines (less than
cannot be controlled. lines. If their clearance is
15 cm clearance), resulting
less than 15 cm, cover them
in disturbance that affects
with sheath separately.
communication.
Refer to related instructions
Communication interface
to connect the
connection error
communication interfaces.
ODUs, after being replaced
with chips or reset with DIP, Re-power on the ODUs.
are not re-powered on.
The serial port configured Connect the PCs to the
Though lines are normal, by the software is serial port configured by the
a software communication inconsistent with that software or change the serial
fault occurs and some or connected to PCs. port setting in the software.
all units' information is not Units are not powered on. Power on the units.
displayed. ODUs or IDUs are not Install the chips in a correct
equipped with chips, or direction and power on the
chips are inversely installed. units.
Unit address is incorrect or Correct the incorrect
replicate. address settings.
Though lines and devices Maybe a repeater is
are normal, information of required. If such a device Reinstall the repeater in a
devices of a floor is not has been installed, maybe correct manner.
displayed. wiring is incorrect.
A communication fault alarm
Polarities of communication Check communication lines
is reported, all units' running
lines are not distinguished for their polarities and
state is not displayed,
or they are connected in a connect them in a correct
and the TX LED on the
wrong order. order.
converter is steadily on.
Check the models of the
Lines, devices, and setups
controller and operation
are all normal. However, a The display or controller
panel. If they do not match
software communication does not match units.
unit specification, replace
fault alarm is reported.
them.
8.2 Software Faults

8.2.1 Software Abnormalities
1. Though the username and password entered are correct, the system prompts ―Please contact the
administrator‖, as shown in the following figure:
318
Possible cause:
The database for the Remote Monitoring System on the server is not enabled.
Solution:
(1) Check whether the database for the Remote Monitoring System in the server is enabled. Right click
―My computer‖ and choose ―Manage‖ from the shortcut menu, and choose ―Services and Applications‖
-> ―Services‖ to check whether the SQL Server (SQLEXPRESS) is running; if not, right click it and
choose ―Start‖. If SQL Server is not found, maybe SQL Server setup fails. Unload the software and
reinstall it; or manually install SQL Server 2008 R2 and then install this software.
(2) During self-check, ―BAS system service has been stopped‖ is prompted, as shown in the following
figure:
319
Possible cause:
Communication between the server and gateway fails.
Solution:
(1) Check whether a hardware fault exists. Check gateway running. For details, refer to section 7.1
"Hardware Faults".
(2) If there is not hardware fault or the fault is addressed, restart BAS Service. There are two methods to
restart BAS Service.
Method a
―Open‖.
320
Method b
Choose ―Start‖ -> ―All Programs‖ -> ―Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System‖-> ―ServiceManager‖. In the
3. During remote monitoring, services are stopped abnormally. The BAS Manager icon in the status bar
at the lower right corner on the desktop becomes red.
321
Possible cause:
Solution:
"Hardware Faults".
Method a
―Open‖.
Method b
Choose ―Start‖ -> ―All Programs‖ -> ―Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System‖ -> ―ServiceManager‖. In the
322
4. After the server IP address is entered through IE on the client, "Internet Explorer cannot display the
webpage" is prompted, as shown in the following figure:
Possible causes:
The server is not started.
Network line of the server or the client is not properly connected.
Server or client network is faulty, causing server access to fail.
The IIS manager in the server abnormally disables the website.
Solution:
323
(1) Check whether the server is started.

(2) Check the network line of the server and client for looseness or damage.
(3) Check the network adapter of the server and client for looseness or damage; and check whether
―Local connect‖ is enabled.
(4) If the problem persists, ping the server or the client.
The ping procedure is as follows:
①Choose ―Start‖ -> ―Run‖. The ―Run‖ window is displayed. Enter ―cmd‖ in the text box and click ―OK‖.
②In the displayed ―cmd.exe‖ window, enter the IP address of the PC to be pinged through, for example
―Ping 192.168.0.122‖, if the following information is shown, the system can be used.
④ If the following timeout information is displayed, network fails. Check network information.
324
(5) If network is available but the client still cannot access the server website, you need to open the IIS
manager.
①Choose ―Start‖ -> ―All Programs‖ -> ―Manage Tools‖ -> ―IIS Manager‖, as shown in the following figure:
②In the displayed ―IIS Manager‖ window, open the navigation tree in the left, choose ―Website‖ ->
―Default website‖, and right click it to choose ―Start‖ to enable the website.
325
BACnet Gateway Remote Monitoring System

1. Major Functions
Visualized management
Centralized control
Energy management
Monitoring running state of central air conditioners
Fault alarm
Setting running parameters of units
2. Terms and Definitions
Server: A PC for installing Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System and providing remote monitoring and
data collection services.
Client: A PC for users to access server resources. Through the browser installed on this PC, users can
access Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System of the server to perform unit control, data display, and
management functions.
326
3. BACnet Gateway Topology

As shown in the topological diagram below, the whole system consists of the internal network of the air
conditioning unit and BACnet/IP network through which the communication data can be exchanged.
In the network above, L3 is the line for RJ45 and L2 is the twisted pair line.
Note: the total length of L2 can not exceed 500 m and a matched resistance shall be added at both ends.
4. Hardware
4.1 BACnet Product Overview
BACnet gateway kits MG30-24/D2(B) are intended to realize the data exchange between the air
conditioning unit and BAS, and providing 8 I/Os (four inputs are E0, E1. E/A2, E/A3 and four outputs are
E/A4, E/A5, A6, A7). E0 is the fire alarm interface. The status of other I/Os is mapped to the specific
objects of the BACnet/IP bus and is defined by the user.
327
4.1.1 BACnet Gateway TCP/IP (Default)

IP Address: 192.168.1.150;
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
Default Router: 192.168.1.1.
4.1.2 Parts and Assembly
See figures below for the real parts and final assembly of the BACnet gateway kit MG30-24/D2(B).
No. Parts Name

1 PCD3.M6340
2 PCD7.R-SD1024
3 PCD3.B100
4 PCD3.R600
5 Communication interface board ZTS6LA
6 Battery Module
7 PCD7.R560
328
4.1.3 Parts Assembly

The figure below shows assembly position of various parts of the BACnet gateway kits MG30-24/D2(B):
The figure below shows final assembly of various parts of the BACnet gateway kits MG30-24/D2(B):
329
4.2 Interfaces and Indicating LEDs

4.2.1 Interfaces
Interfaces as shown in the figure below are available.
4.2.2 Power Interfaces

Power supply is input through the wiring terminals. Power Supply: 24VDC -20/+25% incl. 5% ripples as
per EN/IEC 61131-2, 175mA/4.2W normal, 500mA/12W maximum.
4.2.3 Communication Interface Board
330
Description
Printed Mark Terminal Pin Description
1/2: without the As shown in the figure above,
matched when the switch is set to the
resistance end ―ON‖, it indicates the
S1(1) matched resistance is added;
DIP switch
S1(2) ON: with the when the switch is set to the
matched digital end ―1/2‖, it indicates the
resistance matched resistance is not
added. The later is the default.
G1 Wiring G1: CAN_H Two-wire line, used to connect
G2 terminal G2: CAN_L the CAN bus.
4.2.4 I/O Module
Printed
Terminal Pin Description
Mark
8 (+) PIN8:+24VDC
9 (-) Wiring
24V /DC
terminal PIN9:GND
E0(0) 0: fire alarm input
Two-wire signal line. 0 is the fire alarm
E1(1) Wiring
input and other I/Os can be defined by
E/A2(2) terminal 1, 2, 3: input
the user.
E/A3(3)
E/A4(4)
E/A5(5) Wiring Two-wire signal line. I/Os can be
4, 5, 6, 7: output
A6(6) terminal defined by the user.
A7(7)
Note: when the input voltage between DI and GND is 24V, the DI interface is enabled; when the
output voltage between DO and GND is 24V, the DO interface is enabled.
4.3 Indicating LEDs
4.3.1 Power Indicating LED
As shown in the figure below, the printed mark ―Power‖ represents the power indicating LED. When it
turned to red, it indicates the BACnet gateway is powered on; when it turns off, it indicates the BACnet
gateway is powered off.
4.3.2 PCD 3.M6340 Indicating LED
331
○LED OFF ●LED ON ●/○LED flash

CPU type PCD3.M6430 battery module
LED Batt Run Halt Error
Color Red Green Red Yellow
Run ○ ● ○ ○
Run cond. ○ ●/○ ○ ○
Run with error ○ ● ○ ●
Run cond. with error ○ ●/○ ○ ●
Stop ○ ○ ○ ○
Stop with error ○ ○ ○ ●
Halt ○ ○ ● ○
Stop with error ○ ●/○ ●/○ ●/○
Batt./Super Cap voltage absent ● ○ ○ ○
○LED off ●LED on ●/○LED flashing
332
Start Self-diagnosis for approx. 1 sec. after switching on or after a Restart

Run Normal processing of the user program after Start. Where a
programming unit is connected via a PCD8.K11x in PGU mode
(e.g. PG5 in PGU mode), the CPU automatically goes into the Stop
state and not the Run state; this is for safety reasons
Run Conditional Run state. A condition has been set in the debugger
conditional (Run until…), which has not yet been met
Run with error Same as Run, but with an error message
Run cond. with Same as conditional Run, but with an error message
error
Stop The Stop state occurs in the following cases:
 Programming unit in PGU mode connected when the CPU was
switched on
 PGU stopped by programming unit
 Condition for a COND.RUN has been met
Stop with error Same as Stop, but with an error message
Halt The Halt state occurs in the following cases:
 Halt instruction processed
 Serious error in user program
 Hardware fault
 No program loaded
 no communication module on an S-Bus PGU or Gateway Master
port
System If the PLC doesn‗t go to RUN after 2 minutes, you have to send it for
diagnostics repair
Reset The RESET state has the following causes:
 Supply voltage too low
 Firmware not starting up
4.3.3 PCD3.R600 Indicating LED
333
The memory module has 5 indicating LEDs:

LED Meaning
User User LED, set by the user program with the base address of the module
(SET = off; RES = on)
Diag Flashes when there is an error message
Write Prot Active when a "write-protected" condition is detected (read-only SD switch,
BCD switch or software)
Busy Do not remove the module when this LED is on.
Activity Works as with a hard disk drive; flashes when data being processed
Note: Do not remove the card when the "Busy" LED is on.
4.3.4 I/O Module Indicating LED
As shown in the figure above, E0, E1, E/A2, E/A3 indicating LEDs are marks for four inputs and E/A4,
E/A5, A6, A7 indicating LEDs are marks for four outputs. Among them, when any one is the high-level
input/output, the corresponding LED will light on. (Voltage between each I/O and GND is 24V. I/O is at
the high level.)
4.4 Field Installation
4.4.1 Hardware Installation
1. Outline Dimensions
2. Installation in the Electric Control Cabinet
334
The PCD3 CPUs and the module holders can be snapped onto the 35mm top-hat rail according to DIN
EN60715 TH35 (formerly DIN EN50022). (Remember: the PCD2 needs two hop-hat rails).
Mounting the PCD3 on the top-hat rail:
(1) Press the bottom of the housing onto the mounting surface.
(2) Press upwards against the top-hat rail
(3) Press the top of the housing against the mounting surface and snap into place.
(4) Push the housing down onto the top-hat rail to ensure that it is secure.
Removal:
To removal the housing, push upwards and pull out.

(1) Insert the module into the appropriate module location and press down to the bottom of the CPU or
module holder housing.
(2) For security, a guide rail is provided to prevent the module being inserted the wrong way round. In
awkward positions, the modules can also be secured with a screw 3X8mm which is commercial
available from the hardware store.
3. Required Installation Space in the Electric Control Cabinet:
The minimal required installation space is as shown in the figure below.
335
4. BACnet Gateway Topology

As shown in the topological diagram below, the whole system consists of the internal network of the air
conditioning units and BACnet/IP network. Through BACnet gateways, communication data can be
exchanged.
336
BMS system
Gree Web-based Gree Web-based
Remote Monitoring and Remote Monitoring and
Control System (client) Control System (client)
Fire-fighting
Other device
Ventilation
distribution
Lighting
Lift
Power
Router
Gree Web-based
Remote Monitoring
and Control System
(server side)
BACnet gateway 1
BACnet gateway n
Unit 1
System 1: Four outdoor units compose this ODU system
Master outdoor Indoor unit Indoor unit

unit 1
Slave outdoor Slave outdoor Slave outdoor

unit 2 unit 3 unit 4
Unit 2
System 2: Three outdoor units compose this ODU system

Master outdoor
unit 1
Slave outdoor Slave outdoor

unit 2 unit 3
System 3: Two outdoor units compose this ODU system
Master outdoor
unit 1
Indoor unit
Slave outdoor
unit 2
Unit 1
System 4: One outdoor unit composes this ODU system
Master outdoor
unit 1
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
337
In the network above, L3 is the line for RJ45; L2 and L1 are the twisted pair line.
Notes: the total length of L2 cannot exceed 500m and a matched resistance shall be added at
both ends.
4.4.2 How to Configure the Gateway
Note: Before configuring BACnet, download JRE or JDK from the Oracle website first, which will
assist you in configuring BACnet via a browser.
One BACnet gateway can connect up to 8 ODUs and 48 IDUs (that is, when the IDUs are more than 48
or the ODUs are more than 8, another gateway will be required). Specific relation exists between the air
conditioning units and the gateway and there is always a minimal IDU number and a minimal ODU
number for a gateway. Suppose the minimal IDU number is M, then all IDUs will be numbered among M
to M+47. Suppose the minimal IDU number is N, then all IDUs will be numbered among N to N+7. During
field installation, when only IDUs or ODUs are present for a gateway, then it will fail to process the data
from them.
The gateway shall be configured after its installation, however, before this please set the IP address of
the PC the same with that of the BACnet gateway. See Appendix A for more details.
(1) Open the IE browser and input the default IP address http://192.168.1.150 into the address field.
(2) The default username and password are both ―Config‖.
After input, press the ―ENTER‖ button to go to the setting page as shown below. The configurable objects
include the minimum IDU number, the minimum ODU number, CAN IP, BACnet IP address, subnet mask,
and gateway address. Then, click the ―Confirm‖ button.
338
4.4.3 Connection Between the BACnet Gateway and the PC

There are two methods to connect BACnet gateways and PCs.
1. Cross Connection
339
2. Parallel Connection
4.4.4 Connection Between the BACnet Gateway and Air Conditioners

Twist pair, with the polarity the same as that of the master ODU (address DIP setting is 0).
5. Software
5.1 List of Parts
Part Quantity Supply Purpose
Range
Disk 1 SC Used for installing Gree CAC Remote
Monitoring System on a server PC
Installation guide 1 SC Providing instruction on the installation of Gree
CAC Remote Monitoring System
340
5.2 Preliminary Check

Check the server for network interface. If it does not have network interface, replace it with one that has
network interface. The network interface will ensure normal communication between the server and
BACnet and client.
Check the adapter and check whether server is connected to a LAN. If not, connect it to the LAN so that
the client can communicate with the server.
Check whether the BACnet gateway has been successfully debugged. If not, refer to the Technical
Service Manual of BACnet Gateway to debug BACnet gateway.
Check whether the server is configured with driver that can read disks.
Check whether the server satisfies the following software configuration requirements.
Part Name Min. Configuration Recommended
Configuration
Internet Information 6.0 or later versions 6.0
Service (IIS) manager
MSMQ / /
Memory 1 GB or larger 2 GB or larger
Hardware 10 GB available 10 GB available
CPU Main frequency: 2 GHz or higher 2 GHz or higher
OS Windows Server 2003 SP2 or Windows Server
later versions, Windows 7 2003 SP
Note
Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System supports Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later versions and
Windows 7. Windows Server 2003 SP2 is recommended because the server can better provide users
with services in Windows Server 2003 SP2 system.
5.3. Software Setup
The software needs support of some Windows components in order to run; therefore, you should install
these components first before setup. The following installation flowchart shows you the basic installation
procedure. If some of the components have been available on your PC, you can skip corresponding
steps.
341
This is a simplified software installation procedure. In practice, the software has realized ―one-click
setup‖. You only need to select a proper OS for installation. See the following page:
For details, read the following section.

5.3.1 Installing Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System
1. Double click BASGuide.exe and the Setup Wizard is enabled. Follow the steps to install the software:
342
2. If the PC is not installed with Windows Installer 4.5, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed window and the
Setup Wizard will install Windows Installer 4.5 for you.
3. If the PC is not installed with Microsoft.NET Framework 4, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed window and
the Setup Wizard will install Microsoft.NET Framework 4 for you.
343
4. If the PC is not installed with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed
window and the Setup Wizard will install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express for you.
5. If the PC is not installed with Windows Image Component, click ―Accept‖ in the displayed window and
the Setup Wizard will install Windows Image Component for you.
344
6. Click ―Next‖ in the displayed window and select ―I Agree‖ on the ―License Agreement‖ page. Click
―Next‖ to install Windows Image Component.
345
346
7. After Windows Imaging Component is installed, the Wizard begins installing Windows Installer 4.5. A
system restart window will be displayed after Windows Installer 4.5 is installed. Restart the system so as
to continue.
8. After restart, the system will continue to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0.
347
Note
If the Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 window does not appear, double click the BASGuide.exe file to
enter the Setup Wizard. The components that have been installed will not be prompted and you can
continue to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0.
9. After Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 is installed, the system begins to install Microsoft SQL Server
2008 R2 Express, which takes a long time. Note that if your PC has been installed with this software, the
Wizard will not prompt you to install.
10. After Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express is installed, the Setup Wizard will automatically detect
whether your system has installed IIS6.0 or later versions and MSMQ. If not, it will prompt you to install.
Click ―Yes‖ in the displayed window.
11. While IIS or MSMQ is being installed, do not close the following window. It will automatically close
after installation is finished.
12. When all components are prepared, the Setup Wizard instructs you to install Gree CAC Remote
Monitoring System. Click ―Next‖.
348
11. In the displayed window, select ―I Agree‖ and click ―Next‖ to continue.
349
12. Select a path for installing the software. The default path is recommended. Continue to click ―Next‖.
13. When installation succeeds, ―BAS Manager‖ service is displayed. This service is an accompanied
service. Do not click ―Stop‖.
350
14. Several seconds later, the software SN window will appear. Click ―OK‖ to complete installation.
Note
Send your software SN to a dealer of Gree. If you do not activate the software, it can be used for a trial
period of 30 days. Use the activation code the dealer sends to you to activate your software, and you can
continue to use it.
5.3.3 Registration
Software activation procedure is as follows:
351
Choose ―Start‖ -> ―All Programs‖ -> ―Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System‖ -> ―Activate Software‖ and
enter the correct activation code.
352
5.4 Uninstallation
Software uninstallation procedure is as follows:
1. Stop the ―BAS Manager‖ service.
2. Choose ―Start‖ -> ―Settings‖ -> ―Control Panel‖ and double click ―Add or Remove Programs‖.
3. In the ―Add or Remove Programs‖ window, select ―Gree CAC Web-based Remote Monitoring and
Control System‖ and click ―Delete‖ to delete the software.
353
6. Software Debug
This part describes how to debug the software after it is successfully installed and the client can
communicate with the server (LAN-based access). For detailed software debug procedure, please refer
to the Help of the software.
6.1 Debug Flowchart
6.2 Debug Procedure
1. Querying IP address of the server the software is installed in
The IP address of the server PC can be queried via the Network Neighborhood.
a. Right click ―Network Neighborhood‖ and choose ―Properties‖. ―Network Connect‖ page appears.
b. Right click ―Local Connect‖ and choose ―Local Connect Properties‖.
354
c. In the ―Local Connect Properties‖ window, select ―Internet (TCP/IP)‖ and click ―Properties‖. The ―Internet
(TCP/IP) Properties‖ window appears. The ―IP Address (I)‖ is the IP address of the server PC. The following
figure shows that the IP address of the PC is 172.16.63.245.
355
2. Logging in to Gree CAC Remote Monitoring System via a browser

a. Open a browser (for example, IE) on a PC and enter the IP address of the server.
Note: Make sure the PC and the server PC are in the same LAN and can communicate with each other.
b. Enter the IP address in the address bar and click ―To‖ to switch over to the system login page, as
shown in the following figure:
356
Note: If your browser is set to English, the login page will be English as well.

357
Note
358

Note
359
Note
The preceding figure is the page showed for initial server access. Software visualization requires
Microsoft Silverlight to support. Therefore, a Microsoft Silverlight installation wizard will be prompted.
Click ―Click now to install‖ to install the plugin.
After Microsoft Silverlight is installed, the page is automatically refreshed, as shown in the following
page:
360
7. Troubleshooting
7.1 Hardware Faults
Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting

Communication lines of units are
not twisted pairs (except for lines
Replace the communication
connecting BACnet gateways
lines with twisted pairs.
and PCs, other communication
lines must be twisted pairs).
Communication lines are loose;
Connect the gateways and
or polarities of communication
ODUs in a correct way;
lines connecting BACnet
make sure their polarities
gateways and ODUs whose
are correspondent, that is,
control DIP switches are 0 are
A software G1 to G1 and G2 to G2.
reverse (G1, G2 reverse).
communication fault Communication lines connecting
alarm is reported, Weld the interrupted lines.
ODUs and IDUs interrupt.
and some or all units'
running state is not
displayed or cannot Communication lines interrupt. Weld the interrupted lines.
be controlled.
Communication lines are short Repair the short circuited

circuited. part.
Twisted pairs are too close to the
Separate the two types of
power lines (less than 15 cm
lines. If their clearance is
clearance), resulting in
less than 15 cm, cover them
disturbance that affects
with sheath separately.
communication.
Communication interface Refer to the BACnet
connection error Technical Manual to
361
connect the communication

interfaces.
ODUs, after being replaced with
chips or reset with DIP, are not Re-power on the ODUs.
re-powered on.
Refer to the network
topology in the BACnet
Matched resistance is not
Technical Manual to
configured.
configure matched
Though lines are resistances.
normal, a software After gateway IP addresses are
communication fault modified, the gateways are not Re-power on the gateways.
occurs and some or re-powered on.
all units' information The unit address configured by
Modify unit address
is not displayed. the software is inconsistent with
settings.
the actual address of units.
Units are not powered on. Power on the units.
ODUs or IDUs are not equipped Install the chips in a correct
with chips, or chips are inversely direction and power on the
installed. units.
Unit address is incorrect or Correct the incorrect
replicate. address settings.
The maximum distance between
Though lines and Control the distance within
a gateway and its directly
devices are normal, 500m.
connected ODUs exceeds 500 m.
information of
Refer to the BACnet
devices of a floor is The number of the first unit is
Technical Manual to reset
not displayed. incorrect.
the number.
Lines, devices, and Check the models of the
setups are all normal. controller and operation
The display or controller does not
However, a software panel. If they do not match
match units.
communication fault unit specification, replace
alarm is reported. them.
362
7.2 Software Faults

7.2.1 Software Abnormalities
1. Though the username and password entered are correct, the system prompts ―Please contact the
administrator‖, as shown in the following figure:
Possible cause:
The database for the Remote Monitoring System on the server is not enabled.
Solution:
(1) Check whether the database for the Remote Monitoring System in the server is enabled. Right click
―My computer‖ and choose ―Manage‖ from the shortcut menu, and choose ―Services and Applications‖
-> ―Services‖ to check whether the SQL Server (SQLEXPRESS) is running; if not, right click it and
choose ―Start‖. If SQL Server is not found, maybe SQL Server setup fails. Unload the software and
reinstall it; or manually install SQL Server 2008 R2 and then install this software.
(2) During self-check, ―BAS system service has been stopped‖ is prompted, as shown in the following
figure:
363
Possible cause:
Solution:
―Hardware Faults‖.
Method a
―Open‖.
364
Method b
3. During remote monitoring, services are stopped abnormally. The BAS Manager icon in the status bar
at the lower right corner on the desktop becomes red.
365
Possible cause:
Solution:
―Hardware Faults‖.
Method a
―Open‖.
Method b
366
4. After the server IP address is entered through IE on the client, "Internet Explorer cannot display the
webpage" is prompted, as shown in the following figure:
Possible causes:
The server is not started.
Network line of the server or the client is not properly connected.
Server or client network is faulty, causing server access to fail.
367
The IIS manager in the server abnormally disables the website.

Solution:
(1) Check whether the server is started.
(2) Check the network line of the server and client for looseness or damage.
(3) Check the network adapter of the server and client for looseness or damage; and check whether
―Local connect‖ is enabled.
(4) If the problem persists, ping the server or the client.
The ping procedure is as follows:
①Choose ―Start‖ -> ―Run‖. The ―Run‖ window is displayed. Enter ―cmd‖ in the text box and click ―OK‖.
②In the displayed ―cmd.exe‖ window, enter the IP address of the PC to be pinged through, for example
―Ping 192.168.0.122‖, if the following information is shown, the system can be used.
368
① If the following timeout information is displayed, network fails. Check network information.
(5) If network is available but the client still cannot access the server website, you need to open the IIS
manager.
①Choose ―Start‖ -> ―All Programs‖ -> ―Manage Tools‖ -> ―IIS Manager‖, as shown in the following figure:
②In the displayed ―IIS Manager‖ window, open the navigation tree in the left, choose ―Website‖ ->
―Default website‖, and right click it to choose ―Start‖ to enable the website.
369
5. No unit information is found after self detection.

Possible causes:
BAS Service is abnormally disabled.
Communication between the server and BACnet gateway fails.
Communication between the BACnet gateway and units fails.
Solution:
(1) Check whether BAS Service is disabled. If yes, enable it.
There are two methods to enable BAS Service.
Method a
―Open‖.
370
Method b
(2) Ping the BACnet gateway on the server. If the server is successfully pinged through, communication
between the gateway and units may fail. Refer to section 7.1 ―Hardware Faults‖ to address the problem.
371
JF00302751
372

gmv5 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

gmv5 Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

gmv5 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMV5 DC INVERTER VRF UNITS

Chapter 1 Introduction to Basic Features

GMV-224WM/B-X CN851W1280 R410A 22400 3，380~415，50/60

GMV-280WM/B-X CN851W1290 R410A 28000 3，380~415，50/60

GMV-335WM/B-X CN851W1300 R410A 33500 3，380~415，50/60

GMV-400WM/B-X CN851W1310 R410A 40000 3，380~415，50/60

GMV-450WM/B-X CN851W1320 R410A 45000 3，380~415，50/60

GMV-504WM/B-X CN851W1610 R410A 50400 3，380~415，50/60

GMV-560WM/B-X CN851W1620 R410A 56000 3，380~415，50/60

GMV-615WM/B-X CN851W1630 R410A 61500 3，380~415，50/60

II. Internal Piping Design of the Units

2. Piping Diagram of GMV-400WM/B-X and GMV-450WM/B-X

3. Piping Diagram of GMV-504WM/B-X, GMV-560WM/B-X and GMV-615WM/B-X

4. Names and Main Functions of Components

29 Filter Prevents impurities from entering components and parts.

30 Capillary tube Supports flow regulating and pressure reduction.

III. Basic Parameters of Unit

Power Supply 380-415V 3N~ 50Hz/60Hz

GMV-68 GMV-73 GMV-78 GMV-85 GMV-90 GMV-96 GMV-10 GMV-10

GMV-1130 GMV-1180 GMV-1235 GMV-1300 GMV-1350 GMV-1410 GMV-1460

GMV-1515 GMV-1580 GMV-1630 GMV-1685 GMV-1750 GMV-1800

GMV-1845W GMV-1908W GMV-1962W GMV-2016W GMV-2072W GMV-2128W

GMV-2184W GMV-2240W GMV-2295W GMV-2350W GMV-2405W GMV-2460W

IV. Electrical Parameters

GMV-280WM/B-X GMV-280WM/B-X 25 25 2.5 2.5×5

GMV-335WM/B-X GMV-335WM/B-X 32 32 4.0 4.0×5

GMV-400WM/B-X GMV-400WM/B-X 40 40 6.0 6.0×5

GMV-450WM/B-X GMV-450WM/B-X 40 40 6.0 6.0×5

GMV-615WM/B-X GMV-615WM/B-X 63 63 10 10×5

GMV-680WM/B-X 280+400 63 25 + 40 2.5 + 6.0 2.5×5 + 6.0×5

GMV-730WM/B-X 280+450 63 25 + 40 2.5 + 6.0 2.5×5 + 6.0×5

GMV-785WM/B-X 280+504 80 25 + 50 2.5 + 10 2.5×5 + 10×5

GMV-950WM/B-X 335+615 80 32 + 63 4.0 + 10 4.0×5 + 10×5

GMV-1010WM/B-X 400+615 100 40 + 63 6.0 + 10 6.0×5 + 10×5

GMV-1065WM/B-X 450+615 100 40 + 63 6.0 + 10 6.0×5 + 10×5

GMV-1130WM/B-X 504+615 125 50 + 63 10 + 10 10×5 + 10×5

GMV-1300WM/B-X 280+450+560 125 25 + 40 + 63 2.5 + 6.0 + 10 2.5×5 + 6.0×5 +10×5

GMV-1800WM/B-X 560+615+615 180 63 + 63 + 63 10 + 10 +10 10×5 + 10×5 + 10×5

Circuit Circuit breaker

Less than 10A 10 1.0 1.0

Electrical Parameters of High-static-pressure Air-duct-type Air Conditioner

Circuit Breaker Capacity Minimum Sectional Area

GMV-ND56PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND63PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND71PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND80PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND90PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND100PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND112PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND125PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND140PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND160PHS/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 6 1.0

GMV-ND224PH/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 10 1.0

GMV-ND280PH/A-T 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz 10 1.0

GMV-NX224P/A(X2.0)-M 380-415V～50Hz 6 1.0 1.0

GMV-NX280P/A(X2.5)-M 380-415V～50Hz 6 1.0 1.0

GMV-NX280P/A(X3.0)-M 380-415V～50Hz 6 1.0 1.0

GMV-NX450P/A(X4.0)-M 380-415V～50Hz 10 1.0 1.0